TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R
PROFIBUS DP
Motor Management Controller
User Manual

1639502EN-04

09/2014

www.schneider-electric.com

The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a
substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user
applications. It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk
analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use
thereof. Neither Schneider Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for
misuse of the information contained herein. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments
or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,
including photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this
product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data, only the
manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant instructions must
be followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
2014 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About the Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Description of the LTM R PROFIBUS DP Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2 Metering and Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Average Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Capacity Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line-to-Line Voltages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Voltage Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Average Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Power and Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 System and Device Monitoring Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Internal Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Internal Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Command Error Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time to Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LTM R Configuration Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Fault and Warning Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introducing Fault and Warning Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Faults Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Warnings Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Reset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protection Faults and Warnings Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Command Errors Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Faults Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Loss Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Fault Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Motor History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Starts Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Starts Per Hour Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Sheddings Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1639502EN-04 09/2014

9
11
13
14
19
22
24
27
28
29
30
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
37
38
38
39
40
41
42
44
46
46
48
48
48
49
50
51
51
51
51
52
52
52
53
53
53
54
55
55
55

Auto Restart Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor Last Start Current Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Last Start Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 System Operating Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3 Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Protection Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Thermal Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal Overload - Definite Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rapid Cycle Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Current Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Phase Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undercurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Ground Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Voltage Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Phase Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Phase Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Phase Reversal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage Dip Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Power Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4 Motor Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Control Channels and Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Wiring and Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55
56
56
56
57
58
58
59
60
61
62
64
65
66
70
72
73
75
77
79
81
83
84
87
89
90
92
94
96
98
99
101
103
104
107
109
110
112
114
115
117
121
122
124
126
128
131
132
133
136
139
142
143
144
146

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Overload Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Independent Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverser Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Speed Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Fault Management and Clear Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Management - Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault and Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LTM R Controller Clear Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Logic Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring - Logic Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to an HMI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP Network Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required and Optional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLC (Full Load Current) Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP Communication Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verifying System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stand-Alone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the HMI Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Download 1-to-many Software Application Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Description (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Lines (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Values (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1639502EN-04 09/2014

147
149
151
154
159
163
164
165
167
169
172
174
176
179
180
181
182
184
187
192
196
201
203
204
207
210
212
216
217
219
221
225
226
228
230
231
233
235
237
239
240
241
242
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
255
256
257
5

Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Menu Structure (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller Page (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product ID (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring (1-to-many). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Management (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Commands (1-to-many) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Using the PROFIBUS DP Communication Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP Protocol Principle and Main Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information on Implementation via PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration of the LTM R PROFIBUS DP Network Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules as Presented in the GS*-File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP Configuration via the SyCon Configuration Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROFIBUS DP Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclic Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PKW: Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP V0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acyclic Data Read/Write via PROFIBUS DP V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Telegram for PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Map Variables (User Defined Indirect Registers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register Map (Organization of Communication Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Map Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Logic Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification and Maintenance Functions (IMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detecting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication Warnings and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix A Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix B Configurable Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

260
261
262
263
265
266
273
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
284
285
286
287
288
290
292
298
300
303
305
306
307
308
314
315
321
327
334
335
336
337
339
340
341
343
345
346
349
351
352
355
357
358
361
362
363
365
366

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix C Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.1

C.2

Glossary
Index

1639502EN-04 09/2014

IEC Format Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

......................................................
......................................................

367
369
371
372
375
376
377
381
383
385
387
389
391
393
395
396
400
402
404
406
408
410
412
415
419

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before
trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this
documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this
material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of
electrical equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the
hazards involved.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

10

1639502EN-04 09/2014

About the Book

At a Glance
Document Scope
This manual describes the PROFIBUS DP network protocol version of the TeSys T LTM R motor
management controller and LTM E expansion module.
The purpose of this manual is to:
describe and explain the monitoring, protection, and control functions of the LTM R controller and
LTM E expansion module
provide all the information necessary to implement and support a solution that best meets your
application requirements

The manual describes the 4 key parts of a successful system implementation:

installing the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module
commissioning the LTM R controller by setting essential parameter values
using the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module, both with and without additional humanmachine interface devices
maintaining the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module
This manual is intended for:
design engineers
system integrators
system operators
maintenance engineers
Validity Note
This manual is valid for all LTM R PROFIBUS DP controllers. Some functions are available depending on
the software version of the controller.
Related Documents
Title of Documentation

Reference Number

TeSys T LTM R Instruction Sheet

AAV7709901

TeSys T LTM E Instruction Sheet

AAV7950501

TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users Manual

1639581

TeSys T LTM CU Instruction Sheet

AAV6665701

TeSys T DTM Online Help

1672614

XBT-N User Manual

1681029

XBT-N Instruction Sheet

1681014

Electrical Installation Guide (Wiki version)

www.electrical-installation.org

Okken Solution Guide

DESY014EN

Blokset Solution Guide

ESBED297701EN

PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Planning

8.012 (www.profibus.com/downloads/)

PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and Assembly

8.022 (www.profibus.com/downloads/)

You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at
www.schneider-electric.com.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

11

12

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Introduction
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 1
Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System

Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System

Overview
This chapter introduces the TeSys T motor management system and its companion devices.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System

14

System Selection Guide

19

Physical Description of the LTM R PROFIBUS DP Controller

22

Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module

24

13

Introduction

Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System

Aim of the Product
The TeSys T motor management system offers protection, control, and monitoring capabilities for singlephase and 3-phase AC induction motors.
The system is flexible, modular, and can be configured to meet the requirements of applications in industry.
The system is designed to meet the needs for integrated protections systems with open communications
and a global architecture.
Highly accurate sensors and solid-state full motor protection provide better utilization of the motor.
Complete monitoring functions enable analysis of motor operating conditions and faster responses to
prevent system downtime.
The system offers diagnostic and statistics functions and configurable warnings and faults, allowing better
prediction of component maintenance, and provides data to continuously improve the entire system.
Examples of Supported Machine Segments
The motor management system supports the following machine segments:
Machine Segment

Examples

Process and special machine segments

Water and waste water treatment

water treatment (blowers and agitators)
Metal, Minerals, and Mining
cement
glass
steel
ore extraction

Oil and gas

oil and gas processing
petrochemical
refinery, offshore platform

Microelectronic
Pharmaceutical
Chemical industry
cosmetics
detergents
fertilizers
paint
Transportation industry
automotive transfer lines
airports

Other industry
tunnel machines
cranes

Complex machine segments

14

Includes highly automated or coordinated machines used in:

pumping systems
paper conversion
printing lines
HVAC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Introduction

Supported Industries
The motor management system supports the following industries and associated business sectors:
Industry

Sectors

Building

Industry

office buildings
shopping centers
industrial buildings
ships
hospitals
cultural facilities
airports

metal, mineral, and mining: cement,

Energy and
Infrastructure

Application

glass, steel, ore-extraction

microelectronic
petrochemical
ethanol
chemical: pulp and paper industry
pharmaceutical
food and beverage

water treatment and transportation

transportation infrastructure for people

and freight: airports, road tunnels,

subways, and tramways
power generation and transport

Control and manage the building facilities:

critical HVAC systems
water
air
gas
electricity
steam

control and monitor pump motors

control ventilation
control load traction and movements
view status and communicate with machines
process and communicate the data captured
remotely manage data for one or several sites via
the Internet

control and monitor pump motors

control ventilation
remotely control wind turbine
remotely manage data for one or several sites via
the Internet

TeSys T Motor Management System

The 2 main hardware components of the system are the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion
module.
The system can be configured and controlled:

using an HMI (Human Machine Interface) device: Magelis XBT or TeSys T LTM CU
using a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
using a PLC connected to the system via the communication network
Components such as external motor load current transformers and ground current transformers add
additional range to the system.
LTM R Controller
The microprocessor-based LTM R controller is the central component in the system that manages the
control, protection, and monitoring functions of single-phase or 3-phase AC induction motors.
The LTM R controller is designed to work over various fieldbus protocols. This manual focuses only on
systems designed to communicate over the PROFIBUS DP protocol.
The range includes 6 LTM R controller models using PROFIBUS DP communication protocol.
LTM R Controller

Functional Description

1639502EN-04 09/2014

current sensing 0.4...100 A

single-phase or 3-phase current inputs
6 discrete logic inputs
4 relay outputs: 3 SPST, 1 DPST
connections for a ground current sensor
connection for a motor temperature sensor
connection for network
connection for HMI device or expansion module
current protection, metering and monitoring functions
motor control functions
power indicator and communication protocol
selection indicator
fault and warning LED indicators
network communication and alarm indicators
HMI communication LED indicator
test and reset function

Reference Number
LTMR08PBD (24 VDC,
0.4...8 A FLC)
LTMR27PBD (24 VDC,
1.35...27 A FLC)
LTMR100PBD (24 VDC,
5...100 A FLC)
LTMR08PFM (100...240 VAC,
0.4...8 A FLC)
LTMR27PFM (100...240 VAC,
1.35...27 A FLC)
LTMR100PFM (100...240 VAC,
5...100 A FLC)

15

Introduction

LTM E Expansion Module

There are 2 models of LTM E expansion modules that provide voltage monitoring functionality and 4
additional logic inputs. The LTM E expansion modules are powered by the LTM R controller via a
connector cable.
LTM E
Expansion Module

Functional Description

Reference Number

voltage sensing 110...690 VAC

3-phase voltage inputs
4 additional discrete logic inputs
additional voltage protection, metering and monitoring functions
power LED indicator
logic input status LED indicators

LTMEV40BD (24 VDC

logic inputs)
LTMEV40FM
(100...240 VAC logic
inputs)

Additional components required for an optional expansion module:

LTM R controller to LTM E connection cable

HMI Device: Magelis XBTN410

The system uses the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device with a liquid crystal display.
Magelis XBTN410

Functional Description

Reference Number

configures the system through menu entries

displays parameters, warnings, and faults

XBTN410 (HMI)
XBTZ938 (cable)

Additional components required for an optional HMI device:

separate power source
LTM R/LTM E to HMI communication cable
Magelis XBTL1000 programming software

XBTL1000 (software)

HMI Device: LTM CU Control Operator Unit

The system uses the TeSysT LTM CU Control Operator Unit HMI device with a liquid crystal display and
contextual navigation keys. The LTM CU is internally powered by the LTM R. Refer to the TeSys T
LTM CU Control Operator Unit User Manual for more information.
LTM CU
Control Operator Unit

Functional Description

Reference Number

configures the system through menu entries

displays parameters, warnings, and faults
control the motor

LTM CU

Additional components required for an optional HMI

device:
LTM R/LTM E to HMI communication cable

16

LTM9CU0
(HMI communication cable)
TCSMCNAM3M002P
(cable kit)
LTM9KCU
Kit for portable LTM CU

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Introduction

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

SoMove software is a Microsoft Windows-based application, using the open FDT/DTM technology.
SoMove contains many DTMs. A specific DTM exists for the TeSys T motor management system.
SoMove with the
TeSys T DTM

SoMove

TM

Functional Description

Reference Number

configure the system through menu entries

display parameters, warnings, and faults
control the motor
enable customization of operating modes

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

TCSMCNAM3M002P
(cable kit)

Additional components required for the SoMove FDT

container:
a PC
separate power source
LTM R / LTM E / LTM CU to PC communication cables

Load Current Transformers

External load current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load
Amperes.
Schneider Electric Load
Current Transformers

Primary

Secondary

Inside Diameter

Reference Number

mm

in.

100

35

1.38

LT6CT1001

200

35

1.38

LT6CT2001

400

35

1.38

LT6CT4001

800

35

1.38

LT6CT8001

Note: The following current transformers are also available: Schneider Electric
LUTC0301, LUTC0501, LUTC1001, LUTC2001, LUTC4001, and LUTC8001.

Lug-lug kit provides bus bars and lug terminals that adapt the pass through wiring windows and provide
line and load terminations for the power circuit.
Square D Lug-lug Kit

Description

Reference Number

Square D Lug-lug Kit

MLPL9999

Ground Fault Current Transformers

External ground fault current transformers measure ground fault conditions.
Schneider Electric Vigirex
Ground Current Transformers

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Type

Maximum
Current

Inside Diameter
mm

in.

Transformation Reference
Ratio
Number
1000:1

TA30

65 A

30

1.18

PA50

85 A

50

1.97

50437
50438

IA80

160 A

80

3.15

50439

MA120

250 A

120

4.72

50440

SA200

400 A

200

7.87

50441

PA300

630 A

300

11.81

50442

POA

85 A

46

1.81

50485

GOA

250 A

110

4.33

50486

17

Introduction

Cables
System components require cables to connect to other components and communicate with the network.
Cable

Description

Reference Number

Connecting jumper 0.04 m (1.57 in.) length, for side by side

connection of the LTM R and LTM E

LTMCC004

LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 0.3 m (11.81 in.) length

LTM9CEXP03

LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 1.0 m (3.28 ft) length

LTM9CEXP10

PROFIBUS DP network communication cable 100 m (328.08 ft) TSXPBSCA100

length

18

PROFIBUS DP network communication cable

400 m (1,312.33 ft) length

TSXPBSCA400

LTM R/LTM E to Magelis HMI device connection cable

2.5 m (8.20 ft) length

XBTZ938

LTM R/LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable

1.0 m (3.28 ft) length

LTM9CU10

LTM R/LTM E to LTM CU HMI device connection cable

3.0 m (9.84 ft) length

LTM9CU30

Cable kit, includes LTM E / LTM R / LTM CU to PC

communication cable 2.5 m (8.2 ft) length

TCSMCNAM3M002P

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Introduction

System Selection Guide

Overview
This section describes the LTM R controller with and without the optional LTM E expansion module for
metering and monitoring, protection, and control functions.

Metering and Monitoring functions

measurement
fault and warning counters
system and device monitoring faults
motor history
system operating status

Protection functions
thermal motor protection
current motor protection
voltage and power motor protection

Control functions
control channels (local/remote control source selection)
operating modes
fault management

Metering Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the metering functions of the motor
management system:
Function

LTM R Controller

LTM R with LTM E

Line currents

Ground current

Average current

Current phase imbalance

Thermal capacity level

Motor temperature sensor

Frequency

Line-to-line voltage

Line voltage imbalance

Average voltage

Power factor

Measurement

Active power

Reactive power

Active power consumption

Reactive power consumption

Controller internal faults

Controller internal temperature

Control command error diagnostic

System and Device Monitoring Faults

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring fault - Temperature sensor connections

Wiring fault - Current connections

Wiring fault - Voltage connections

Configuration checksum

Communication loss

Time to trip

The function is available

The function is not available

19

Introduction

Function

LTM R Controller

LTM R with LTM E

Fault and warning counters

Protection fault counts

Protection warning counts

Diagnostic fault counts

Motor control function counts

Fault history

Motor starts / O1 starts / O2 starts

Operating time

Motor History

Motor starts per hour

Motor last start current ratio

Motor last start duration

Motor running

Motor ready

Motor starting

Minimum wait time

System Operating Status

The function is available

The function is not available

Protection Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the protection functions of the motor
management system:
Functions

20

LTM R Controller

LTM R with LTM E

Thermal overload

Current phase imbalance

Current phase loss

Current phase reversal

Long start

Jam

Undercurrent

Overcurrent

Ground current

Motor temperature sensor

Rapid cycle lockout

Voltage phase imbalance

Voltage phase loss

Voltage phase reversal

Undervoltage

Overvoltage

Load shedding

Underpower

Overpower

Under power factor

Over power factor

The function is available

The function is not available

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Introduction

Control Functions
The following table lists the equipment required to support the control functions of the motor management
system:
Control functions

LTM R Controller

LTM R with LTM E

Motor control channels

Terminal strip
HMI

Remote

Overload

Independent

Reverser

Operating mode

Two-step

Two-speed

Custom

Manual reset

Automatic reset

Remote reset

Fault Management

1639502EN-04 09/2014

The function is available

The function is not available

21

Introduction

Physical Description of the LTM R PROFIBUS DP Controller

Overview
The microprocessor-based LTM R controller provides control, protection and monitoring for single-phase
and 3-phase AC induction motors.
Phase Current Inputs
The LTM R controller includes internal current transformers for measuring the motor load phase current
directly from the motor load power cables or from secondaries of external current transformers.

Windows for phase current measurement

Front Face
The LTM R controller front face includes the following features:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

22

Test / Reset button

HMI port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to an HMI, PC or LTM E expansion module
Network port with 9-pin sub-D connector connecting the LTM R controller to a PROFIBUS DP PLC
LTM R status-indicating LEDs
Plug-in terminal: control power, logic Input, and common
Plug-in terminal: double pole/single throw (DPST) relay output
Plug-in terminal relay output
Plug-in terminal: ground fault input and temperature sensor input
Plug-in terminal: PLC network

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Introduction

Test / Reset Button

The Test / Reset button performs a reset, self test, or places the LTM R controller in an internal fault state.
For a detailed description of the test/rest button functions, see Test / Reset, page 243.
HMI Device/Expansion Module/PC Port
This port connects the LTM R controller to the following devices over the HMI port using an RJ45
connector:

an expansion module
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
a Magelis XBTN410 HMI

Network Port
This port provides communication between the LTM R controller and a network PLC via a 9-pin sub-D
female connector.
LTM R status-indicating LEDs
LED name

Describes

Appearance

Status

HMI Comm

Communication between LTM R

controller and HMI device, PC, or LTM E
expansion module

Flashing yellow

Communication

Off

No communication

LTM R controller power or internal fault

condition

Solid green

Power on, motor off, no internal faults

Flashing green

Power on, motor on, no internal faults

Power

Alarm

Fallback

BF

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Protection warning or fault, or internal

fault

Off

Power off or internal faults exist

Solid red

Internal or protection fault

Flashing red
2 X per second

Warning

Flashing red
5 X per second

Load shed or rapid cycle

Off

No faults, warnings, load shed or rapid

cycle (when power is on)

Indicates communications loss between

the LTM R controller and network or HMI
control source

Solid red

Fallback

Off

No power (not in fallback)

Indicates network status

Off

Communication

Red

No communication

23

Introduction

Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module

Overview
The LTM E expansion module extends the monitoring and control functions of the LTM R controller by
providing voltage measurement and additional logic inputs:
3 phase voltage inputs
4 additional discrete logic inputs

LTM E Expansion module

LTM E Expansion module connected to an LTM R controller

Front Face
The LTM E expansion module front face includes the following features:

LV1

LV2

2T05334

LV3

LTMR

HMI

LTMEV40FM

Power I.7

I.8

I.9 I.10

I.7 C7 I.8 C8 I.9 C9 I.10 C10

1
2
3
4
5

Port with RJ45 connector to HMI or PC

Port with RJ45 connector to LTM R controller
Status-indicating LEDs
Plug-in terminal: voltage inputs
Plug-in terminal: logic inputs and common

NOTE: Logic inputs are externally powered according to input voltage ratings.

24

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Introduction

Status-indicating LEDs
LED name

Description

Appearance

Status

Power

Power/Fault status

Green

Power on, no faults

I.7
I.8
I.9
I.10

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Logic Input I.7 status

Logic Input I.8 status
Logic Input I.9 status
Logic Input I.10 status

Red

Power on, faults

Off

Not powered

Yellow

Activated

Off

Not activated

Yellow

Activated

Off

Not activated

Yellow

Activated

Off

Not activated

Yellow

Activated

Off

Not activated

25

Introduction

26

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Metering and Monitoring Functions
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 2
Metering and Monitoring Functions

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Overview
The LTM R controller provides measurement, metering, and monitoring in support of the current,
temperature, and ground fault protection functions. When connected to an LTM E expansion module, the
LTM R controller also provides voltage and power measurement functions.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Topic

Page

2.1

Measurement

28

2.2

System and Device Monitoring Faults

39

2.3

Fault and Warning Counters

50

2.4

Motor History

54

2.5

System Operating Status

57

27

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Section 2.1
Measurement

Measurement

Overview
The LTM R controller uses these measurements to perform protection, control, monitoring, and logic
functions. Each measurement is detailed in this section.
The measurements can be accessed via:
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
an HMI device
a PLC via the network port
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

28

Page

Line Currents

29

Ground Current

30

Average Current

32

Current Phase Imbalance

33

Thermal Capacity Level

33

Motor Temperature Sensor

34

Frequency

34

Line-to-Line Voltages

35

Line Voltage Imbalance

35

Average Voltage

36

Power Factor

37

Active Power and Reactive Power

38

Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption

38

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Line Currents
Description
The LTM R controller measures line currents and provides the value of each phase in amperes and as a
percentage of Full Load Current (FLC).
The line currents function returns the rms value in amperes of the phase currents from the 3 CT inputs:

L1: phase 1 current

L2: phase 2 current
L3: phase 3 current

The LTM R controller performs true rms calculations for line currents up to the 7th harmonic.
Single-phase current is measured from L1 and L3.
Line Current Characteristics
The line currents function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/- 2 % for 100 A models

Resolution

0.01 A

Refresh interval

100 ms

Line Current Ratio

The L1, L2 and L3 current ratio parameter provides the phase current as a percentage of FLC.
Line Current Ratio Formulas
The line current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting, where FLC is FLC1 or
FLC2, whichever is active at that time.
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Line current ratio

100 x Ln / FLC

Where:
FLC = FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting, whichever is active at the time
Ln = L1, L2, or L3 current value in amperes

Line Current Ratio Characteristics

The line current ratio function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristic

Value

Unit

% of FLC

Accuracy

See Line Current Characteristics, page 29

Resolution

1% FLC

Refresh interval

100 ms

29

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Ground Current
Description
The LTM R controller measures ground currents and provides values in Amperes and as a percentage of
FLCmin.

The internal ground current (Igr) is calculated by the LTM R controller from the 3 line currents
measured by the load current transformers. It reports 0 when the current falls below 10 % of FLCmin.
The external ground current (Igr) is measured by the external ground current transformer connected to
Z1 and Z2 terminals.

Configurable Parameters
The control channel configuration has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Ground Current Mode

Internal
External

Internal

Ground Current Ratio

Ground CT Primary

165,535

Ground CT Secondary

165,535

None

None
100:1
200:1.5
1000:1
2000:1
Other Ratio

External Ground Current Formula

The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings:
Calculated Measurement

Formula

External ground current

(Current through Z1-Z2) x (Ground CT Primary) / (Ground CT Secondary)

Ground Current Characteristics

The ground current function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value
Internal Ground Current (Igr) External Ground Current (Igr)

Unit

Igr 0.3 A

+/ 10 %

The greater of +/ 5 % or +/ 0.01 A

0.2 A Igr 0.3 A

+/ 15 %

Accuracy
LTM R 08xxx

LTM R 27xxx

LTM R 100xxx

0.1 A Igr 0.2 A

+/ 20 %

Igr < 0.1 A

N/A(1)

Igr 0.5 A

+/ 10 %

0.3 A Igr 0.5 A

+/ 15 %

0.2 A Igr 0.3 A

+/ 20 %

Igr < 0.2 A

N/A(1)

Igr 1.0 A

+/ 10 %

0.5 A Igr 1.0 A

+/ 15 %

0.3 A Igr 0.5 A

+/ 20 %

Igr < 0.3 A

N/A(1)

Resolution

0.01 A

0.01 A

Refresh interval

100 ms

100 ms

(1) For currents of this magnitude or lower, the internal ground current function should not be used. Instead, use
external ground current transformers.

30

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Ground Current Ratio

The Ground Current Ratio parameter provides the ground current value as a percentage of FLCmin.
Ground Current Ratio Formulas
The ground current value is compared to FLCmin.
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Ground current ratio

100 x ground current / FLCmin

Ground Current Ratio Characteristics

The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Value

Unit

02,000 % of FLCmin

Accuracy

See Ground Current Characteristics, above

Resolution

0.1 % FLCmin

Refresh interval

100 ms

31

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Average Current
Description
The LTM R controller calculates average current and provides the value for phase in amperes and as a
percentage of FLC.
The average current function returns the rms value of the average current.
Average Current Formulas
The LTM R controller calculates the average current using the measured line currents. The measured
values are internally summed using the following formula:
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Average current, three phase motor

Iavg = (L1 + L2 + L3) / 3

Average current, single-phase motor

Iavg = (L1 + L3) / 2

Average Current Characteristics

The average current function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/- 2 % for 100 A models

Resolution

0.01 A

Refresh interval

100 ms

Average Current Ratio

The Average Current Ratio parameter provides the average current value as a percentage of FLC.
Average Current Ratio Formulas
The average current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting, where FLC is FLC1 or
FLC2, whichever is active at that time.
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Average current ratio

100 x lavg / FLC

Where:
FLC = FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting, whichever is active at the time
lavg = average current value in amperes

Average Current Ratio Characteristics

The average current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

32

Value

Unit

% of FLC

Accuracy

See Average Current Characteristics, above

Resolution

1 % FLC

Refresh interval

100 ms

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Current Phase Imbalance

Description
The current phase imbalance function measures the maximum percentage of deviation between the
average current and the individual phase currents.
Formulas
The current phase imbalance measurement is based on imbalance ratio calculated from the following
formulas:
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Imbalance ratio of current in phase 1 (in %)

Ii1 = (| L1 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg

Imbalance ratio of current in phase 2 (in %)

Ii2 = (| L2 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg

Imbalance ratio of current in phase 3 (in %)

Ii3 = (| L3 - Iavg | x 100) / Iavg

Current imbalance ratio for three phase (in %)

Iimb = Max(Ii1, Ii2, Ii3)

Characteristics
The line current imbalance function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/- 1.5% for 8 A and 27 A models

+/- 3% for 100 A models

Resolution

1%

Refresh interval

100 ms

Thermal Capacity Level

Description
The thermal capacity level function uses two thermal models to calculate the amount of thermal capacity
used: one for copper stator and rotor windings of the motor and the other for the iron frame of the motor.
The thermal model with the maximum utilized capacity is reported.
This function also estimates and displays:
the time remaining before a thermal overload fault is triggered (see Time to Trip, page 48), and
the time remaining until the fault condition is cleared after a thermal overload fault has been triggered
(see Minimum Wait Time, page 58).
Trip Current Characteristics
The thermal capacity level function uses one of the following selected trip current characteristics (TCCs):

definite time
inverse thermal (factory setting)

Thermal Capacity Level Models

Both copper and iron models use the maximum measured phase current and the Motor Trip Class
parameter value to generate a non-scaled thermal image. The reported thermal capacity level is calculated
by scaling the thermal image to FLC.
Thermal Capacity Level Characteristics
The thermal capacity level function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/ 1 %

Resolution

1%

Refresh interval

100 ms

33

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Motor Temperature Sensor

Description
The motor temperature sensor function displays:
The resistance value in ohms measured by a PTC or NTC resistance temperature sensor.
The temperature value in C or F measured by a PT100 temperature sensor.
Refer to the product documentation for the specific temperature sensor being used. One of 4 types of
temperature sensors can be used:

PTC Binary
PT100
PTC Analog
NTC Analog

Characteristics
The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

PT100 Temperature Sensor

Other Temperature Sensor

Unit

C or F, according to the value of the HMI

Display Temperature Sensor Degree CF
parameter

Accuracy

+/- 2 %

+/ 2 %

Resolution

1 C or 1 F

0.1

Refresh interval

500 ms

500 ms

Frequency
Description
The frequency function provides the value measured based on the line voltage measurements. If the
frequency is unstable (+/ 2 Hz variations), the value reported is 0 until the frequency stabilizes.
If no LTM E expansion module is present, the frequency value is 0.
Characteristics
The frequency function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

34

Value

Unit

Hz

Accuracy

+/ 2%

Resolution

0.1 Hz

Refresh interval

30 ms

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Line-to-Line Voltages
Description
The line-to-line voltages function provides the rms value of the phase-to-phase voltage (V1 to V2, V2 to
V3, and V3 to V1):

L1-L2 voltage: phase 1 to phase 2 voltage

L2-L3 voltage: phase 2 to phase 3 voltage
L3-L1 voltage: phase 3 to phase 1 voltage

The expansion module performs true rms calculations for line-to-line voltage up to the 7th harmonic.
Single phase voltage is measured from L1 and L3.
Characteristics
The line-to-line voltages function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

VAC

Accuracy

+/- 1 %

Resolution

1 VAC

Refresh interval

100 ms

Line Voltage Imbalance

Description
The line voltage imbalance function displays the maximum percentage of deviation between the average
voltage and the individual line voltages.
Formulas
The line voltage imbalance calculated measurement is based on the following formulas:
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 1 in %

Vi1 = 100 x | V1 - Vavg | / Vavg

Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 2 in %

Vi2 = 100 x | V2 - Vavg | / Vavg

Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 3 in %

Vi3 = 100 x | V3 - Vavg | / Vavg

Voltage imbalance ratio for three phase in %

Vimb = Max (Vi1, Vi2, Vi3)

Where:
V1 = L1-L2 voltage (phase 1 to phase 2 voltage)
V2 = L2-L3 voltage (phase 2 to phase 3 voltage)
V3 = L3-L1 voltage (phase 3 to phase 1 voltage)
Vavg = average voltage

Characteristics
The line voltage imbalance function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/ 1.5 %

Resolution

1%

Refresh interval

100 ms

35

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Average Voltage
Description
The LTM R controller calculates average voltage and provides the value in volts. The average voltage
function returns the rms value of the average voltage.
Formulas
The LTM R controller calculates average voltage using the measured line-to-line voltages. The measured
values are internally summed using the following formula:
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Average voltage, three phase motor

Vavg = (L1-L2 voltage + L2-L3 voltage + L3-L1 voltage) / 3

Average voltage, single-phase motor

Vavg = L3-L1 voltage

Characteristics
The average voltage function has the following characteristics:

36

Characteristic

Value

Unit

VAC

Accuracy

+/- 1%

Resolution

1 VAC

Refresh interval

100 ms

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Power Factor
Description
The power factor function displays the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase
voltages.
Formula
The Power Factor parameter (also called cosine phi or cos ) represents the absolute value of the ratio of
Active Power to Apparent Power.
The following diagram displays an example of the average rms current sinusoidal curve lagging slightly
behind the average rms voltage sinusoidal curve, and the phase angle difference between the 2 curves:

After the phase angle () is measured, the power factor can be calculated as the cosine of the phase angle
()the ratio of side a (Active Power) over the hypotenuse h (Apparent Power):

Characteristics
The active power function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Accuracy

+/- 10 % for cos 0.6

Resolution

0.01

Refresh interval

30 ms (typical)(1)

(1) The refresh interval depends on the frequency.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

37

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Active Power and Reactive Power

Description
The calculation of the active power and reactive power is based on the:
average rms phase voltage of L1, L2, L3
average rms phase current of L1, L2, L3
power factor
number of phases
Formulas
Active power, also known as true power, measures average rms power. It is derived from the following
formulas:
Calculated Measurement

Formula

Active power for three phase motor

3 x lavg x Vavg x cos

Active power for single-phase motor

lavg x Vavg x cos

Where:
Iavg = Average rms current
Vavg = Average rms voltage

The reactive power measurement is derived from the following formulas:

Calculated Measurement

Formula

Reactive power for three phase motor

3 x lavg x Vavg x sin

Reactive power for single-phase motor

lavg x Vavg x sin

Where:
Iavg = Average rms current
Vavg = Average rms voltage

Characteristics
The active and reactive power functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Active Power

Reactive Power

Unit

kW

kVAR

Accuracy

+/- 15 %

+/- 15 %

Resolution

0.1 kW

0.1 kVAR

Refresh interval

100 ms

100 ms

Active Power Consumption and Reactive Power Consumption

Description
The active and reactive power consumption functions display the accumulated total of the active and
reactive electrical power delivered, and used or consumed by the load.
Characteristics
The active and reactive power consumption functions have the following characteristics:

38

Characteristic

Active Power Consumption

Reactive Power Consumption

Unit

kWh

kVARh

Accuracy

+/- 15 %

+/- 15 %

Resolution

0.1 kWh

0.1 kVARh

Refresh interval

100 ms

100 ms

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Section 2.2
System and Device Monitoring Faults

System and Device Monitoring Faults

Overview
The LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module detect faults which affect the LTM R controller
ability to work properly (internal controller check and check of communications, wiring, and configuration
errors).
The system and device monitoring fault records can be accessed via:
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
an HMI device
a PLC via the network port
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Controller Internal Fault

40

Controller Internal Temperature

41

Control Command Error Diagnostic

42

Wiring Faults

44

Configuration Checksum

46

Communication Loss

46

Time to Trip

48

LTM R Configuration Fault

48

LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning

48

External Fault

49

39

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Controller Internal Fault

Description
The LTM R controller detects and records faults that are internal to the device itself. Internal faults can be
either major or minor. Major and minor faults can change the state of output relays. Cycling power to the
LTM R controller may clear an internal fault.
When an internal fault occurs, the Controller Internal Fault parameter is set.
Major Internal Faults
During a major fault, the LTM R controller is unable to reliably execute its own programming and can only
attempt to shut itself down. During a major fault, communication with the LTM R controller is not possible.
Major internal faults include:

stack overflow fault

stack underflow fault
watchdog time-out
firmware checksum failure
CPU failure
internal temperature fault (at 100 C / 212 F)
RAM test error

Minor Internal Faults

Minor internal faults indicate that the data being provided to the LTM R controller is unreliable and
protection could be compromised. During a minor fault, the LTM R controller continues to attempt to
monitor status and communications, but does not accept any start commands. During a minor fault
condition, the LTM R controller continues to detect and report major faults, but not additional minor faults.
Minor internal faults include:

40

internal network communications failure

EEPROM error
A/D out of range error
Reset button stuck
internal temperature fault (at 85 C / 185 F)
invalid configuration error (conflicting configuration)
improper logic function action (for example, attempting to write to a read-only parameter)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Controller Internal Temperature

Description
The LTM R controller monitors its Controller Internal Temperature, and reports warning, minor fault, and
major fault conditions. Fault detection cannot be disabled. Warning detection can be enabled or disabled.
The controller retains a record of the highest attained internal temperature.
Characteristics
The Controller Internal Temperature measured values have the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/- 4 C (+/- 7.2 F)

Resolution

1 C (1.8 F)

Refresh interval

100 ms

Parameters
The Controller Internal Temperature function includes one editable parameter:
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Controller internal temperature warning enable

Enable
Disable

Enable

The Controller Internal Temperature function includes the following fixed warning and fault thresholds:
Condition

Fixed Threshold Value

Sets Parameter

Internal temperature warning

80 C (176 F)

Controller Internal Temperature Warning

Internal temperature minor fault

85 C (185 F)

Controller Internal Fault

Internal temperature major fault

100 C (212 F)

A warning condition ceases when LTM R Controller Internal Temperature falls below 80 C (176 F).
Block Diagram

T Temperature
T > 80 C (176 F) Fixed warning threshold
T > 85 C (185 F) Fixed minor fault threshold
T > 100 C (212 F) Fixed major fault threshold

Maximum Internal Controller Temperature

The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter contains the highest internal temperature, expressed
in C, detected by the LTM R controllers internal temperature sensor. The LTM R controller updates this
value whenever it detects an internal temperature greater than the current value.
The maximum internal temperature value is not cleared when factory settings are restored using the Clear
All Command, or when statistics are reset using a Clear Statistics Command.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

41

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Control Command Error Diagnostic

Description
The LTM R controller performs diagnostic tests that detect and monitor the proper functionality of control
commands.
There are 4 control command diagnostic functions:

Start Command Check

Run Check Back
Stop Command Check
Stop Check Back

Parameter Settings
All 4 diagnostic functions are enabled and disabled as a group. The configurable parameter settings are:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Diagnostic Fault Enable

Yes/No

Yes

Diagnostic Warning Enable

Yes/No

Yes

Start Command Check

The Start Command Check begins after a Start command, and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the
main circuit to ensure that current is flowing.

The Start Command Check reports a Start Command fault or warning if current is not detected after a
delay of 1 second.
The Start Command Check conditions ends if the motor is in Run state and the LTM R controller detects
that the current is equal or more than 10% of FLCmin.

Run Check Back

The Run Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure
current is flowing.

The Run Check Back reports a fault or warning if average phase current is not detected for longer than
0.5 seconds without a Stop command.
The Run Check Back ends when a Stop command executes.

Stop Command Check

The Stop Command Check begins after a Stop command, and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the
main circuit and ensure that no current is flowing.
The Stop Command Check reports a fault or warning if current is detected after a delay of 1 second.
The Stop Command Check ends if the LTM R controller detects that the current is equal or less than
5% of FLCmin.
Stop Check Back
The Stop Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure that
no current is flowing.

42

The Stop Check Back reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is detected
for longer than 0.5 seconds after a Stop command.
The Stop Check Back condition ends when a Run command executes.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Start Command Check and Stop
Command Check:

1
2
3
4
5
6

Normal operation
Fault or warning condition
The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect current
The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect no current
The LTM R controller reports a Start Command Check fault and/or warning if current is not detected after 1 second
The LTM R controller reports a Stop Command Check fault and or warning if current is detected after 1 second

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Run Check Back and Stop Check Back:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Normal operation
Fault or warning condition
After the motor enters the run state, the LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect current
until a Stop command is given or the function is disabled
The LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect no current until a Start command is given or
the function is disabled
The LTM R controller reports a Run Check Back fault and/or warning if the current is not detected for longer than
0.5 seconds without a Stop command
The LTM R controller reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if the current is detected for longer than
0.5 seconds without a Start command
No current flowing for less than 0.5 seconds
Current flowing for less than 0.5 seconds

43

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Wiring Faults
Description
The LTM R controller checks external wiring connections and reports a fault when it detects incorrect or
conflicting external wiring. The LTM R controller can detect 4 wiring errors:

CT Reversal Error
Phase Configuration Error
Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Errors (short-circuit or open-circuit)

Enabling Fault Detection

Wiring diagnostics are enabled using the following parameters:
Protection

Enabling Parameters

Setting Range

Factory
Setting

CT Reversal

Wiring Fault Enable

Yes
No

Yes

Phase Configuration

Motor Phases, if set to single-phase

Single-phase
three phase

three phase

Motor Temperature Sensor Motor Temperature Sensor Type, if set to a

Wiring
sensor type, and not to None

None
PTC binary
PT100
PTC analog
NTC analog

None

CT Reversal Error
When individual external load CTs are used, they must all be installed in the same direction. The LTM R
controller checks the CT wiring and reports an error if it detects one of the current transformers is wired
backwards when compared to the others.
This function can be enabled and disabled.
Phase Configuration Error
The LTM R controller checks all 3 motor phases for On Level current, then checks the Motor Phases
parameter setting. The LTM R controller reports an error if it detects current in phase 2 if the LTM R
controller is configured for single-phase operation.
This function is enabled when the LTM R controller is configured for single-phase operation. It has no
configurable parameters.
Motor Temperature Sensor Errors
When the LTM R controller is configured for motor temperature sensor protection, the LTM R controller
provides short-circuit and open-circuit detection for the temperature sensing element.
The LTM R controller signals an error when calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals:

falls below the fixed short-circuit detection threshold, or

exceeds the fixed open-circuit detection threshold.

The fault must be reset according to the configured Reset Mode: manual, automatic, or remote.
Short-circuit and open-circuit detection thresholds have no fault time delay. There are no warnings
associated with the short-circuit and the open-circuit detection.
Short-circuit and open-circuit detection of the motor temperature sensing element is available for all
operating states.
This protection is enabled when a temperature sensor is employed and configured, and cannot be
disabled.
The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

44

Value

Unit

Normal operating range

156500 W

Accuracy

at 15 : +/- 10 %
at 6500 : +/- 5 %

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Characteristic

Value

Resolution

0.1

Refresh interval

100 ms

The fixed thresholds for the open-circuit and short-circuit detection functions are:
Detection Function

Short-circuit detection
Open-circuit detection

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Fixed Results For PTC Binary, or PT100, or Accuracy

PTC/NTC Analog
threshold

15

+/ 10 %

re-closing

20

+/ 10 %

threshold

6500

+/ 5 %

re-closing

6000

+/ 5 %

45

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Configuration Checksum
Description
The LTM R controller calculates a checksum of parameters based on all configuration registers. The
EEPROM error code (64) is reported.

Communication Loss
Description
The LTM R controller monitors communication through:

the network port

the HMI port

Network Port Parameter Settings

The LTM R controller monitors network communication creates both a fault and a warning report when the
network communications are lost.
On LTM R Version LTMRP, the communication loss, is detected as part of the protocol management,
without specific adjustable parameters.
The network port communications have the following configurable settings:
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Network port fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Network port warning enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Network port fallback setting(1)

Hold
Run
O.1, O.2 off
O.1, O.2 on
O.1 off
O.2 off

O.1, O.2 off

(1) The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the network port fallback settings.

HMI Port Parameter Settings

The LTM R controller monitors HMI port communications and reports both a warning and a fault if no valid
communication has been received by the HMI port for longer than 7 seconds.
The HMI port communication has the following fixed and configurable settings:
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

HMI port fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

HMI port warning enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

HMI port fallback

setting(1)

Hold
Run
O.1, O.2 off
O.1, O.2 on
O.1 off
O.2 off

O.1, O.2 off

(1) The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the HMI port fallback settings.

46

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Fallback Condition
When the communication between the LTM R controller and either the network or the HMI is lost, the
LTM R controller is in a fallback condition. When the communication recovers, the fallback condition is no
longer applied by the LTM R controller.
The behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 when the LTM R controller is in fallback condition is determined
by:
The operating mode (see Operating Modes, page 142).
The Network Port Fallback Setting and HMI Port Fallback Setting parameters.
Fallback setting selection can include:
Port Fallback Setting

Description

Hold (O.1, O.2)

Directs the LTM R controller to hold the state of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 as of the
time of the communication loss.

Run

Directs the LTM R controller to perform a Run command for a 2-step control
sequence on the communication loss.

O.1, O.2 Off

Directs the LTM R controller to turn off both logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a
communication loss.

O.1, O.2 On

Directs the LTM R controller to turn on both logic outputs O.1 and O.2 following a
communication loss.

O.1 On

Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O.1 following a
communication loss.

O.2 On

Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O.2 following a
communication loss.

The following table indicates which fallback options are available for each operating mode:
Port Fallback Setting

Operating Mode
Overload

Independent

Reverser

2-step

2-speed

Custom

Hold (O.1, O.2)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Run

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

O.1, O.2 Off

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

O.1, O.2 On

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

O.1 On

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

O.2 On

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

NOTE: When you select a network or HMI fallback setting, your selection must identify an active control
source.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

47

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Time to Trip
Description
When a thermal overload condition exists, the LTM R controller reports the time to trip before the fault
occurs in the Time To Trip parameter.
When the LTM R controller is not in a thermal overload condition, to avoid the appearance of being in a
fault state, the LTM R controller reports the time to trip as 9999.
If the motor has an auxiliary fan and the Motor Aux Fan Cooled parameter has been set, the cooling period
is 4 times shorter.
Characteristics
The time to trip function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/ 10 %

Resolution

1s

Refresh interval

100 ms

LTM R Configuration Fault

Description
The LTM R controller checks the Load CT parameters set in configuration mode.
An LTM R configuration fault is detected when the Load CT Primary, Load CT Secondary, and Load CT
Multiple Passes parameters are not consistent, and generates a System and Device Monitoring Fault. The
fault condition is cleared once the parameters are correct. The LTM R controller remains in configuration
mode as long as the parameters are not consistent.

LTM E Configuration Fault and Warning

Description
The LTM R controller checks the presence of the LTM E expansion module. Its absence generates a
System and Device Monitoring Fault.
LTM E Configuration Fault
LTM E configuration fault:
If LTM E based protection faults are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present, this will cause
an LTM E configuration fault.
It does not have any delay setting.
The fault condition clears when no protection fault requiring an LTM E is enabled, or when the LTM R
has been power-cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present.
LTM E Configuration Warning
LTM E configuration warning:
If LTM E based protection warnings are enabled but no LTM E expansion module is present, this will
cause an LTM E configuration warning.
The warning clears when no protection warning requiring an LTM E is enabled, or when the LTM R has
been power-cycled with an appropriate LTM E being present.

48

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

External Fault
Description
The LTM R controller has an external fault feature, which detects if an error happened on an external
system linked to it.
An external fault is triggered by setting a bit in the custom logic command register 1 (see table below). This
external fault sets the controller into a fault state based on different parameters in the system.
An external fault can be reset only by clearing the external fault bit in the register.
External Fault Parameter Settings

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameter

Description

Custom logic external fault command

The value is written

External system fault

Reads Custom logic external fault command parameter

Fault code

Number is 16: External fault set by program customized with custom

logic editor

49

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Section 2.3
Fault and Warning Counters

Fault and Warning Counters

Overview
The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults and warnings that occur. In addition, it
counts the number of auto-reset attempts. This information can be accessed to assist with system
performance and maintenance.
Fault and warning counters can be accessed via:
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
an HMI device
a PLC via the network port
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

50

Page

Introducing Fault and Warning Counters

51

All Faults Counter

51

All Warnings Counter

51

Auto-Reset Counter

51

Protection Faults and Warnings Counters

52

Control Command Errors Counter

52

Wiring Faults Counter

52

Communication Loss Counters

53

Internal Fault Counters

53

Fault History

53

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Introducing Fault and Warning Counters

Detecting Warnings
If a warning detection function is enabled, the LTM R controller detects a warning immediately when the
monitored value rises above, or falls below, a threshold setting.
Detecting Faults
Before the LTM R controller detects a fault, certain preconditions must exist. These conditions can include
the fault detecting function must be enabled,
a monitored value (for example, current, voltage, or thermal resistance) must rise above, or fall below,
a threshold setting,
the monitored value must remain above or below the threshold setting for a specified time duration.
Counters
When a fault occurs, the LTM R controller increments at least 2 counters:
a counter for the specific fault detecting function, and
a counter for all faults.
When a warning occurs, the LTM R controller increments a single counter for all warnings. However, when
the LTM R controller detects a thermal overload warning, it also increments the thermal overload warnings
counter.
A counter contains a value from 0 to 65,535 and increments by a value of 1 when a fault, warning, or reset
event occurs. A counter stops incrementing when it reaches a value of 65,535.
When a fault is automatically reset, the LTM R controller increments only the auto-resets counter. Counters
are saved on power loss.
Clearing Counters
All fault and warning counters are reset to 0 by executing the Clear Statistics Command or Clear All
Command.

All Faults Counter

Description
The Faults Count parameter contains the number of faults that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics
Command last executed.
The Faults Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any fault.

All Warnings Counter

Description
The Warnings Count parameter contains the number of warnings that have occurred since the Clear All
Statistics Command last executed.
The Warnings Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any warning.

Auto-Reset Counter
Description
The Auto-Reset Count parameter contains the number of times the LTM R controller attempted, but failed,
to auto-reset a fault. This parameter is used for the 3 auto-reset fault groups.
If an auto-reset attempt is successful (defined as the same fault not recurring within 60 s), this counter is
reset to zero. If a fault is reset either manually or remotely, the counter is not incremented.
For information on fault management, see Fault Management and Clear Commands, page 164.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

51

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Protection Faults and Warnings Counters

Protection Fault Counts
Protection fault counters include:
Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count
Current Phase Loss Faults Count
Current Phase Reversal Faults Count
Ground Current Faults Count
Jam Faults Count
Long Start Faults Count
Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count
Over Power Factor Faults Count
Overcurrent Faults Count
Overpower Faults Count
Overvoltage Faults Count
Thermal Overload Faults Count
Under Power Factor Faults Count
Undercurrent Faults Count
Underpower Faults Count
Undervoltage Faults Count
Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count
Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count
Voltage Phase Reversal Faults Count
Protection Warning Counts
The Thermal Overload Warnings Count parameter contains the total number of warnings for the thermal
overload protection function.
When any warning occurs, including a thermal overload warning, the LTM R controller increments the
Warnings Count parameter.

Control Command Errors Counter

Description
A Diagnostic Fault occurs when the LTM R controller detects any of the following control command errors:

Start Command Check errors

Stop Command Check errors
Stop Check Back errors
Run Check Back errors

For information on these control command functions, see Control Command Error Diagnostic, page 42.

Wiring Faults Counter

Description
The Wiring Faults Count parameter contains the total number of the following wiring faults that have
occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed:

Wiring Fault, which is triggered by a:

CT Reversal Error
Phase Configuration Error
Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error

Voltage Phase Reversal Fault

Current Phase Reversal Fault

The LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter by a value of 1 each time any one of
the above 3 faults occurs. For information on connection errors and related faults, see Wiring Faults,
page 44.

52

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Communication Loss Counters

Description
Faults detected for the following communication functions:
Counter

Contains

HMI Port Faults Count

The number of times communications via the HMI port was lost.

Network Port Internal Faults Count

The number of internal faults experienced by the network module,

reported by the network module to the LTM R controller.

Network Port Config Faults Count

The number of major faults experienced by the network module, exclusive

of network module internal faults, reported by the network module to the
LTM R controller.

Network Port Faults Count

The number of times communications via the network port was lost.

Internal Fault Counters

Description
Faults detected for the following internal faults:
Counter

Contains

Controller Internal Faults Count

The number of major and minor internal faults.

For information on internal faults, see Controller Internal Fault, page 40.

Internal Port Faults Count

The number of LTM R controller internal communication faults, plus the number
of failed attempts to identify the network communication module.

Fault History
Fault History
The LTM R controller stores a history of LTM R controller data that was recorded at the time of the last 5
detected faults. Fault n-0 contains the most recent fault record, and fault n-4 contains the oldest retained
fault record.
Each fault record includes:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Fault Code
Date and Time
Value of Settings
Motor Full Load Current Ratio (% of FLCmax)
Value of Measurements
Thermal Capacity Level

Average Current Ratio

L1, L2, L3 Current Ratio

Ground Current Ratio

Full Load Current Max

Current Phase Imbalance

Voltage Phase Imbalance

Power Factor

Frequency

Motor Temp Sensor

Average Voltage

L3-L1 Voltage, L1-L2 Voltage, L2-L3 Voltage

Active Power

53

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Section 2.4
Motor History

Motor History

Overview
The LTM R controller tracks and saves motor operating statistics.
Motor statistics can be accessed using:
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
an HMI device
a PLC via the network port.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

54

Page

Motor Starts Counters

55

Motor Starts Per Hour Counter

55

Load Sheddings Counter

55

Auto Restart Counters

55

Motor Last Start Current Ratio

56

Motor Last Start Duration

56

Operating Time

56

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Motor Starts Counters

Description
The LTM R controller tracks motor starts and records the data as a statistic that can be retrieved for
operational analysis. The following statistics are tracked:

Motor Starts Count

Motor LO1 Closings Count (logic output O.1 starts)
Motor LO2 Closings Count (logic output O.2 starts)

The Clear Statistics Command resets the Motor Starts Count parameter to 0.
NOTE: The Motor LO1 Closings Count and Motor LO2 Closings Count parameters cannot be reset to 0,
because these parameters together indicate the usage of the relay outputs over time.

Motor Starts Per Hour Counter

Description
The LTM R controller tracks the number of motor starts during the past hour and records this figure in the
Motor Starts Per Hour Count parameter.
The LTM R controller sums start in 5 minute intervals with an accuracy of 1 interval (+0/ 5 minutes), which
means that the parameter will contain the total number of starts within either the previous 60 minutes or
the previous 55 minutes.
This function is used as a maintenance function to avoid thermal strain on the motor.
Characteristics
The motor starts per hour function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Accuracy

5 minutes (+ 0/ 5 minutes)

Resolution

5 minutes

Refresh interval

100 ms

Load Sheddings Counter

Description
The Load Sheddings Count parameter contains the number of times the load sheddings protection function
has been activated since the last Clear Statistics Command.
For information on the Load Sheddings protection function, see Load Shedding, page 115.

Auto Restart Counters

Description
There are 3 types of counting statistics:
Auto restart immediate count
Auto restart delayed count
Auto restart manual count
For information on the Auto restart protection function, see Automatic Restart, page 117.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

55

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Motor Last Start Current Ratio

Description
The LTM R controller measures the maximum current level reached during the last start of the motor and
reports the value in the Motor Last Start Current Ratio parameter for analysis of the system for
maintenance purposes.
This value may also be used to help configure the long start threshold setting in the long start protection
function.
The value is not stored in the non-volatile memory: it is lost at a power cycle.
Characteristics
The motor last start current ratio function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

% of FLC

Accuracy

+/- 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/- 2 % for 100 A models

Resolution

1 % FLC

Refresh interval

100 ms

Motor Last Start Duration

Description
The LTM R controller tracks the duration of the last motor start and reports the value in the Motor Last Start
Duration parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes.
This value may also be useful in setting the long start delay timeout used in the long start and definite trip
overload protection functions.
The value is not stored in the non-volatile memory: it is lost at a power cycle.
Characteristics
The motor last start duration function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/ 1 %

Resolution

1s

Refresh interval

1s

Operating Time
Description
The LTM R controller tracks motor operating time and records the value in the Operating Time parameter.
Use this information to help schedule motor maintenance, such as lubrication, inspection, and
replacement.

56

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Section 2.5
System Operating Status

System Operating Status

Overview
The LTM R controller monitors the motor operating state and the minimum time to wait to restart the motor.
The Motor states can be accessed via:
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
an HMI device
a PLC via the network port
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Motor State

58

Minimum Wait Time

58

57

Metering and Monitoring Functions

Motor State
Description
The LTM R controller tracks the motor state and reports the following states by setting the corresponding
boolean parameters:
Motor state

Parameter

Run

Motor Running

Ready

System Ready

Start

Motor Starting

Minimum Wait Time

Description
The LTM R controller tracks the time remaining to restart the motor according to one of the following
events:

automatic reset (see page 169)

thermal overload (see page 65)
rapid cycle lockout (see page 81)
load shedding (see page 115)
automatic restart (see page 117)
transition time.

If more than one timer is active, the parameter displays the maximum timer, which is the minimum wait for
the fault response or the control function to reset.
NOTE: Even with an LTM R powered off, time is tracked down for at least 30 mn.
Characteristics
The Minimum Wait Time function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

58

Value

Unit

Accuracy

+/ 1 %

Resolution

1s

Refresh interval

1s

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Motor Protection Functions
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 3
Motor Protection Functions

Motor Protection Functions

Overview
This chapter describes the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section
3.1

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Topic

Page

Motor Protection Functions Introduction

60

3.2

Thermal Motor Protection Functions

64

3.3

Current Motor Protection Functions

83

3.4

Voltage Motor Protection Functions

103

3.5

Power Motor Protection Functions

121

59

Motor Protection Functions

Section 3.1
Motor Protection Functions Introduction

Motor Protection Functions Introduction

Overview
This section introduces you to the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller, including
protection parameters and characteristics.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

60

Page

Definitions

61

Motor Protection Characteristics

62

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Definitions
Defined Functions and Data
The LTM R controller monitors current, ground-current and motor temperature sensor parameters. When
the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module, it also monitors voltage and power parameters.
The LTM R controller uses these parameters in protection functions to detect fault and warning
conditions.The LTM R controllers response to fault and warning conditions is fixed for the predefined
operating modes. Logic output O.4 activates on a fault, and logic output O.3 activates on a warning. For
more information about predefined operating modes, see Operating Modes, page 142.
You can configure these motor protection functions to detect the existence of undesirable operating
conditions that, if not resolved, can cause motor and equipment damage.
All motor protection functions include fault detection, and most protection functions also include warning
detection.
Customized Functions and Data
In addition to using the protection functions and parameters included in a predefined operating mode, you
can use the Custom Logic Editor in the TeSys T DTM to create a new, customized operating mode. To
create a custom operating mode, select any predefined operating mode, then edit its code to meet the
needs of your application.
Using the Custom Logic Editor, you can create a customized operating mode by:

modifying the LTM R controllers responses to protection faults or warnings

adding new functions, based on either predefined or newly created parameters

Faults
A fault is a serious undesirable operating condition. Fault-related parameters can be configured for most
protection functions.
The response of the LTM R controller to a fault include the following:

output O.4 contacts:

contact 95-96 is open
contact 97-98 is closed

Alarm LED is On (steady red)

fault status bits are set in a fault parameter
a text message is displayed in an HMI screen (if an HMI is attached)
a fault status indicator is displayed in the TeSys T DTM, if connected

The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults for each protection function.
After a fault has occurred, merely resolving the underlying condition does not clear the fault. To clear the
fault, the LTM R controller must be reset. See Fault Management - Introduction, page 165.
Warnings
A warning is a less-serious, though still undesirable, operating condition. A warning indicates corrective
action may be required to prevent a problem condition from occurring. If left unresolved, a warning may
lead to a fault condition. Warning-related parameters can be configured for most protection functions.
The response of the LTM R controller to a warning include the following:

output O.3 is closed

Alarm LED flashes red twice per second
warning status bits are set in a warning parameter
a text message is displayed in an HMI screen (if attached)
a warning status indicator is displayed in the TeSys T DTM

NOTE: For some protection functions, warning detection shares the same threshold as fault detection. For
other protection functions, warning detection has a separate warning threshold.
The LTM R controller clears the warning whenever the measured value no longer exceeds the warning
thresholdplus or minus a 5 % hysteresis band.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

61

Motor Protection Functions

Motor Protection Characteristics

Operation
The following diagram describes the operation of a typical motor protection function. This diagram, and the
following diagrams, are expressed in terms of current. However, the same principles apply to voltage.

I Measurement of the monitored parameter

Is1 Warning threshold setting
Is2 Fault threshold setting
T Fault timeout setting
Inst Instantaneous warning/fault detection

Settings
Some protection functions include configurable settings, including:

Fault threshold: A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function fault.
Warning threshold: A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function
warning.
Fault timeout: A time delay that must expire before the protection function fault is triggered. The
behavior of a timeout depends on its trip current characteristic profile.
Trip curve characteristic (TCC): The LTM R controller includes a definite trip characteristic for all
protection functions, except the Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal protection function, which has both
an inverse trip and definite trip curve characteristic, as described below.

Definite TCC: The duration of the fault timeout remains a constant regardless of changes in the value of
the measured quantity (current), as described in the following diagram:

62

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Inverse TCC: The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity (here,
thermal capacity). As the measured quantity increases, the potential for harm also increases, thereby
causing the duration of the time delay to decrease, as described in the following diagram:

Hysteresis
To improve stability, motor protection functions apply a hysteresis value that is added to or subtracted from
limit threshold settings before a fault or warning response is reset. The hysteresis value is calculated as a
percentage, typically 5%, of the limit threshold and is

subtracted from the threshold value for upper limit thresholds,

added to the threshold value for lower limit thresholds.

The following diagram describes the logic result of measurement processing (Inst) when hysteresis is
applied to an upper limit threshold:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Hysteresis percentage

63

Motor Protection Functions

Section 3.2
Thermal Motor Protection Functions

Thermal Motor Protection Functions

Overview
This section describes the thermal motor protection functions of the LTM R controller.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

64

Page

Thermal Overload

65

Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal

66

Thermal Overload - Definite Time

70

Motor Temperature Sensor

72

Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary

73

Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100

75

Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog

77

Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog

79

Rapid Cycle Lockout

81

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Thermal Overload
Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured to provide thermal protection, by selecting one of the following
settings:

Inverse Thermal (see page 66) (factory setting)

Definite Time (see page 70)

Each setting represents a Trip Curve Characteristic. The LTM R controller stores the selected setting in its
Thermal Overload Mode parameter. Only one setting can be activated at a time. See the topics that
immediately follow, for information on the operation and configuration of each setting.
Parameter Settings
The Thermal Overload function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to every trip
current characteristic:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Mode

Inverse thermal
Definite time

Inverse thermal

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Motor auxiliary fan cooled

Enable/Disable

Disable

65

Motor Protection Functions

Thermal Overload - Inverse Thermal

Description
When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Inverse Thermal and select a motor trip class,
the LTM R controller monitors the motors utilized thermal capacity and signals
a warning when utilized thermal capacity exceeds a configured warning threshold,
a fault when utilized thermal capacity is greater than 100 %.

CAUTION
RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING
The Motor Trip Class parameter must be set to the thermal heating characteristics of the motor. Refer to
the motor manufacturers instructions before setting this parameter.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
There is no time delay for the thermal overload warning.
The LTM R controller calculates the Thermal Capacity Level in all operating states. When power to the
LTM R controller is lost, the LTM R controller retains the last measurements of the motors thermal state
for a period of 30 minutes, allowing it to estimate the motors thermal state when power is re-applied.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The thermal overload warning is cleared by the LTM R controller when the utilized thermal capacity falls
5 % below the warning threshold.
The thermal overload fault can be reset by the user when the utilized thermal capacity falls below the
fault reset threshold and after the fault reset timeout is elapsed.

Reset for Emergency Restart

You can use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, issued from the PLC or an HMI, to re-start an
overloaded motor in an emergency situation. This command resets the thermal capacity utilization value
to 0 and bypasses the cooling period required by the thermal model before the motor can be restarted.
This command also resets the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout to allow an immediate restart without lock.
The Clear All Command does not perform a Clear Thermal Capacity Level.

WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION
Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and
fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where
immediate restart is vital.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command will not reset the fault response. Instead
Only an action external to the LTM R controller (for example, a reduction in the motor load) can clear
the fault condition,
Only a reset command, from the valid reset means configured in the Fault Reset Mode parameter, will
reset the fault response.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
A reset command may re-start the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2-wire control circuit.
Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

66

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Operation
The thermal overload inverse thermal protection function is based on a thermal model of the motor that
combines 2 thermal images:
a copper-based image representing the thermal state of the stator and rotor windings, and
an iron-based image representing the thermal state of the motor frame.
Using measured current and the input motor trip class setting, the LTM R controller considers only the
highest thermal state, iron or copper, when calculating thermal capacity utilized by the motor, as described
below:

Thermal value
fe Iron tripping threshold
cu Copper tripping threshold
t Time

When inverse thermal fault mode is selected, the Thermal Capacity Level parameter, indicating utilized
thermal capacity due to load current, is incremented during both start and run states. When the LTM R
controller detects that the thermal capacity level () exceeds the fault threshold ( s), it triggers a thermal
overload fault, as described below:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

67

Motor Protection Functions

Functional Characteristics
The Thermal Overload inverse thermal functions include the following features:
1 motor trip class setting:
Motor Trip Class

4 configurable thresholds:
Motor Full Load Current Ratio (FLC1)
Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio (FLC2)
Thermal Overload Warning Threshold
Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold

1 time delay:
Fault Reset Timeout

2 function outputs:
Thermal Overload Warning
Thermal Overload Fault

2 counting statistics:
Thermal Overload Faults Count
Thermal Overload Warnings Count

1 setting for an external auxiliary motor cooling fan:

Motor Aux Fan Cooled

1 measure of utilized thermal capacity:

Thermal Capacity Level

NOTE: For LTM R controllers configured for 2-speed predefined operating mode, 2 fault thresholds are
used: FLC1 and FLC2.
Block Diagram

Imax Maximum current

max Thermal capacity level
s1 Thermal overload warning threshold

68

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

FLC1, FLC2

0.4...8.0 A in increments of 0.08 A for LTMR08

1.35...27.0 A in increments of 0.27 A for LTMR27
5...100 A in increments of 1 A for LTMR100

0.4 A for LTMR08

1.35 A for LTMR27
5 A for LTMR100

Warning threshold

10...100 % of thermal capacity

85 % of thermal capacity

Motor trip class

5...30 in increments of 5

Fault reset timeout

50...999 in 1 s increments

120 s

Fault reset threshold

35...95 % of thermal capacity

75 % of thermal capacity

The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following non-configurable parameter settings:
Parameter

Fixed Setting

Thermal overload fault threshold

100 % of thermal capacity

Technical Characteristics
The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following characteristics:
Characteristics

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of thermal overload warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s

69

Motor Protection Functions

Thermal Overload - Definite Time

Description
When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Definite Time, the LTM R controller signals:

a warning when measured maximum phase current exceeds a configurable threshold (OC1 or OC2).
a fault when the maximum phase current continuously exceeds the same threshold (OC1 or OC2) for a
set time delay.

The thermal overload definite time fault includes a time delay of constant magnitude, following a start
command, before the protection is active and a fault timeout duration, as described below:

Is Fault and warning threshold (OC1 or OC2)

T1 Start command
T2 Elapsed time delay

There is no time delay for the thermal overload definite time warning.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The definite time protection function is disabled following a start by a delay defined by the Long Start Fault
Timeout setting. The LTM R controller, when configured for overload predefined operating mode, uses the
change in state from off to on level current to begin the Start state. This delay allows the motor to draw
current on startup required to overcome the inertia of the motor at rest.
NOTE: Configuration of this protection function requires configuration of the Long Start protection function,
including the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter.
Functional Characteristics
The thermal overload definite time function includes the following features:

70

2 configurable threshold settings; one setting (OC1) is used for single speed motors, both settings are
required for 2-speed motors:
OC1(Motor Full Load Current Ratio) or
OC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio)

1 time delay:
Overcurrent Time (O-Time, set by the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter)

2 function outputs:
Thermal Overload Warning
Thermal Overload Fault

2 counting statistics:
Thermal Overload Faults Count
Thermal Overload Warnings Count

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Block Diagram

I1
I2
I3
Is
T

Phase 1 current
Phase 2 current
Phase 3 current
Fault and warning threshold (OC1 or OC2)
Fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The definite time thermal overload function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters

Setting Range

Fault threshold:
Motor full load current ratio (OC1)
- or Motor high speed full load current ratio (OC2)

5...100 % of FLCmax, in 1 % increments. 5 % FLCmax

Note: OC1 and OC2 settings can be set
directly (in Amperes) in the Settings menu
of an HMI, or in the Parameters tab of the
TeSys T DTM.

Thermal overload fault definite timeout (O-time or

over-current time)

1...300 s in 1 s increments

10 s

Thermal overload warning threshold

20...800 % of OC in 1 % increments

80 % of OC

1...200 s in 1 s increments

10 s

Long start fault

timeout(1)

(D-time)

Factory Setting

(1) The definite time thermal overload function requires the simultaneous use of the Long start motor protection
function, both of which employ the Long start fault timeout setting.

Technical Characteristics
The definite time thermal overload function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of warning and fault thresholds

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s

Example
The following diagram describes a definite time thermal overload fault:

OC Fault threshold (OC1 or OC2)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

71

Motor Protection Functions

Motor Temperature Sensor

Overview
The LTM R controller has 2 terminalsT1 and T2that can be connected to a motor temperature sensing
element to provide protection for motor windings by detecting high temperature conditions that could lead
to damage or degradation.
These protections are activated when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to one of the following
settings:

PTC Binary (see page 73)

PT100 (see page 75)
PTC Analog (see page 77)
NTC Analog (see page 79)

Only one of these motor protection sensing elements can be enabled at a time.
NOTE: Motor temperature sensor protection is based in ohms. PTC Binary protection thresholds are preset to IEC standards and are non-configurable. PTC Analog and NTC Analog protection functions may
require that you scale the resistance value to the corresponding threshold level in degrees, based on the
properties of the selected sensing element.
When a sensor type is changed, the LTM R controllers motor temperature sensing configuration settings
revert to their factory settings. If a sensor type is replaced with another sensor of the same type, the setting
values are retained.
Parameter Settings
The motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to
the selected motor temp sensor type:

72

Parameters

Setting Range

Sensor type

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

None
PTC Binary
PT100
PTC Analog
NTC Analog

Factory Setting
None

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Binary

Description
The PTC Binary motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type
parameter is set to PTC Binary and the LTM R controller is connected to a binary positive temperature
coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor.
The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals:

a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a fixed threshold.
a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds the same fixed threshold.

The fault and warning conditions continue until measured resistance falls below a separate fixed motor
temperature sensor re-closing threshold.
Motor temperature sensing fault thresholds are factory pre-set and are not configurable. Fault monitoring
can be enabled or disabled.
The function is available for all operating states.
Functional Characteristics
The PTC Binary motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:

2 function output:
Motor Temp Sensor Warning
Motor Temp Sensor Fault

1 counting statistic:
Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count

Block Diagram

Temperature sensing element resistance

Parameter Settings
The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following non-configurable parameter settings:
Parameter

Fixed settings

Accuracy

Fault/Warning threshold

2900

+/ 2 %

Fault/Warning re-closing threshold

1575

+/ 2 %

Technical Characteristics
The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Value

Detection time

0.5...0.6 s

Detection time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s

73

Motor Protection Functions

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a PTC binary motor temp sensor fault with an automatic
reset:

2900 Fault threshold

1575 Fault re-closing threshold
Reset This marks the time after which a reset can be executed. A start command is required before run state can be
resumed. In this example, auto-reset has been enabled.

74

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Motor Temperature Sensor - PT100

Description
The PT100 motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temperature Sensor Type
parameter is set to PT100 and the LTM R controller is connected to a PT100 sensor embedded in the
motor.
The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals:

a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured temperature exceeds a configurable warning
threshold.
a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured temperature exceeds a separately set fault
threshold.

The LTM R directly measures the temperature with a PT100 sensor. The temperature measured by the
PT100 sensor, either in C (factory setting) or in F, is displayed on the HMI or the TeSys T DTM, according
to the Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF parameter:
The fault or warning condition continues until the measured temperature falls below 95 % of the fault or
warning threshold.
There is a fixed detection time of 0.5 s to 0.6 s to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The function is available for all operating states.
NOTE:
The temperature is derived from the following equation: T = 2.6042 * R - 260.42,
where R = resistance ().
NOTE: To connect a 3-wire PT100 sensor to an LTM R controller, simply do not wire the compensation
pin of the 3-wire PT100 sensor.
Functional Characteristics
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:

2 configurable thresholds:
Motor Temperature Sensor Warning Threshold Degree
Motor Temperature Sensor Fault Threshold Degree

2 function outputs:
Motor Temperature Sensor Warning
Motor Temperature Sensor Fault

1 counting statistic:
Motor Temperature Sensor Faults Count

1 display configuration:
Motor Temperature Sensor Display Degree CF

Block Diagram

Temperature measured by the PT100 sensor

s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold
s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

75

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault threshold degree

0...200 C in 1 C increments

0 C

Warning threshold degree

0...200 C in 1 C increments

0 C

Motor temperature sensor display

degree CF

C (0)
F (1)

Technical Characteristics
The PT100 motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristic

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Warning threshold and Fault threshold

Detection time

0.5...0.6 s

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s

Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PT100 fault with automatic reset and an
active Run command:

s2 Fault threshold
s3 Fault re-closing threshold (95% of fault threshold)

76

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Motor Temperature Sensor - PTC Analog

Description
The PTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type
parameter is set to PTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog PTC thermistor
embedded in the motor.
The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals:

a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a configurable warning
threshold.
a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds a separately set fault
threshold.

The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance falls below 95 % of the fault or
warning threshold.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The function is available for all operating states.
Functional Characteristics
The PTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:

2 configurable thresholds:
Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold
Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold

2 function outputs:
Motor Temp Sensor Warning
Motor Temp Sensor Fault

1 counting statistic:
Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count

Block Diagram

Temperature sensing element resistance

s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold
s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold

Parameter Settings
The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault threshold

20...6500 in 0.1 increments

20

Warning threshold

20...6500 in 0.1 increments

20

Technical Characteristics
The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristic

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Warning threshold and Fault threshold

Detection time

0.5...0.6 s

Detection time accuracy

+/0.1 s

77

Motor Protection Functions

Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PTC analog fault with automatic reset and
an active Run command:

s2 Fault threshold
s3 Fault re-closing threshold (95% of fault threshold)

78

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Motor Temperature Sensor - NTC Analog

Description
The NTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type
parameter is set to NTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog NTC thermistor
embedded in the motor.
The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals:

a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance falls below a configurable warning
threshold.
a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance falls below a separately set fault
threshold.

The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance exceeds 105 % of the fault or
warning threshold.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The function is available for all operating states.
Functional Characteristics
The NTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features:

2 configurable thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

2 function outputs:
Motor Temp Sensor Warning
Motor Temp Sensor Fault

1 counting statistic:
Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count

Block Diagram

Temperature sensing element resistance

s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold
s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold

Parameter Settings
The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault threshold

20...6500 in 0.1 increments

20

Warning threshold

20...6500 in 0.1 increments

20

Technical Characteristics
The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

+ 5 % of Warning threshold and Fault thresholds

Detection time

0.5...0.6 s

Detection time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s

79

Motor Protection Functions

Example
The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor NTC analog fault with automatic reset:

r2 Fault threshold
r3 Fault re-closing threshold (105% of fault threshold)

80

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Rapid Cycle Lockout

Description
The rapid cycle lockout function prevents potential harm to the motor caused by repetitive, successive
inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts.
The rapid cycle lockout function provides a configurable timer, which begins its count when the LTM R
controller detects On Level Currentdefined as 20 % of FLC. At the same time the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit
is set.
If the LTM R controller detects a Run command before the rapid cycle lockout has elapsed, the:

Rapid Cycle Lockout bit remains set

LTM R controller ignores the Run command. It prevents the motor from restarting
HMI device (if attached) displays "WAIT"
LTM R controller Alarm LED flashes red 5 times per second, indicating the LTM R controller has
disabled motor outputs thereby preventing an undesirable condition caused by starting the motor
LTM R controller monitors the wait timeif more than 1 timer is active, the LTM R controller reports the
minimum wait time before the longest timer elapses

On power loss, the LTM R controller saves the state of the lockout timer in non-volatile memory. When the
LTM R controller next powers up, the timer restarts its count and again ignores Run commands until the
timer completes the timeout.
Setting the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout parameter to 0 disables this function.
The Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout setting can be edited when the LTM R controller is in its normal
operating state. If an edit is made while the timer is counting, the edit is effective when the timer finishes
counting.
This function has no warning and no fault.
NOTE: The Rapid Cycle Lockout function is not active when the overload operating mode is selected.
Functional Characteristics
The rapid cycle lockout function includes the following parameters:

1 time delay:
Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout

1 status bit:
Rapid Cycle Lockout

In addition, the Rapid Cycle Lockout function:

disables motor outputs

causes the LTM R Alarm LED to flash 5 times per second

Parameter Settings
The rapid cycle lockout function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Rapid cycle lockout timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

0s

Technical Characteristics
The rapid cycle lockout function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristics

Value

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%

81

Motor Protection Functions

Example

82

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Section 3.3
Current Motor Protection Functions

Current Motor Protection Functions

Overview
This section describes the current motor protection functions of the LTM R controller.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Current Phase Imbalance

84

Current Phase Loss

87

Current Phase Reversal

89

Long Start

90

Jam

92

Undercurrent

94

Overcurrent

96

Ground Current

98

Internal Ground Current

99

External Ground Current

101

83

Motor Protection Functions

Current Phase Imbalance

Description
The current phase imbalance function signals:

a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average current
in all 3 phases.
a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average
current in all 3 phases for a set period of time.

CAUTION
RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING
The Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold must be properly set to protect the wiring and motor
equipment from harm caused by motor overheating.

The setting you input must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes.
Refer to the motor manufacturers instructions before setting this parameter.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against smaller current phase imbalances. For larger
imbalances, in excess of 80 % of the average current in all 3 phases, use the current phase loss motor
protection function.
This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays:

one applies to current imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state, and
one applies to current imbalances occurring after startup while the motor is in run state

Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state.

The function identifies the phase causing a current imbalance. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase
current average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The function applies only to 3-phase motors.
Functional Characteristics
The current phase imbalance function includes the following features:

84

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

2 fault time delays:

Fault Timeout Starting
Fault Timeout Running

2 function outputs:
Current Phase Imbalance Warning
Current Phase Imbalance Fault

1 counting statistic:
Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count

3 indicators identifying the phase or phases with the highest current imbalance:
L1 Current Highest Imbalance
L2 Current Highest Imbalance
L3 Current Highest Imbalance

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Block Diagram
Current phase imbalance warning and fault:

I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Iimb Current imbalance ratio for 3-phase
Is1 Warning threshold
Is2 Fault threshold
T1 Fault timeout starting
T2 Fault timeout running

Parameter Settings
The current phase imbalance function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Fault timeout starting

0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments

0.7 s

Fault timeout running

0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments

5s

Fault threshold

10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in 1% increments

10 %

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

10...70 % of the calculated imbalance in 1% increments

10 %

NOTE: A time of 0.7 second is added to the Fault timeout starting parameter to avoid nuisance tripping
during the start phase.
Technical Characteristics
The current phase imbalance function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of fault or warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s or +/5 %

85

Motor Protection Functions

Example
The following diagram describes the detection of a current phase imbalance occurring during run state.

I Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average
Is2 Fault threshold

86

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Current Phase Loss

Description
The current phase loss function signals:

a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 % from the average current in all 3
phases.
a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 % from the average current in all 3 phases
for a set period of time.

NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against large current phase imbalances, in excess of 80 % of
the average current in all 3 phases. For smaller current imbalances, use the current phase imbalance
motor protection function.
This function has a single adjustable fault time delay, which is applied when the motor is in start state or
run state.
The function identifies the phase experiencing a current loss. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase
current average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
The function applies only to 3-phase motors.
Functional Characteristics
The current phase loss function includes the following features:

1 fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 % of the 3 phase average current.
1 fault time delay:
Current Phase Loss Timeout

2 function outputs:
Current Phase Loss Warning
Current Phase Loss Fault

1 counting statistic:
Current Phase Loss Faults Count

3 indicators identifying the phase or phases experiencing the current loss:

L1 Current loss
L2 Current loss
L3 Current loss

Block Diagram

I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
Ln Line current number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Iavg
Iavg 3 phase current average
T Fault timeout

1639502EN-04 09/2014

87

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The current phase loss function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Timeout

0.1...30 s in 0.1 s increments

3s

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

NOTE: A time of 0.7 second is added to the Fault timeout parameter to avoid nuisance tripping during the
start phase.
Technical Characteristics
The current phase loss function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

75 % of the 3 phase average current

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s or +/5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a current phase loss fault of a motor in run state.

%I Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average

88

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Current Phase Reversal

Description
The current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the current phases of a 3-phase
motor are out of sequence with the Motor Phases Sequence parameter, ABC or ACB.
NOTE: When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module, phase reversal protection is
based on voltage phase sequence before the motor starts, and on current phase sequence after the motor
starts.
This function:

is active when the motor is in start state or run state

applies only to 3-phase motors
has no warning and no timer.

This function can be enabled or disabled.

Functional Characteristics
The current phase reversal function adds to one counting statistic, Wiring Faults Count.
Parameter Settings
The current phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Phase sequence

A-B-C
A-C-B

A-B-C

Technical Characteristics
The current phase reversal function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristic

Value

Trip time at motor startup

within 0.2 s of motor startup

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s or +/5%

89

Motor Protection Functions

Long Start
Description
The long start function detects a locked or stalled rotor in start state and signals a fault when current
continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for the same period of time.
Each predefined operating mode has its own current profile, representing a successful start cycle for the
motor. The LTM R controller detects a long start fault condition whenever the actual current profile,
occurring after a start command, varies from the expected profile.
Fault monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
This function has no warning.
Start Cycle
The configurable parameters for the Long Start protection function, Long Start Fault Threshold and Long
Start Fault Timeout, are used by the LTM R controller in defining and detecting the motors start cycle. See
Start Cycle, page 139.
Functional Characteristics
The long start function includes the following features:

1 threshold:
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

1 function outputs:
Long Start Fault

1 counting statistic:
Long Start Faults Count

Block Diagram

I1
I2
I3
Is2
T

Phase 1 current
Phase 2 current
Phase 3 current
Fault threshold
Fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The long start function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Fault timeout

1...200 s in 1 s increments

10 s

Fault threshold

100...800 % of FLC

100 % of FLC

Technical Characteristics
The long start function has the following characteristics:

90

Characteristic

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a single threshold cross long start fault:

Is2 Long start fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

91

Motor Protection Functions

Jam
Description
The jam function detects a locked rotor during run state and signals:

a warning when current in any phase exceeds a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state.
a fault when current in any phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period
of time, after the motor has reached run state.

The jam function is triggered when the motor is jammed during run state and stops, or is suddenly
overloaded and draws excessive current.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The jam function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Jam Warning
Jam Fault

1 counting statistic:
Jam Faults Count

Block Diagram
Jam warning and fault:

I1
I2
I3
Is1
Is2
T

Phase 1 current
Phase 2 current
Phase 3 current
Warning threshold
Fault threshold
Fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The jam function has the following parameters:
Parameters

92

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Fault timeout

1...30 s in 1 s increments

5s

Fault threshold

100...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments

200 % of FLC

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

100...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments

200 % of FLC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The jam function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s or +/ 5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a jam fault.

Is2 Jam fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

93

Motor Protection Functions

Undercurrent
Description
The undercurrent function signals:

a warning when the 3-phase Average Current falls below a set threshold, after the motor has reached
run state.
a fault when the 3-phase Average Current falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set
period of time, after the motor has reached run state.

The undercurrent function is triggered when the motor current falls below a defined level for the driven load,
for example, if a drive belt or shaft has broken, allowing the motor to run free rather than under load. This
function has a single fault time delay. Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and
disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The undercurrent function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Undercurrent Warning
Undercurrent Fault

1 counting statistic:
Undercurrent Faults Count

Block Diagram
Undercurrent warning and fault:

Iavg Average current

Is1 Warning threshold
Is2 Fault threshold
T Fault timer delay

Parameter Settings
The undercurrent function has the following parameters:

94

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

1...200 s in 1 s increments

1s

Fault threshold

30...100 % of FLC in 1 % increments

50 % of FLC

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

30...100 % of FLC in 1 % increments

50 % of FLC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The undercurrent function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/- 5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an undercurrent fault.

Is2 Undercurrent fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

95

Motor Protection Functions

Overcurrent
Description
The overcurrent function signals:

a warning when current in a phase exceeds a set threshold, after the motor has reached run state.
a fault when current in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time,
after the motor has reached run state.

The overcurrent function can be triggered when the equipment is overloaded or a process condition is
detected causing current to increase beyond the set threshold. This function has a single fault time delay.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The overcurrent function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Overcurrent Warning
Overcurrent Fault

1 counting statistic:
Overcurrent Faults Count

Block Diagram

I1
I2
I3
Is1
Is2
T

Phase 1 current
Phase 2 current
Phase 3 current
Warning threshold
Fault threshold
Fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The overcurrent function has the following parameters:
Parameters

96

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

1...250 s in 1 s increments

10 s

Fault threshold

30...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments

200 % of FLC

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

30...800 % of FLC in 1 % increments

200 % of FLC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The overcurrent function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overcurrent fault.

Is2 Overcurrent fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

97

Motor Protection Functions

Ground Current
Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured to detect ground current:

internally, by summing the 3-phase current signals from the secondary of the internal current
transformers (see page 99).
externally, by measuring the current delivered by the secondary of an external ground fault current
transformer (see page 101).

Use the Ground Current Mode parameter to select either internal or external ground fault protection. Only
one of these ground current mode settings can be activated at a time.
Parameter Settings
The ground current protection function has the following configurable parameter settings, which apply to
both internal and external ground current protection:

98

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Ground current mode

Internal
External

Internal

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Ground fault disabled while starting

Enable/Disable

Enable

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Internal Ground Current

Description
The internal ground current function is enabled when the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to Internal
and disabled when set to External.

DANGER
IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION
Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current.
Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment.
Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The internal ground current function sums the current readings from the secondary of the internal current
transformers and signals:

a warning when the summed current exceeds a set threshold.

a fault when the summed current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of
time.

The internal ground current function has a single fault time delay.
The internal ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state, start state, or run
state. This function can be configured so that it is disabled during start state, and enabled only during ready
state and run state.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The internal ground current function includes the following features:

1 measure of ground current in amperes:

Ground Current

1 measure of ground current as a % of FLCmin:

Ground Current Ratio

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Internal Ground Current Warning
Internal Ground Current Fault

1 counting statistic:
Ground Current Faults Count

Block Diagram

I1 Phase 1 current
I2 Phase 2 current
I3 Phase 3 current
I Summed current
Is1 Warning threshold
Is2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout

1639502EN-04 09/2014

99

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The internal ground current function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Internal ground current fault timeout

0.5...25 s in 0.1 s increments

1s

Internal ground current fault threshold

50...500 % of FLCmin in 1 %
increments

50 % of FLCmin

Internal ground current warning threshold

50...500 % of FLCmin in 1 %
increments

50 % of FLCmin

Technical Characteristics
The internal ground current function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an internal ground current fault occurring during run
state.

Is2 internal ground current fault threshold

100

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

External Ground Current

Description
The external ground current function is enabled when:

the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to External, and

a current transformation ratio is set.

When Ground Current Mode is set to Internal, the external ground current function is disabled.

DANGER
IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION
External ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current.
Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment.
Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
The LTM R controller has 2 terminalsZ1 and Z2that can be connected to an external ground current
transformer. The external ground current function measures ground current delivered by the secondary of
the external current transformer and signals:

a warning when the delivered current exceeds a set threshold.

a fault when the delivered current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of
time.

The external ground current function has a single fault time delay.
The external ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state, start state, or run
state. This function can be configured so that it is disabled only during start state, and enabled during ready
state and run state.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The external ground current function includes the following features:

1 measure of ground current in amperes:

Ground Current

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
External Ground Current Warning
External Ground Current Fault

1 counting statistic:
Ground Current Faults Count

Block Diagram

Igr Ground current from external ground CT

Igr s1 Warning threshold
Igr s2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout

1639502EN-04 09/2014

101

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The external ground current function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

External ground current fault timeout

0.1...25 s in 0.01 s increments

0.5 s

External ground current fault threshold

0.02...20 A in 0.01 A increments 1 A

External ground current warning threshold

0.02...20 A in 0.01 A increments 1 A

Technical Characteristics
The external ground current function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an external ground current fault occurring during run
state.

Igr s2 External ground current fault threshold

102

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Section 3.4
Voltage Motor Protection Functions

Voltage Motor Protection Functions

Overview
This section describes the voltage motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Voltage Phase Imbalance

104

Voltage Phase Loss

107

Voltage Phase Reversal

109

Undervoltage

110

Overvoltage

112

Voltage Dip Management

114

Load Shedding

115

Automatic Restart

117

103

Motor Protection Functions

Voltage Phase Imbalance

Description
The voltage phase imbalance function signals:

a warning when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a set percentage from the
average voltage in all 3 phases
a fault when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from
the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time

NOTE: A composed phase is the combined measure of 2 phases: L1 + L2, L2 + L3, or L3 + L1.
This function:
is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module
is active when the average voltage is between 50 % and 120 % of the nominal voltage
is available when the motor is in ready state, start state and run state
applies only to 3-phase motors
This function has 2 adjustable fault time delays:
one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state, and
one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in run state, or when the long start time
duration expires

Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state.

NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against smaller voltage phase imbalances. For larger
imbalances, in excess of 40 % of the average voltage in all 3 phases, use the voltage phase loss motor
protection function.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The voltage phase imbalance function includes the following features:

104

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

2 fault time delays:

Fault Timeout Starting
Fault Timeout Running

2 function outputs:
Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning
Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault

1 counting statistic:
Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count

3 indicators identifying the phase with the highest voltage imbalance:

L1-L2 Highest Imbalance
L2-L3 Highest Imbalance
L3-L1 Highest Imbalance

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Block Diagram

V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from Vavg
Vs1 Warning threshold
Vs2 Fault threshold
Vavg 3 phase voltage average
T1 Fault timeout starting
T2 Fault timeout running

Parameter Settings
The voltage phase imbalance function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout starting

0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments

0.7 s

Fault timeout running

0.2...20 s in 0.1 s increments

2s

Fault threshold

3...15 % of the calculated imbalance in

1 % increments

10 %

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

3...15 % of the calculated imbalance in

1 % increments

10 %

Technical Characteristics
The voltage phase imbalance function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %

105

Motor Protection Functions

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase imbalance:

V% Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage
Vs2 Fault threshold

106

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Voltage Phase Loss

Description
The voltage phase loss function is based on the Voltage Phase Imbalance function and signals:

a warning when the voltage in any phase differs by more than a 38 % from the average voltage in all 3
phases.
a fault when the voltage in any phase differs by more than 38 % from the average voltage in all 3 phases
for a set period of time.

This function:
is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module
is active when the average voltage is between 50 % and 120 % of the nominal voltage
is available when the motor is in ready state, start state or run state
applies only to 3-phase motors
This function has a single adjustable fault time delay.
NOTE: Use this function to detect and guard against large voltage phase imbalances, in excess of 40 %
of the average voltage in all 3 phases. For smaller voltage imbalances, use the voltage phase imbalance
motor protection function.
The function identifies the phase experiencing a voltage loss. If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase
voltage average is the same for 2 phases, the function identifies both phases.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The voltage phase loss function includes the following features:

A fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 38 % of the 3 phase average voltage.
A single, adjustable fault time delay:
Voltage Phase Loss Timeout

2 function outputs:
Voltage Phase Loss Warning
Voltage Phase Loss Fault

1 counting statistic:
Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count

3 indicators identifying the phase experiencing the voltage loss:

L1-L2 Voltage loss
L2-L3 Voltage loss
L3-L1 Voltage loss

Block Diagram

V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Ln Line voltage number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Vavg
Vavg 3 phase average voltage
T Fault timeout

1639502EN-04 09/2014

107

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The voltage phase loss function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Fault timeout

0.1...30 s in 0.1 s increments

3s

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Enable

Technical Characteristics
The voltage phase loss function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

45 % of the 3 phase average voltage

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase loss fault of a motor in run state:

V% Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage

108

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Voltage Phase Reversal

Description
The voltage phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the voltage phases of a 3-phase
motor are out of sequence, usually indicating a wiring error. Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter
to configure the direction, ABC or ACB, in which the motor will turn.
This function:
is available when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module
is active when the average voltage is between 50 % and 120 % of the nominal voltage
is available when the motor is in ready state, start state and run state
applies only to 3-phase motors
has no warning and no timer
This function can be enabled or disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The voltage phase reversal function adds one counting statistic, Wiring Faults Count.
Parameter Settings
The voltage phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Motor phases sequence

A-B-C
A-C-B

A-B-C

Technical Characteristics
The voltage phase reversal function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristics

Value

Trip time

within 0.2 s

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s

109

Motor Protection Functions

Undervoltage
Description
The undervoltage function signals:

a warning when voltage in a phase falls below a set threshold.

a fault when voltage in a phase falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of
time.

This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a
percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage (Vnom) parameter setting.
The undervoltage function is available only in ready state and run state, when the LTM R controller is
connected to an expansion module.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The undervoltage function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Undervoltage Warning
Undervoltage Fault

1 counting statistic:
Undervoltage Faults Count

Block Diagram

V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Vs1 Warning threshold
Vs2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout

110

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The undervoltage function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

0.2...25 s in 0.1 s increments

3s

Fault threshold

70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments

85 %

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments

85 %

Technical Characteristics
The undervoltage function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

-5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of a undervoltage fault.

Vs2 Undervoltage fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

111

Motor Protection Functions

Overvoltage
Description
The overvoltage function signals:

a warning when voltage in a phase exceeds a set threshold.

a fault when voltage in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period
of time.

This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a
percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage (Vnom) parameter setting.
The overvoltage function is available in ready state and run state, when the LTM R controller is connected
to an expansion module.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The overvoltage function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Warning Threshold
Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Overvoltage Warning
Overvoltage Fault

1 counting statistic:
Overvoltage Faults Count

Block Diagram

V1 L1-L2 voltage
V2 L2-L3 voltage
V3 L3-L1 voltage
Vs1 Warning threshold
Vs2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout

112

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Parameter Settings
The overvoltage function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

0.2...25 s in 0.1 s increments

3s

Fault threshold

101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments

110 %

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

101...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in 1 % increments

110 %

Technical Characteristics
The overvoltage function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s or +/ 5%

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overvoltage fault.

Vs2 Overvoltage fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

113

Motor Protection Functions

Voltage Dip Management

Overview
When a voltage dip is detected, the LTM R can perform 2 different functions to shed and reconnect
automatically the load:
Load shedding (see page 115)
Automatic restart (see page 117)
Selection is done via the Voltage dip mode parameter:
If Voltage dip mode is...

Then...

nothing happens

load shedding function is enabled

automatic restart function is enabled

Load Shedding and Automatic Restart functions exclude each other.

114

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Load Shedding
Description
The LTM R controller provides load shedding, which you can use to deactivate non-critical loads if voltage
level is substantially reduced. For example, use load shedding when power is transferred from a main utility
supply to a backup generator system, where the backup generator system can supply power only to a
limited number of critical loads.
The LTM R only monitors load shedding when Load Shedding is selected.
With the load shedding function enabled, the LTM R controller monitors the average phase voltage and:
reports a load shedding condition and stops the motor when voltage falls below a configurable Voltage
dip threshold and stays below the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding timer,
clears the load shedding condition when voltage rises above a configurable Voltage dip restart threshold
and remains above the threshold for the duration of a configurable Load shedding restart timer.
When the LTM R controller clears the load shedding condition:
in 2-wire (maintained) configuration, it issues a Run command to re-start the motor,
in 3-wire (impulse) configuration, it does not automatically re-start the motor.

In Overload motor operating mode, load shedding conditions do not affect O.1 and O.2 operating states.
In Independent motor operating mode, load shedding conditions do not affect O.2 state.
If your application includes another device that externally provides load shedding, the LTM R controllers
load shedding function should not be enabled.
All voltage dip thresholds and timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating
state. When a load shedding timer is counting at the time it is adjusted, the new duration time does not
become effective until the timer expires.
This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module.
Functional Characteristics
The load shedding function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Voltage Dip Threshold
Voltage Dip Restart Threshold

2 time delays:
Load Shedding Timeout
Voltage Dip Restart Timeout

1 status flag
Load Shedding

1 counting statistic:
Load Sheddings Count

In addition, the load shedding function:

disables logic outputs O.1 and O.2

causes the alarm LED to flash 5 times per second

Parameter Settings
The load shedding function has the following parameters:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Voltage dip mode

0 = None
1 = Load shedding
2 = Auto restart

0 = None

Load shedding timeout

1...9999 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Voltage dip threshold

50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage

70 %

Voltage dip restart timeout

1...9999 s in increments of 1 s

2s

Voltage dip restart threshold

65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage

90 %

115

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The load shedding function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%

Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the load shedding function, for a 2-wire
configuration with automatic restart:

1
2
3

116

Motor running
Load shed; motor stopped
Load shed cleared; motor auto-restart (2-wire operation)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Automatic Restart
Description
The LTM R controller provides automatic restart.
With the automatic restart function enabled, the LTM R controller monitors the instantaneous phase
voltage and detects voltage dip conditions. The voltage dip detection shares some parameters with the
Load shedding function.
3 restart sequences are managed by the function according to the duration of the voltage dip:
Immediate restart: the motor restarts automatically.
Delayed restart: the motor restarts automatically after a timeout.
Manual restart: the motor restarts manually. A Run command is necessary.
All automatic restart timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state.
When an automatic restart timer is counting at the time it is adjusted, the new duration time does not
become effective until the timer expires.
This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module.
Functional Characteristics
The automatic restart function includes the following features:

3 time delays:
Auto Restart Immediate Timeout
Auto Restart Delayed Timeout
Voltage Dip Restart Timeout

5 status flags:
Voltage Dip Detection: the LTM R is in a dip condition
Voltage Dip Occurred: a dip has been detected in the last 4.5 seconds
Auto Restart Immediate Condition
Auto Restart Delayed Condition
Auto Restart Manual Condition

3 counting statistics:
Auto Restart Immediate Count
Auto Restart Delayed Count
Auto Restart Manual Count

Parameter Settings
The automatic restart function has the following parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Voltage dip mode

0 = None
1 = Load shedding
2 = Auto restart

0 = None

Voltage dip threshold

50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage

65 %

Voltage dip restart threshold

65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage

90 %

Auto restart immediate timeout

0...0.4 s in increments of 0. 1 s

0.2 s

Auto restart delayed timeout

0...300 s: timeout setting in

4s

increments of 1 s
301 s: timeout infinite
Voltage dip restart timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

2s

Technical Characteristics
The automatic restart function has the following characteristics:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Characteristics

Value

Timing accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5%

117

Motor Protection Functions

Automatic Restart Behavior

The automatic restart behavior is characterized by the voltage dip duration, that is the amount of time
passed from the voltage loss until the voltage restoration.
The 2 possible settings are:
immediate restart timeout,
delayed restart timeout (with delay defined by Restart Delay Time).
The following diagram shows the automatic restart phases:

If the voltage dip duration is less than the immediate restart timeout and if the voltage dip is the second
one occurring within 1 second, then the motor will require a delayed restart.
When a delayed restart is active (the delay timer is running):
the timer is paused for the duration of the dip if a voltage dip occurs,
the delayed restart is canceled if a start or stop command occurs.
Timing Sequence - Immediate Restart
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when an immediate restart occurs:

1
2
3

118

Motor running
Voltage dip detected, motor stopped
Voltage dip cleared, motor automatic restart

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Timing Sequence - Delayed Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a delayed restart occurs:

1
2
3

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor running
Voltage dip detected, motor stopped
Voltage dip cleared, motor automatic restart

119

Motor Protection Functions

Timing Sequence - Manual Restart

The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence when a manual restart occurs:

1
2
3

120

Motor running
Voltage dip detected, motor stopped
Voltage dip cleared, motor automatic restart

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Section 3.5
Power Motor Protection Functions

Power Motor Protection Functions

Overview
This section describes the power motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Underpower

122

Overpower

124

Under Power Factor

126

Over Power Factor

128

121

Motor Protection Functions

Underpower
Description
The underpower function signals:

a warning when the value of active power falls below a set threshold.
a fault when the value of active power falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period
of time.

This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a
percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting (Pnom).
The underpower function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an
expansion module.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The underpower function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Underpower Warning Threshold
Underpower Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Underpower Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Underpower Warning
Underpower Fault

1 counting statistic:
Underpower Faults Count

Block Diagram

Vavg Average rms voltage

Iavg Average rms current
P Power
Ps1 Warning threshold
Ps2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The underpower function has the following parameters:

122

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

1...100 s in 1 s increments

60 s

Fault threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments

20 %

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments

30 %

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The underpower function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Accuracy

+/ 5%

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an underpower fault.

Ps2 Underpower fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

123

Motor Protection Functions

Overpower
Description
The overpower function signals:

a warning when the value of active power exceeds a set threshold.

a fault when the value of active power exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that
threshold for a set period of time.

This function has a single fault time delay. Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a
percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting (Pnom).
The overpower function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is connected to an
expansion module.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The overpower function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Overpower Warning Threshold
Overpower Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Overpower Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Overpower Warning
Overpower Fault

1 counting statistic:
Overpower Faults Count

Block Diagram

Vavg Average rms voltage

Iavg Average rms current
P Power
Ps1 Warning threshold
Ps2 Fault threshold
T Fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The overpower function has the following parameters:
Parameters

124

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

1...100 s in 1 s increments

60 s

Fault threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments

150 %

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 1 % increments

150 %

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The overpower function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Accuracy

+/ 5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overpower fault.

Ps2 Overpower fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

125

Motor Protection Functions

Under Power Factor

Description
The under power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals:

a warning when the value of the power factor falls below a set threshold.
a fault when the value of the power factor falls below a separately set threshold and remains below that
threshold for a set period of time.

This function has a single fault time delay.

The under power factor protection function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is
connected to an expansion module.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The under power factor function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Under Power Factor Warning Threshold
Under Power Factor Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Under Power Factor Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Under Power Factor Warning
Under Power Factor Fault

1 counting statistic:
Under Power Factor Faults Count

Block Diagram

coss1 Under power factor warning threshold

coss2 Under power factor fault threshold
T Under power factor fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The under power factor function has the following parameters:

126

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

1...25 s in 0.1 s increments

10 s

Fault threshold

0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments

0.60

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments

0.60

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The under power factor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Accuracy

+/3 or +/ 10 % (for cos 0.6)

Trip time accuracy

+/ 0.1 s or +/ 5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an under power factor fault.

coss2 Under power factor fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

127

Motor Protection Functions

Over Power Factor

Description
The over power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals:

a warning when the value of the power factor exceeds a set threshold.
a fault when the value of the power factor exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that
threshold for a set period of time.

This function has a single fault time delay.

The over power factor protection function is available only in run state, when the LTM R controller is
connected to an expansion module.
Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled.
Functional Characteristics
The over power factor function includes the following features:

2 thresholds:
Over Power Factor Warning Threshold
Over Power Factor Fault Threshold

1 fault time delay:

Over Power Factor Fault Timeout

2 function outputs:
Over Power Factor Warning
Over Power Factor Fault

1 counting statistic:
Over Power Factor Faults Count

Block Diagram

coss1 Over power factor warning threshold

coss2 Over power factor fault threshold
T Over power factor fault timeout

Parameter Settings
The over power factor function has the following parameters:

128

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Fault timeout

1...25 s in 0.1 s increments

10 s

Fault threshold

0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments

0.90

Warning enable

Enable/Disable

Disable

Warning threshold

0...1 x Power factor in 0.01 increments

0.90

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Protection Functions

Technical Characteristics
The over power factor function has the following characteristics:
Characteristics

Value

Hysteresis

5 % of Fault threshold or Warning threshold

Accuracy

+/ 3 or +/ 10 % (for cos 0.6)

Trip time accuracy

+/0.1 s or +/ 5 %

Example
The following diagram describes the occurrence of an over power factor fault.

coss2 Over power factor fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

129

Motor Protection Functions

130

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Motor Control Functions
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 4
Motor Control Functions

Motor Control Functions

Overview
The topics in this chapter describe the LTM R controllers operating states which determine the operating
modes, and the fault reset mode (manual, remote, automatic).
This chapter also introduces custom operating mode, which you can use to customize a predefined control
program.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Topic

Page

4.1

Control Channels and Operating States

132

4.2

Operating Modes

142

4.3

Fault Management and Clear Commands

164

131

Motor Control Functions

Section 4.1
Control Channels and Operating States

Control Channels and Operating States

Overview
This section describes:

how to configure control of the LTM R controller outputs, and

the LTM R controllers operating states, including:
how the LTM R controller transitions between operating states during startup, and
the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller in each operating state

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only
persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter and apply this product. Follow all
local and national safety codes and standards.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

132

Page

Control Channels

133

Operating States

136

Start Cycle

139

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Control Channels
Overview
The LTM R can be configured for 1 control channel out of 3:
Terminal strip: Input devices wired to the input terminals on the front face of the LTM R controller.
HMI: An HMI device connected to the LTM R controllers HMI port.
Network: A network PLC connected to the controller network port.
Control Channel Selection
You can easily select between 2 control channels, assigning one channel to be the local control source
and the second channel to be the remote control source.
The possible channel assignments are:
Control Channel

Local

Remote

Terminal strip (factory

setting)

Yes

Only with an LTM CU present

HMI

Yes

Only with an LTM CU present

Network

No

Yes

In local control, the control channel selection (Terminal strip or HMI) is determined by setting the Control
local channel setting in the Control setting register.
In remote control, the control channel selection is always Network, unless an LTM CU is present. In this
case, the control channel selection is determined by setting the Control remote channel setting in the
Control setting register.
If an LTM CU is present, the logic input I.6 and the local/remote button on the LTM CU are used together
to select between local and remote control source:
Logic Input I.6

LTM CU Local/Remote Status

Active Control Source

Inactive

Local

Local

Local

Remote (or not present)

Remote

Active

NOTE:

The Network control channel is always considered as 2-wire control, regardless of the operating mode
selected.
In 3-wire mode, Stop commands can be disabled in the Control setting register.
In 2-wire mode, Stop commands given by the non-controlling channel shall always be ignored.
Run commands from a channel other than the selected control channel shall be ignored.

For a predefined operating mode, only one control source may be enabled to direct the outputs. You can
use the custom logic editor to add one or more additional control sources.
Terminal Strip
In Terminal Strip control, the LTM R controller commands its outputs according to the state of its inputs.
This is the control channel factory setting when logic input I.6 is inactive.
The following conditions apply to Terminal Strip control channel:

Any terminal inputs assigned to start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor
operating mode.
HMI and network start commands are ignored.

When using LTM CU, the parameter Stop Terminal Strip Disable is set in the Control Setting register.
HMI
In HMI control, the LTM R controller commands its outputs in response to start and stop commands
received from an HMI device connected to the HMI port.
The following conditions apply to HMI control channel:

Any HMI start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode.
Network start commands and terminal strip start commands are ignored.

When using LTM CU, the parameter Stop HMI Disable is set in the Control Setting register.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

133

Motor Control Functions

Network
In Network control, a remote PLC sends commands to the LTM R controller through the network
communication port.
The following conditions apply to Network control channel:

Any network start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode.
The HMI unit can read (but not write) the LTM R controller parameters.

Control Transfer Mode

Select the Control Transfer Mode parameter to enable bumpless transfer when changing the control
channel; clear this parameter to enable bump transfer. The configuration setting for this parameter
determines the behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2, as follows:
Control Transfer Mode Setting

LTM R Controller Behavior When Changing Control Channel

Bump

Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 open (if closed) or remain open (if already open) until
the next valid signal occurs. The motor stops.
Note: In overload predefined operating mode, logic outputs O.1 and O.2 are userdefined and therefore may not be affected by a Bump transfer.

Bumpless

Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 are not affected and remain in their original position
until the next valid signal occurs. The motor does not stop.

When you start the motor in Remote control mode with the PLC, the LTM R controller changes to Local
control mode (I.6=1 to I.6=0) and the status of the motor changes depending on the control transfer mode,
as follows:
If the LTM R controller configuration is...

Then the control mode changes from Remote to

Local and the motor

3-Wire Bumpless

keeps running

2-Wire Bumpless

keeps running if the logic inputs I.1 or I.2 are activated

3-Wire Bump

stops

2-Wire Bump

When the LTM R controller changes from Local to Remote control mode (I.6=0 to I.6=1), the status of the
motor in Local control mode, whether running or stopped, remains unchanged. The control transfer mode
selected does not affect the status of the motor as the LTM R controller only takes account of the last
control command (logic outputs O.1 or O.2) sent by the PLC.

CAUTION
FAILURE TO STOP AND RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION
LTM R controller operation cannot be stopped from the terminals when control channel is changed to
Terminal Strip control channel if the LTM R controller is:

operating in Overload operating mode

- and configured in Bumpless
- and operated over a network using Network control channel
- and operating in Run state
- and configured for 3-wire (impulse) control.

See instructions below.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Whenever control channel is changed to Terminal Strip control channel, operation of the LTM R controller
cannot be stopped from the terminals because no terminal input is assigned to a STOP command.

134

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

If this behavior is not intended, the control channel must be changed to either Network control channel or
HMI control channel to command a STOP. To implement this change, take one of the following
precautionary steps:
the commissioner should configure the LTM R controller for either bump transfer of control channel or
2-wire control.
the installer should provide the LTM R controller with a means of interrupting current to the contactor
coil - for example, a push button station wired in series with the LTM R controller outputs.
the controls engineer should assign a terminal input to disable the Run command using Custom
Configuration Mode assignments.
Fallback Transitions
The LTM R controller enters a fallback state when communication with the control source is lost, and exits
the fallback state when communication is restored. The transition into and out of the fallback state is as
follows:
Transition

Control Source Transfer

Entering the fallback state

Bumpless, when the Control Direct Transition bit is on

Exiting the fallback state

Determined by the settings for Control Transfer Mode (bump or bumpless) and Control
Direct Transition (on or off)

For information on how to configure communications fallback parameters, refer to the topic Communication
Loss (see page 47).
When using LTM CU, the parameters Control Transfer Mode and Control Direct Transition parameters are
set in the Control Setting register.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

135

Motor Control Functions

Operating States
Introduction
The LTM R controller responds to the state of the motor and provides control, monitoring and protection
functions appropriate to each of the motors operating states. A motor can have many operating states.
Some operating states are persistent while others are transitional.
A motors primary operating states are:
Operating State

Description

Ready

The motor is stopped.

The LTM R controller:
detects no fault
is not performing load shedding
is not counting down the rapid cycle timer
is ready to start

Not Ready

The motor is stopped.

The LTM R controller:
detects a fault
is performing load shedding
is counting down the rapid cycle timer

Start

The motor starts.

The LTM R controller:
detects that current has reached the On Level Current threshold
detects that current has not both crossed and re-crossed the long start fault threshold
continues to count down the long start fault timer.

Run

The motor is running.

The LTM R controller detects that current has both crossed and re-crossed the long start

fault threshold before the LTM R controller fully counted down the long start fault timer.

136

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Operating State Chart

The operating states of the LTM R controller firmware, as the motor progresses from Off to Run state, are
described below. The LTM R controller verifies current in each operating state. The LTM R controller can
transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state.

Protection Monitoring by Operating States

The motor operating states, and the fault and warning protections provided by the LTM R controller while
the motor is in each operating state (denoted with an X), are described below. It can transition to an internal
fault condition from any operating state.
Protection Category
Diagnostic

Wiring / configuration errors

Internal faults
X

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Monitored Fault/Warning

Operating States
Sys Config

Ready

Not Ready

Start

Run

Run Command Check

Stop Command Check

Run Check Back

Stop Check Back

PTC connection

CT Reversal

Voltage Phase Loss

Phase Configuration

Minor

Major

Monitored
Not monitored

137

Motor Control Functions

Protection Category
Motor temp sensor

Thermal overload
Current

Voltage

Power / Power Factor

138

Monitored Fault/Warning

Operating States
Sys Config

Ready

Not Ready

Start

Run

PTC Binary

PT100

PTC Analog

NTC Analog

Definite

Inverse Thermal

Long Start

Jam

Current Phase Imbalance

Current Phase Loss

Overcurrent

Undercurrent

Ground Fault (Internal)

Ground Fault (External)

Overvoltage Level

Undervoltage Level

Voltage Phase Imbalance

Over Power Factor Level

Under Power Factor Level

Overpower Level

Underpower Level

Monitored
Not monitored

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Start Cycle
Description
The start cycle is the time period allowed for the motor to reach its normal FLC level. The LTM R controller
measures the start cycle in seconds, beginning when it detects On Level Current, defined as maximum
phase current equal to 20 % of FLC.
During the start cycle, the LTM R controller compares:

detected current against the configurable Long Start Fault Threshold parameter, and
elapsed start cycle time against the configurable Long Start Fault Timeout parameter.

There are 3 start cycle scenarios, each based on the number of times (0,1 or 2) maximum phase current
crosses the Long Start Fault Threshold. A description of each scenario is described below.
For information on the statistics the LTM R controller retains describing motor starts, see Motor Starts
Counters, page 55. For information about the long start protection function, see Long Start, page 90.
Start Cycle Operating States
During the start cycle, the LTM R controller transitions through the motors operating states as follows:
Step

Event

Operating State

LTM R controller receives a start command input signal.

Ready

The LTM R controller confirms that all startup preconditions exist (e.g. no
faults, load shedding, or rapid cycle timer).

Ready

The LTM R controller closes the appropriate output contacts designated as

terminals 13-14 or 23-24, thereby closing the control circuit of the motor
starting contactors.

Ready

The LTM R controller detects that maximum phase current exceeds the On Start
Level Current threshold.

The LTM R controller detects that current rises above and then falls below
the Long Start Fault Threshold before the Long Start Fault Timeout timer
expires.

Run

2 Threshold Crosses
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle executes successfully:

Current rises above, then drops below, the fault threshold.

The LTM R controller reports the actual start cycle time, i.e. the time elapsed from detection of On Level
Current until the maximum phase current drops below the fault threshold.

Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses, single step:

Is Long start fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

139

Motor Control Functions

Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses, 2 step:

1 Threshold Cross
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle fails:

Current rises above, but fails to drop below, the Long Start Fault Threshold.
If Long Start protection is enabled, the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault
Timeout is reached
If Long Start protection is disabled, the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins
after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired.
Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault
Timeout.
The LTM R controller reports start cycle time as 9999, indicating that current exceeded and remained
above the fault threshold.
The LTM R controller reports the maximum current detected during the start cycle.

Start cycle with 1 threshold cross:

140

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

0 Threshold Cross
In this start cycle scenario, the start cycle fails:

Current never rises above the fault threshold.

If Long Start protection is enabled, the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault
Timeout is reached
If Long Start protection is disabled, the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins
after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired.
Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault
Timeout.
The LTM R controller reports both the start cycle time and the maximum current detected during start
cycle as 0000, indicating current never reached the fault threshold.

Start cycle with 0 threshold cross:

Is Long start fault threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

141

Motor Control Functions

Section 4.2
Operating Modes

Operating Modes

Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured to 1 of 10 predefined operating modes. Selecting custom
operating mode allows you to select one of the 10 predefined operating modes and customize it to your
specific application.
The selection of a predefined operating mode determines the behavior of all LTM R controller inputs and
outputs.
Each predefined operating mode selection includes a control wiring selection:

2-wire (maintained), or
3-wire (impulse)

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic

142

Page

Control Principles

143

Predefined Operating Modes

144

Control Wiring and Fault Management

146

Overload Operating Mode

147

Independent Operating Mode

149

Reverser Operating Mode

151

Two-Step Operating Mode

154

Two-Speed Operating Mode

159

Custom Operating Mode

163

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Control Principles
Overview
The LTM R controller performs control and monitoring functions for single-phase and 3-phase electric
motors.

These functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used. They are ready to use and
are implemented by simple parameter setting after the LTM R controller has been commissioned.
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom
logic editor in the TeSys T DTM to:
customize the use of results of protection functions
change the operation of control and monitoring functions
alter the predefined LTM R controller I/O logic

Operating Principle
The processing of control and monitoring functions has 3 parts:

acquisition of input data:

the output of protection function processing
external logic data from logic inputs
telecommunication commands (TCC) received from the control source

logic processing by the control or monitoring function

utilization of the processing results:
activation of logic outputs
display of predefined messages
activation of LEDs
telecommunication signals (TCS) sent via a communications link.

The control and monitoring function process is displayed below:

Logic Inputs and Outputs

The LTM R controller provides 6 logic inputs and 4 logic outputs. By adding an LTM E expansion module,
you can add 4 more logic inputs.
Selecting a predefined operating mode automatically assigns the logic inputs to functions and defines the
relationship between logic inputs and outputs. Using the custom logic editor, you can change these
assignments.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

143

Motor Control Functions

Predefined Operating Modes

Overview
The LTM R controller can be configured in 1 out of 10 predefined operating modes. Each operating mode
is designed to meet the requirements of a common application configuration.
When you select an operating mode, you specify both the:

operating mode type, which determines the relationship between logic inputs and logic outputs, and
control circuit type, which determines logic input behavior, based on the control wiring design

Operating Mode Types

There are 10 types of operating modes:
Operating Mode Type
Overload (see page 147)

Best used for:

All motor starter applications in which the user defines assignment of:
logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3 and I.4
logic outputs O.1 and O.2
Aux1, Aux2 and Stop commands from the HMI keypad.

The I/O can be defined using a control program managed by the master network
controller in remote control, by an HMI tool, or by using custom logic.
Independent
(see page 149)

Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting applications

Reverser (see page 151)

Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting applications

Two-Step (see page 154)

Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including:

Wye-Delta
Open Transition Primary Resistor
Open Transition Autotransformer

Two-Speed (see page 159)

Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including:

Dahlander (consequent pole)
Pole Changer

Logic Input Behavior

When you select an operating mode, you also specify that logic inputs are wired for either 2-wire
(maintained) or 3-wire (impulse) control. Your selection determines the valid start and stop commands from
the various control sources, and sets the behavior of the input command following the return of power after
an outage:
Control Circuit Type

Behavior of Logic Inputs I.1 and I.2

2-wire (maintained)

The LTM R controller, after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the
motor, issues a run command. The run command remains active only while the input is
active. The signal is not latched.

3-wire (impulse)

The LTM R controller:

After detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor, latch the run
command, and
After a stop command, disables the run command to disable the output relay wired
in series with the coil of the contactor that turns the motor on or off
Following a stop, must detect a rising edge on the input to latch the run command.

Control logic assignments for logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3 and I.4 are described in each of the predefined motor
operating modes.
NOTE: In Network control channel, network commands behave as 2-wire control commands, regardless
of the control circuit type of the selected operating mode. For information on Control Channels, see Control
Channels, page 133.

144

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

In each predefined operating mode, logic inputs I.3, I.4, I.5 and I.6 behave as follows:
Logic Input

Behavior

I.3

When it is configured to be used as the external system ready input (Logic Input 3 External

Ready Enable = 1), this input provides a feedback on the system state (Ready or not):
If I.3 = 0, the external system is not ready. System Ready bit (455.0) is set to 0.
If I.3 = 1, the external system is ready. System Ready bit (455.0) can be set to 1
depending on other conditions on the system.
When it is not configured to be used as the external system ready input (Logic Input 3

External Ready Enable = 0), this input is user defined and only sets a bit in a register.
I.4

In 3-wire (impulse) control: a Stop command. Note that this stop command can be disabled

in terminal strip control by setting the parameter Stop terminal strip disable in the Control
setting register.
In 2-wire (maintained) control: a user-defined input that can be configured to send
information to a PLC address over the network.
Note: In Overload operating mode, logic input I.4 is not used and can be user-defined.
I.5

A Fault Reset command is recognized when this input receives the rising edge of a signal.
Note: this input must first become inactive, and then receive the rising edge of a subsequent
signal, for another reset to occur.

I.6

Local/Remote control of the LTM R controllers outputs:

Active: Remote control (can be associated to any Control channel).
Inactive: Local control through either the terminal strip or the HMI port, as determined by
the Control Local Channel Setting parameter.

WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION IN HMI CONTROL
If the terminal strip Stop is disabled, the fault output (terminal NC 95-96) must be wired in series with the
contactor coil.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Logic Output Behavior
The behavior of logic outputs O.1 and O.2 is determined by the selected operating mode. See the topics
that follow for a description of the 10 predefined operating mode types and the behavior of logic outputs
O.1 and O.2.
When the LTM R controller has lost communication with either the network or the HMI, the LTM R
controller enters a fallback condition. When it receives a stop command in a fallback condition, logic
outputs O.1 and O.2 behave as follows:
Control Circuit Type

Response of Logic Outputs O.1 and O.2 to a Stop Command

2-wire (maintained)

A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O.1 and O.2
while the stop command is active. After the stop command is no longer active, logic
outputs O.1 and O.2 return to their programmed fallback state.

3-wire (impulse)

A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O.1 and
O.2. The outputs remain off after the stop command is removed and do not return to
their programmed fallback state.

For more information about configuring fallback parameters, refer to the Fallback Condition (see page 47)
portion of the topic describing Communication Loss.
In all operating mode types, the following logic outputs behave as described below:
Logic Output
O.3

Behavior
Activated by any enabled protection warning:
Terminals NO 33-34

O.4

Activated by any enabled protection fault:

Terminals NC 95-96
Terminals NO 97-98

Note: When control voltage is too low or off:

NC 95-96 open
NO 97-98 close

1639502EN-04 09/2014

145

Motor Control Functions

Control Wiring and Fault Management

Overview
When Overload predefined operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller does not manage logic output
O.1, O.2, and O.3.
For all other predefined operating modes (Independent, Reverser, 2-Step, and 2-Speed) the predefined
control logic in the LTM R controller is designed to meet the objectives of many common motor starting
applications. This includes managing motor behavior in response to:

start and stop actions, and

fault and reset actions

Because the LTM R controller can be used in special applications, such as fire pumps that require the
motor to run despite a known external fault condition, the predefined control logic is designed so that the
control circuit, and not the predefined control logic, determines how the LTM R controller interrupts current
flow to the contactor coil.
Control Logic Action on Starts and Stops
Predefined control logic acts upon start and stop commands as follows:

For all 3-wire (impulse) control wiring diagrams, when input 4 is configured as a stop command, the
LTM R controller must detect input current at logic input I.4 in order to act on a start command.
If logic input I.4 is active and a user start action initiates current at logic inputs I.1 or I.2, the LTM R
controller detects the rising edge of the current and sets an internal (firmware) latch command that
directs the appropriate relay output to close and remain closed until the latch command is disabled.
A stop action that interrupts current at logic input I.4, causes the LTM R controller to disable the latch
command. Disabling the firmware latch causes the output to openand remain openuntil the next valid
start condition.
For all 2-wire (maintained) control wiring diagrams, the LTM R controller detects the presence of current
at logic inputs I.1 or I.2 as start commands, and the absence of current disables the start command.

Control Logic Action on Faults and Resets

Predefined control logic manages faults and reset commands as follows:

Logic output O.4 opens in response to a fault condition.

Logic output O.4 closes in response to a reset command.

Control Logic and Control Wiring Together Managing Faults

The control circuits, shown in the wiring diagrams in this chapter and in the Appendix, indicate how the
LTM R controllers control logic and the control circuit combine to stop a motor in response to a fault:

For 3-wire (impulse) control circuits, the control strategy links the state of logic output O.4 to the state
of the current at logic input I.4:
Control logic opens logic output O.4 in response to a fault.
Logic output O.4 opening interrupts current at logic input I.4, disabling the control logic latch
command on logic output O.1.
Logic output O.1 opens, due to control logic described above, and stops the flow of current to the
contactor coil.
In order to restart the motor, the fault must be reset and a new start command must be issued.
For 2-wire (maintained) control circuits, the control strategy links the state of logic output O.4 directly
with the logic inputs I.1 or I.2.
Control logic opens logic output O.4 in response to a fault.
Logic output O.4 opening interrupts current to the logic inputs I.1 or I.2
Control logic disables the start commands opening logic outputs O.1 or O.2.
In order to restart the motor, the fault must be reset and the state of Start/Stop operators determines the
state of logic inputs I.1 or I.2.

The control circuits needed to run a motor, during a motor protection fault, are not shown in the wiring
diagrams that follow. However, the control strategy is to not link the state of logic output O.4 to the state of
the input commands. In this way, fault conditions may be annunciated, while control logic continues to
manage Start and Stop commands.

146

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Overload Operating Mode

Description
Use Overload operating mode when motor load monitoring is required and motor load control (start/stop)
is performed by a mechanism other than the LTM R controller.
Functional Characteristics
The Overload operating mode includes the following features:

The LTM R controller overload operating mode does not manage logic outputs O.1, O.2, and O.3. The
logic output O.1 and O.2 commands are accessible in Network control channel.
Logic output O.4 opens in response to a diagnostic error.
NOTE: In Overload operating mode, diagnostic error is disabled by default. If needed, it can be enabled
by the user.
The LTM R controller sets a bit in a status word when it detects an active signal:
on logic inputs I.1, I.2, I.3, or I.4, or
from the Aux 1, Aux 2, or Stop buttons on the HMI keypad.

NOTE: When a bit is set in the input status word, it can be read by a PLC which can write a bit to the LTM R
controllers command word. When the LTM R controller detects a bit in its command word, it can turn on
the respective output (or outputs).
Overload Application Diagram
The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse)
terminal strip control overload application.

For additional examples of overload operating mode IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Overload
Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 377.
For examples of overload operating mode NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Overload Mode
Wiring Diagrams, page 396.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

147

Motor Control Functions

I/O Assignment
Overload operating mode provides the following logic inputs:
Logic Inputs

Assignment

I.1

Free

I.2

Free

I.3

Free

I.4

Free

I.5

Reset

I.6

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Overload operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic Outputs

Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14)

Responds to network control commands

O.2 (23 and 24)

Responds to network control commands

O.3 (33 and 34)

Warning signal

O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98)

Fault signal

Overload operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI Keys

Assignment

Aux 1

Free

Aux 2

Free

Stop

Free

Parameters
Overload operating mode requires no associated parameter settings.

148

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Independent Operating Mode

Description
Use Independent operating mode in single direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage, non-reversing motor
starting applications.
Functional Characteristics
This function includes the following features:

Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network.

The LTM R controller does not manage the relationship between logic outputs O.1 and O.2.
In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic
output O.2.
In network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output
O.1 and the Logic Output 23 Command parameter controls logic output O.2.
Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory.
Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivate (and the motor stops) when control voltage becomes too low.
Logic outputs O.1 and O.4 deactivate (and the motor stops) in response to a diagnostic error.

NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 146 for information about the interaction between

the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and

the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagram.

Independent Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse)
terminal strip control independent application.

For additional examples of independent operating mode IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams
Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 381.
For examples of independent operating mode NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Independent
Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 400.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

149

Motor Control Functions

I/O Assignment
Independent operating mode provides the following logic inputs:
Logic Inputs

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

I.1

Start/Stop motor

Start motor

I.2

Open/Close O.2

Close O.2

I.3

Free

Free

I.4

Free

Stop motor and open O.1 and O.2

I.5

Reset

Reset

I.6

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Independent operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic Outputs

Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14)

KM1 contactor control

O.2 (23 and 24)

Controlled by I.2

O.3 (33 and 34)

Warning signal

O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98)

Fault signal

Independent operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI Keys

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

Aux 1

Control motor

Start motor

Aux 2

Control O.2

Close O.2

Stop

Stop motor and open O.2 while pressed

Stop motor and open O.2

Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Independent operating mode that
shows the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration:

1
2

Normal operation
Start command ignored: stop command active

Parameters
Independent operating mode requires no associated parameters.

150

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Reverser Operating Mode

Description
Use Reverser operating mode in direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage, reversing motor starting
applications.
Functional Characteristics
This function includes the following features:

Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network.

Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of the O.1 (forward) and O.2 (reverse) logic
outputs: in case of simultaneous forward and reverse commands, only the logic output O.1 (forward) is
activated.
The LTM R controller can change direction from forward to reverse and reverse to forward in 1 of 2
modes:
Standard Transition mode: The Control Direct Transition bit is Off. This mode requires a Stop
command followed by count-down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout (anti-backspin) timer.
Direct Transition mode: The Control Direct Transition bit is On. This mode automatically transitions
after the count-down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout (anti-backspin) timer.
In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic
output O.2.
In Network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output
O.1 and the Motor Run Reverse Command controls logic output O.2.
Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory.
Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivate (and the motor stops) when control voltage becomes too low.
Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivate (and the motor stops) in response to a diagnostic error.

NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 146 for information about the interaction between

1639502EN-04 09/2014

the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and

the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagram.

151

Motor Control Functions

Reverser Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a 3-wire (impulse)
terminal strip control reverser application.

Start FW Start forward

Start RV Start reverse
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1
and O.2.

For additional examples of reverser operating mode IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Reverser
Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 383.
For examples of reverser operating mode NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Reverser Mode
Wiring Diagrams, page 402.
I/O Assignment
Reverser operating mode provides the following logic inputs:
Logic Inputs

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

I.1

Forward run

Start motor forward

I.2

Reverse run

Start motor reverse

I.3

Free

Free

I.4

Free

Stop motor

I.5

Reset

Reset

I.6

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Reverser operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

152

Logic Outputs

Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14)

KM1 contactor control Forward

O.2 (23 and 24)

KM2 contactor control Reverse

O.3 (33 and 34)

Warning signal

O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98)

Fault signal

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Reverser operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI Keys

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

Aux 1

Forward run

Start motor forward

Aux 2

Reverse run

Start motor reverse

Stop

Stop while pressed

Stop

Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Reverser operating mode that shows
the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration when the control direct transition bit is On:

1
2
3
4

Normal operation with stop command

Normal operation without stop command
Forward run command ignored: transition timer active
Forward run command ignored: stop command active

Parameters
Reverser operating mode has the following parameters:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Motor transition timeout

0999.9 s

0.1 s

Control direct transition

On/Off

Off

153

Motor Control Functions

Two-Step Operating Mode

Description
Use Two-Step operating mode in reduced voltage starting motor applications such as:

Wye-Delta
Open Transition Primary Resistor
Open Transition Autotransformer

Functional Characteristics
This function includes the following features:

Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network.

Two-Step operation settings include:
A Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout that starts when current reaches 10% of FLC min.
A Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold setting.
A Motor Transition Timeout setting that starts upon the earlier of the following events: expiration of
the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout, or current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold.
Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O.1 (step 1) and O.2 (step 2) logic outputs.
In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic outputs O.1 and O.2.
In Network or HMI control channels, the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic outputs
O.1 and O.2. The Motor Run Reverse Command parameter is ignored.
Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivate, and the motor stops, when control voltage becomes too low.
Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivate, and the motor stops, in response to a diagnostic error.

NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 146 for information about the interaction
between:

154

the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and

the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagrams.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Two-Step Wye-Delta Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control wye-delta application.

The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks
O.1 and O.2.

For additional examples of two-step Wye-Delta IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step WyeDelta Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 385.
For examples of two-step Wye-Delta NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step Wye-Delta
Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 404.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

155

Motor Control Functions

Two-Step Primary Resistor Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control primary resistance application.

For additional examples of two-step primary resistor IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step
Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 387.
For examples of two-step primary resistor NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step Primary
Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 406.

156

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Two-Step Autotransformer Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-step 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control autotransformer application.

The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks
O.1 and O.2.

For additional examples of two-step autotransformer IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step
Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 389.
For examples of two-step autotransformer NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Step
Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 408.
I/O assignment
Two-step operating mode provides the following logic inputs:
Logic Inputs

1639502EN-04 09/2014

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

I.1

Control motor

Start motor

I.2

Free

Free

I.3

Free

Free

I.4

Free

Stop motor

I.5

Reset

Reset

I.6

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Local (0) or Remote (1)

157

Motor Control Functions

Two-step operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic Outputs

Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14)

Step 1 contactor control

O.2 (23 and 24)

Step 2 contactor control

O.3 (33 and 34)

Warning signal

O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98)

Fault signal

Two-step operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI Keys

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

Aux 1

Control motor

Start motor

Aux 2

Free

Free

Stop

Stop motor while pressed

Stop motor

Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Two-Step operating mode that shows
the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration:

1
2
3
4
5

Normal operation
Step 1 start
Step 2 start
Start command ignored: Stop command active
Current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold ignored: preceded by expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2
Timeout.

Parameters
Two-step operating mode has the following parameters:
Parameter

158

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Motor step 1 to 2 timeout

0.1999.9 s

5s

Motor transition timeout

0999.9 s

100 ms

Motor step 1 to 2 threshold

20-800 % FLC in 1 % increments

150 % FLC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Two-Speed Operating Mode

Description
Use Two-Speed operating mode in two-speed motor applications for motor types such as:

Dahlander (consequent pole)

Pole Changer

Functional Characteristics
This function includes the following features:

Accessible in 3 control channels: Terminal Strip, HMI, and Network.

Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O.1 (low speed) and O.2 (high speed) logic
outputs.
2 measures of FLC:
FLC1 (Motor Full Load Current Ratio) at low speed
FLC2 (Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio) at high speed

The LTM R controller can change speed in 2 scenarios:

The Control Direct Transition bit is Off: requires a Stop command followed by expiration of the Motor
Transition Timeout.
The Control Direct Transition bit is On: automatically transitions from high speed to low speed after
a time-out of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout.

In terminal strip control channel, logic input I.1 controls logic output O.1, and logic input I.2 controls logic
output O.2.
In Network or HMI control channels, when the Motor Run Forward Command parameter is set to 1 and:
Motor Low Speed Command is set to 1, logic output O.1 is enabled.
Motor Low Speed Command is set to 0, logic output O.2 is enabled.

Logic input I.3 is not used in the control circuit, but can be configured to set a bit in memory.
Logic outputs O.1 and O.2 deactivate (and the motor stops) when control voltage becomes too low.
Logic outputs O.1, O.2 and O.4 deactivate (and the motor stops) in response to a diagnostic error.

NOTE: See Control Wiring and Fault Management, page 146 for information about the interaction
between:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

the LTM R controllers predefined control logic, and

the control wiring, an example of which appears in the following diagrams

159

Motor Control Functions

Two-Speed Dahlander Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-speed 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control Dahlander consequent pole application.

LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The LTM R controller can also
be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode,
all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size.
2 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1
and O.2.

For additional examples of two-speed Dahlander IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed
Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 391.
For examples of two-speed Dahlander NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed Mode
Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole), page 410.

160

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Two-Speed Pole-Changing Application Diagram

The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller in a two-speed 3-wire
(impulse) terminal strip control pole-changing application.

LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A pole-changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The LTM R controller can
also be placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be
the same size.
2 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O.1
and O.2.

For additional examples of pole-changing IEC diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed Pole
Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams, page 393.
For examples of pole-changing NEMA diagrams, refer to relevant diagrams Two-Speed Mode Wiring
Diagrams: Separate Winding, page 412.
I/O Assignment
Two-Speed operating mode provides the following logic inputs:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Logic Inputs

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

I.1

Low speed command

Low speed start

I.2

High speed command

High speed start

I.3

Free

Free

I.4

Free

Stop

I.5

Reset

Reset

I.6

Local (0) or Remote (1)

Local (0) or Remote (1)

161

Motor Control Functions

Two-Speed operating mode provides the following logic outputs:

Logic outputs

Assignment

O.1 (13 and 14)

Low speed control

O.2 (23 and 24)

High speed control

O.3 (33 and 34)

Warning signal

O.4 (95, 96, 97, and 98)

Fault signal

Two-speed operating mode uses the following HMI keys:

HMI Keys

2-Wire (Maintained) Assignment

3-Wire (Impulse) Assignment

Aux 1

Low speed control

Low speed start

Aux 2

High speed control

High speed start

Stop

Stop the motor

Stop the motor

Timing Sequence
The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the two-speed operating mode that shows
the inputs and outputs for a 3-wire (impulse) configuration when the Control Direct Transition bit is On:

1
2
3
4

Normal operation with stop command

Normal operation without stop command
Low-speed start command ignored: motor transition timeout active
Low-speed start command ignored: stop command active

Parameters
The following table lists the parameters associated with the Two-Speed operating mode.
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Motor transition timeout (high speed to low speed)

0999.9 s

100 ms

Control direct transition

On/Off

Off

NOTE: The low speed to high speed timer is fixed at 100 ms.

162

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Custom Operating Mode

Overview
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic
editor in the TeSys T DTM to:
customize the use of results of protection functions
change the operation of control and monitoring functions
alter the predefined LTM R controller I/O logic
Configuration Files
The configuration of the LTM R controller consists of 2 files:

a configuration file that contains parameter configuration settings

a logic file that contains a series of logic commands that manage LTM R controller behavior, including:
motor start and stop commands
motor transitions between steps, speeds and directions
the valid control source and transitions between control sources
fault and warning logic for relay outputs 1 and 2, and the HMI
terminal strip reset functions
PLC and HMI communication loss and fallback
load shed
rapid cycle
starting and stopping LTM R controller diagnostics

When a predefined operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller applies a predefined logic file that
permanently resides in the LTM R controller.
When custom operating mode is selected, the LTM R controller uses a customized logic file created in the
custom logic editor and downloaded to the LTM R controller from the TeSys T DTM.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

163

Motor Control Functions

Section 4.3
Fault Management and Clear Commands

Fault Management and Clear Commands

Overview
This section describes how the LTM R controller manages the fault handling process, and explains:

how to select a fault reset mode, and

controller behavior for each fault reset mode selection.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic

164

Page

Fault Management - Introduction

165

Manual Reset

167

Automatic Reset

169

Remote Reset

172

Fault and Warning Codes

174

LTM R Controller Clear Commands

176

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Fault Management - Introduction

Overview
When the LTM R controller detects a fault condition and activates the appropriate response, the fault
becomes latched. Once a fault becomes latched, it remains latched, even if the underlying fault condition
is eliminated, until cleared by a reset command.
The setting of the Fault Reset Mode parameter determines how the LTM R controller manages faults. The
fault reset mode selections, listed below, are described in the topics that follow:

Manual (see page 167) (Factory setting)

Automatic (see page 169)
Remote (see page 172)

The fault reset mode cannot be changed while a fault remains active. All faults must be reset before the
fault reset mode can be changed.
Fault Reset Methods
A Reset command can be issued using any of the following means:

cycling power
reset button on the LTM R controller
reset button on the HMI keypad
reset command from the HMI engineering tool
logic input I.5
a network command
automatic reset

WARNING
RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION
When the LTM R controller is operating in 2-wire control with an active Run command, a Reset command
will immediately restart the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Fault Specific Reset Behaviors
The LTM R controllers response to faults depends on the nature of the fault that has occurred and how
the related protection function is configured. For example:

Thermal faults can be reset after the Fault Reset Timeout counts down and the utilized thermal capacity
falls below the Fault Reset Threshold level.
If the fault includes a reset timeout setting, the timeout must fully count down before a reset command
executes.
Internal device faults can be reset only by cycling power.
LTM R controller memory does not retain diagnostic and wiring faults after a power loss, but does retain
all other faults after a power loss.
Internal, diagnostic, and wiring faults cannot be automatically reset.
All wiring and diagnostic faults can be manually reset by local reset methods.
For diagnostic faults, network reset commands are valid only in remote (network) control channel.
For wiring faults, network reset commands are not valid in any control channel.

Fault Characteristics
The LTM R controller fault monitoring functions save the status of communications monitoring and motor
protection faults on a power loss so that these faults must be acknowledged and reset as part of an overall
motor maintenance strategy.
Protection Category

Monitored Fault

LTM R Controller

LTM R with LTM E

Saved On Power Loss

Diagnostic

Run Command Check

Stop Command Check

Run Check Back

Stop Check Back

X. Monitored
. Not monitored

1639502EN-04 09/2014

165

Motor Control Functions

Protection Category

Monitored Fault

LTM R Controller

LTM R with LTM E

Saved On Power Loss

Wiring / configuration
errors

PTC connection

Internal

Motor temp sensor

Thermal overload
Current

Voltage

Power

Communication loss

CT Reversal

Voltage Phase Reversal

Current Phase Reversal

Voltage Phase Loss

Phase Configuration

Stack Overflow

Watchdog

ROM Checksum

EEROM

CPU

Internal Temperature

PTC Binary

PT100

PTC Analog

NTC Analog

Definite

Inverse Thermal

Long Start

Jam

Current Phase Imbalance

Current Phase Loss

Overcurrent

Undercurrent

Internal Ground Current

External Ground Current

Overvoltage

Undervoltage

Voltage Phase Imbalance

Underpower

Overpower

Under Power Factor

Over Power Factor

PLC to LTM R

HMI to LTM R

X. Monitored
. Not monitored

166

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Manual Reset
Introduction
When the Fault Reset Mode parameter is set to Manual, the LTM R controller allows resetsusually
performed by a personvia a power cycle of the control power or by using a local reset means, including:

Terminal Strip (logic input I.5)

Reset button on the LTM R controller
Reset commands from the HMI

A manual reset provides on-site personnel the opportunity to inspect the equipment and wiring before
performing the reset.
NOTE: A manual reset blocks all reset commands from the LTM R controllers network porteven when
the Control Channel is set to Network.
Manual Reset Methods
The LTM R controller provides the following manual reset methods:
Protection Category

Diagnostic

Wiring / configuration errors

Internal

Motor temp sensor

Thermal overload
Current

Monitored Fault

Control Channel
Terminal Strip

HMI

Network(1)

Run Command Check

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Stop Command Check

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Run Check Back

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Stop Check Back

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

PTC connection

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

CT Reversal

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Voltage Phase Reversal

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Current Phase Reversal

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Voltage Phase Loss

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Phase Configuration

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Stack Overflow

PC

PC

PC

Watchdog

PC

PC

PC

ROM Checksum

PC

PC

PC

EEROM

PC

PC

PC

CPU

PC

PC

PC

Internal Temperature

PC

PC

PC

PTC Binary

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

PT100

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

PTC Analog

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

NTC Analog

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Definite

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Inverse Thermal

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Long Start

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Jam

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Current Phase Imbalance

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Current Phase Loss

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Undercurrent

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Overcurrent

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

External Ground Current

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Internal Ground Current

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI

PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller
I.5 Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller
(1) Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control
channel.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

167

Motor Control Functions

Protection Category

Voltage

Power

Communication loss

Monitored Fault

Undervoltage

Control Channel
Terminal Strip

HMI

Network(1)

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Overvoltage

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Voltage Phase Imbalance

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Underpower

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Overpower

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Under Power Factor

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

Over Power Factor

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

PLC to LTM R

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

LTM E to LTM R

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or an HMI

PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller
I.5 Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller
(1) Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control
channel.

168

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Automatic Reset
Introduction
Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Automatic lets you:

configure the LTM R controller to attempt to reset motor protection and communications faults without
the intervention of either a human operator or the remote PLC, for example:
for a non-networked LTM R controller installed at a location that is physically remote, or locally hard
to access

configure fault handling for each protection fault group in a manner that is appropriate to the faults in
that group:
set a different timeout delay
permit a different number of reset attempts
disable automatic fault resetting

The Fault Reset Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods.
Each protection fault is included in 1 of 3 auto-reset fault groups, based on the characteristics of that fault,
as described below. Each fault group has 2 configurable parameters:

a timeout: the Auto-Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Timeout parameter, and

a maximum number of permissible fault resets: the Auto-Reset Attempts Group (number 1, 2, or 3)
Setting parameter

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
An auto-reset command may restart the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2-wire control circuit.
Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Reset Behavior
After power is cycled, the LTM R controller clears and sets to 0 the values of the following parameters:

Auto-Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Timeout and

Auto Reset Group (number 1, 2, or 3) Setting.

On a successful reset, the Number of Resets count is cleared and set to 0. A reset is successful if, after
reset, the motor runs for 1 minute without a fault of a type in the designated group.
If the maximum number of automatic resets has been reached and if the last reset has failed, the reset
mode turns to Manual. When the motor restarts, the automatic mode parameters are set to 0.
Emergency Restart
Use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, in applications where it is necessary, to clear the
Thermal Capacity Level parameter following a Thermal Overload inverse thermal fault. This command
permits an emergency restart before the motor has actually cooled.

WARNING
LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION
Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and
fire. Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection must be limited to applications where
immediate restart is vital.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Number of Resets
Each protection group can be set to manual, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Select "0" to disable automatic reset of protection fault groupsand require a manual reseteven though
the Fault Reset Mode parameter is configured for automatic reset.
Select "5" to enable unlimited auto-reset attempts. After the time delay has expired the LTM R controller
continually attempts to reset every fault in that reset group.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

169

Motor Control Functions

Auto-Reset Group 1 (AU-G1)

Group 1 faults require a predefined cooling time after the monitored parameter returns to and falls below
a predefined threshold. Group 1 faults include Thermal Overload and Motor Temp Sensor faults. The
cooling time delay is non-configurable. However, you can:

add to the cooling time delay by setting the Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to a value greater
than 0, or
disable auto-reset by setting the Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to 0

Auto-reset group 1 has the following configurable parameters:

Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting

0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited number of

reset attempts

Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout

0...65,535 s

480 s

Auto-Reset Group 2 (AU-G2)

Group 2 faults generally do not include a predefined cooling time delay before a reset can be executed,
but can be reset as soon as the fault condition clears. Many group 2 faults can result in some motor
overheating, depending upon the severity and duration of the fault condition, which in turn depends upon
the protection function configuration.
You can add a cooling time delay, if appropriate, by setting the Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout parameter to
a value greater than 0. You may also want to limit the number of reset attempts to prevent premature wear
or failure of the equipment.
Auto-reset group 2 has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting

0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited number of

reset attempts

Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout

0...65,535 s

1,200 s

Auto-Reset Group 3 (AU-G3)

Group 3 faults often apply to equipment monitoring and generally do not require a motor cooling period.
These faults can be used to detect equipment conditionsfor example, an undercurrent fault that detects
the loss of a belt, or an overpower fault that detects an increased loading condition in a mixer. You may
want to configure group 3 faults in a way that differs significantly from groups 1 or 2, for example by setting
the number of resets to 0, thereby requiring a manual reset after the equipment failure has been discovered
and corrected.
Auto-reset group 3 has the following configurable parameters:
Parameters

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting

0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited number of

reset attempts

Auto-Reset Group 3 Timeout

0...65,535 s

60 s

Auto-Reset Methods
The LTM R controller allows the following auto-reset methods:
RB - Test / Reset button on the LTM R or the HMI
PC - Power cycle on the LTM R controller
I.5 - Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R
NC - Network command
Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group (where AU-GX = AU-G1, AU-G2,
or AU-G3)
The table below lists the possible auto-reset methods for each monitored fault:

170

Protection Category

Monitored Fault

Control Channel
Terminal Strip

HMI

Network

Diagnostic

Run Command Check

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Stop Command Check

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Run Check Back

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Stop Check Back

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5, NC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Protection Category

Monitored Fault

Terminal Strip

HMI

Network

Wiring / configuration
errors

PTC connection

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

CT Reversal

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Internal

Motor temp sensor

Thermal overload
Current

Voltage

Power

Communication Loss

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Control Channel

Voltage Phase Reversal

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Current Phase Reversal

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Voltage Phase Loss

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

Phase Configuration

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Stack Overflow

PC

PC

PC

Watchdog

PC

PC

PC

ROM Checksum

PC

PC

PC

EEROM

PC

PC

PC

CPU

PC

PC

PC

Internal Temperature

PC

PC

PC

PTC Binary

AU-G1

AU-G1

AU-G1

PT100

AU-G1

AU-G1

AU-G1

PTC Analog

AU-G1

AU-G1

AU-G1

NTC Analog

AU-G1

AU-G1

AU-G1

Definite

AU-G1

AU-G1

AU-G1

Inverse Thermal

AU-G1

AU-G1

AU-G1
RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Long Start

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

Jam

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Current Phase
Imbalance

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Current Phase Loss

RB, I.5

RB, I.5

RB, I.5, NC

Undercurrent

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3

Overcurrent

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3

External Ground Current

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Internal Ground Current

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Undervoltage

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Overvoltage

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Voltage Phase
Imbalance

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Underpower

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3

Overpower

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3

Under Power Factor

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

Over Power Factor

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, AU-G2

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G2

PLC to LTM R

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3

LTM E to LTM R

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, AU-G3

RB, I.5, NC, AU-G3

171

Motor Control Functions

Remote Reset
Introduction
Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Remote adds resetting faults from the PLC over the LTM R
network port. This provides centralized monitoring and control of equipment installations. The Control
channel parameter selection determines the available reset methods.
Both manual reset methods and remote reset methods reset a fault.
Remote Reset Methods
The LTM R controller provides the following remote reset methods:
Protection
Category

Monitored Fault

Terminal Strip

HMI

Network

Diagnostic

Run Command Check

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Stop Command Check

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Run Check Back

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Stop Check Back

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Wiring /
configuration
errors

Internal

Motor temp
sensor

Thermal
overload
Current

Voltage

Power

RB
PC
I.5
NC

172

Control Channel

PTC connection

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

CT Reversal

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Voltage Phase Reversal

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Current Phase Reversal

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Voltage Phase Loss

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Phase Configuration

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

RB, PC, I.5, NC

Stack Overflow

PC

PC

PC

Watchdog

PC

PC

PC

ROM Checksum

PC

PC

PC

EEROM

PC

PC

PC

CPU

PC

PC

PC

Internal Temperature

PC

PC

PC

PTC Binary

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

PT100

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

PTC Analog

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

NTC Analog

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Definite

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Inverse Thermal

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Long Start

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Jam

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Current Phase Imbalance

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Current Phase Loss

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Undercurrent

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Overcurrent

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

External Ground Current

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Internal Ground Current

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC
RB, I.5, NC

Undervoltage

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Overvoltage

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Voltage Phase Imbalance

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Underpower

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Overpower

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Under Power Factor

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Over Power Factor

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI

Power cycle on the LTM R controller
Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller
Network command

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Protection
Category

Monitored Fault

Control Channel
Terminal Strip

HMI

Network

Communication
Loss

PLC to LTM R

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

LTM E to LTM R

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB, I.5, NC

RB
PC
I.5
NC

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Test/Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the HMI

Power cycle on the LTM R controller
Set I.5 logic input on the LTM R controller
Network command

173

Motor Control Functions

Fault and Warning Codes

Fault Codes
Each detected fault is identified by a numerical fault code.
Fault code

174

Description

No error

Ground current

Thermal overload

Long start

Jam

Current phase imbalance

Undercurrent

10

Test

11

HMI port error

12

HMI port communication loss

13

Network port internal error

16

External fault

18

On-Off diagnostic

19

Wiring diagnostic

20

Overcurrent

21

Current phase loss

22

Current phase reversal

23

Motor temp sensor

24

Voltage phase imbalance

25

Voltage phase loss

26

Voltage phase reversal

27

Undervoltage

28

Overvoltage

29

Underpower

30

Overpower

31

Under power factor

32

Over power factor

33

LTME configuration

34

Temperature sensor short-circuit

35

Temperature sensor open-circuit

36

CT reversal

37

Out of boundary CT ratio

46

Start check

47

Run checkback

48

Stop check

49

Stop checkback

51

Controller internal temperature error

55

Controller internal error (Stack overflow)

56

Controller internal error (RAM error)

57

Controller internal error (RAM checksum error)

58

Controller internal error (Hardware watchdog fault)

60

L2 current detected in single-phase mode

64

Non volatile memory error

65

Expansion module communication error

66

Stuck reset button

67

Logic function error

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Fault code

Description

100-104

Network port internal error

109

Network port comm error

111

Faulty device replacement fault

555

Network port configuration error

Warning Codes
Each detected warning is identified by a numerical warning code.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Warning code

Description

No warning

Ground current

Thermal overload

Long start

Jam

Current phase imbalance

Undercurrent

10

HMI port

11

LTM R internal temperature

18

Diagnostic

19

Wiring

20

Overcurrent

21

Current phase loss

23

Motor temp sensor

24

Voltage phase imbalance

25

Voltage phase loss

27

Undervoltage

28

Overvoltage

29

Underpower

30

Overpower

31

Under power factor

32

Over power factor

33

LTM E configuration

46

Start check

47

Run checkback

48

Stop check

49

Stop checkback

109

Network port comm loss

555

Network port configuration

175

Motor Control Functions

LTM R Controller Clear Commands

Overview
Clear commands allow the user to clear specific categories of LTM R controller parameters:
Clear all parameters
Clear the statistics
Clear the thermal capacity level
Clear the controller settings
Clear the network port settings
The Clear commands can be executed from:
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
an HMI device
a PLC via the network port

Clear All Command

If you want to change the configuration of the LTM R controller, you may want to clear all existing
parameters in order to set new parameters for the controller.
The Clear All Command forces the controller to enter configuration mode. A power-cycle is performed to
restart correctly in this mode. This enables the controller to pick up the new values for the cleared
parameters.
When you clear all parameters, static characteristics are also lost. Only the following parameters are not
cleared after a Clear All Command:

Motor LO1 Closings Count

Motor LO2 Closings Count
Controller Internal Temperature Max

Clear Statistics Command

Statistics parameters are cleared without the LTM R controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
characteristics are preserved.
The following parameters are not cleared after a Clear Statistics Command:

Motor LO1 Closings Count

Motor LO2 Closings Count
Controller Internal Temperature Max

Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command

The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command clears the following parameters:
Thermal Capacity Level
Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout
Thermal memory parameters are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
characteristics are preserved.
NOTE: This bit is writable at any time, even when the motor is running.
For more information about the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command, see Reset for Emergency
Restart, page 66.
Clear Controller Settings Command
The Clear Controller Settings Command restores the LTM R controller protection factory settings (timeouts
and thresholds).
The following settings are not cleared by this command:

Controller characteristics
Connections (CT, temperature sensor, and I/O settings)
Operating mode

Controller setting parameters are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
characteristics are preserved.

176

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Motor Control Functions

Clear Network Port Settings Command

The Clear Network Port Settings Command restores the LTM R controller network port factory settings
(address, and so on).
Network port settings are cleared without the controller being forced into configuration mode. Static
characteristics are preserved. Only the network communication becomes ineffective.
After the IP addressing parameters are cleared, power must be cycled to the LTM R controller for it .

1639502EN-04 09/2014

177

Motor Control Functions

178

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Installation
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 5
Installation

Installation

Overview
This chapter describes the physical installation and assembly of the LTM R controller and the LTM E
expansion module. It also explains how to connect and wire the controller terminal block, including
communication port wiring in both an enclosure or a switchboard.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it.
Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION

The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems.
Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program and apply this product.
Follow all local and national safety codes and standards.
Follow all electromagnetic compatibility rules described in this manual.
Follow all installation and wiring rules described in this manual.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Topic

Page

5.1

Installation

180

5.2

Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network

216

179

Installation

Section 5.1
Installation

Installation

Overview
This section describes the installation procedures and wiring principles of the LTM R controller and the
LTM E expansion module.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

180

Page

General Principles

181

Dimensions

182

Assembly

184

Mounting

187

Wiring - Generalities

192

Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs)

196

Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers

201

Wiring - Temperature Sensors

203

Wiring - Power Supply

204

Wiring - Logic Inputs

207

Wiring - Logic Outputs

210

Connecting to an HMI Device

212

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

General Principles
Functional Safety Introduction
The TeSys T motor management system is a part of a global architecture. To provide the functional safety,
some risks must be analyzed such as:
global functional risks,
risk of hardware and software breakdown,
electromagnetic environmental risks.
To reduce the electromagnetic environment risks, installation rules and wiring must be respected.
For more information on EMC, refer to the Electrical Installation Guide chapter ElectroMagnetic
Compatibility (Wiki version available in English only on www.electrical-installation.org).
Installation Rules
Installation rules that must be respected to enable the LTM R to operate correctly include:
installation rules for the components:
association of the LTM R controller with the LTM E expansion module
installation in a switchboard such as Okken, Blokset, or another type

LTM R controller wiring rules (see page 192):

wiring of the power supply
wiring of the I/Os: logic input wiring and logic output wiring

communication network wiring rules (see page 216)

Installation Rules in a Switchboard

The installation of the LTM R controller in the withdrawable drawer of a switchboard presents constraints
specific to the type of switchboard:
For installation of the LTM R controller in an Okken switchboard, see the Okken Communications
Cabling & Wiring Guide (available on request).
For installation of the LTM R controller in a Blokset switchboard, see the Blokset Communications
Cabling & Wiring Guide (available on request).
For installation of the LTM R controller in other types of switchboard, follow the specific EMC
instructions described in this manual and refer to the relative instructions specific to your type of
switchboard.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

181

Installation

Dimensions
Overview
This section presents the dimensions of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module, as well
as the dimensions of the clearance zone around the controller and the expansion module. Dimensions are
given in both millimeters and inches and apply to all LTM R and LTM E models.
LTM R Controller Dimensions

NOTE: The height of the controller may increase when using alternate wiring terminals.
LTM E Expansion Module Dimensions

182

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Clearance Zone Dimensions

The maximum rated ambient temperature of the controller depends on the clearance zone dimensions.
They are shown in the table below.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

183

Installation

Assembly
Overview
This section describes how to assemble the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module in a
switchboard.
Connecting the LTM R Controller and the LTM E Expansion Module
It is recommended to mount the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module side by side with the
LTM E expansion module on the left side of the LTM R controller and connected by the LTMCC004
connecting jumper (1).

If it is not possible to mount the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module side by side:
Use only the shielded cables LTM9CEXP03 (2) or LTM9CEXP10 (3) cables to connect them.
Ground the shielded cable.
Separate the LTM9CEXP connection cables from all other power or control cables to avoid EMC
disturbance.

184

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Mounting a Contactor Close to the LTM R Controller

The mounting recommendations of contactors close to LTM R controller are as follows:
Mount a contactor at a distance of more than 10 cm (3.94 in.) from the LTM R controller and the LTM E
expansion module.
If this is not possible, mount the contactor on the right side of the LTM R controller.
The contactor must be mounted according to the clearance zone dimensions:

Do not mount a contactor in this zone.

Mount a contactor in this zone if you cannot do otherwise.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

185

Installation

Example of Mounting in a Withdrawable Drawer of a Switchboard

A1, A2 LTM R controller power supply

B1, B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs

186

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Mounting
Overview
This section describes how to mount the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module on a DIN rail,
a solid mounting plate, or a pre-slotted mounting plate (known as a TE plate), such as a Telequick plate.
It also describes the accessories needed for mounting, as well as how to remove each component.
Reminder: The LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module must be mounted side by side, with the
LTM E expansion module on the left side of the LTM R controller, connected by the LTMCC004 connecting
jumper (see page 184).
Mounting on DIN Rails
You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a 35 mm (1.38 in.) DIN rail with a thickness of
1.35 mm (0.05 in.) and 0.75 mm (0.02 in.). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may not extend
beyond the controller dimensions (see page 182). To mount the controller:
Step

Action

On the back of the controller are two DIN rail clips. Fit the top clip onto the DIN rail.

Push the controller in toward the DIN rail until the bottom clip catches. The controller clicks into place.

Click!

Removing from DIN Rails

To remove the controller from the DIN rail:
Step

Action

Using a screwdriver, pull down the white locking mechanism to release the controller.

Lift the controller away from the DIN rail.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

187

Installation

Mounting on a Solid Mounting Plate

You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a metal mounting plate using ST2.9 steel
tapping screws: 4 for the controller and 2 for the expansion module. The thickness of the mounting plate
must not exceed 7 mm (0.275 in.). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the
controller dimensions (see page 182) by 8 mm (0.3 in.) in both directions. To mount the controller and the
expansion module on a mounting plate:

188

Step

Action

Locate the 4 mounting holes at each corner of the controller and the 2 mounting holes on the expansion
module.

Position the controller and expansion module on the mounting plate, making sure to leave enough space
for the clearance zone. See Dimensions, page 182.

Insert each of the 6 tapping screws.

Use a screwdriver to tighten each screw and secure the controller and the expansion module in place.
Torque to 1 Nm (8.8 lb-in).

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Mounting on a TE Plate
You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a TE plate, such as Telequick, using
6 mounting clips (AF1 EA4). When mounted, the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller
dimensions (see page 182) by 8 mm (0.3 in.) in both directions. To mount the controller on Telequick:
Step

Action

Attach the 6 mounting clips to Telequick, as shown in the diagram below. The rounded edge should face
upwards for the top clips, and downwards for the bottom clips.

Position the controller and expansion module on the clips so that the holes in the clips and the holes in
the controller and expansion module align. Insert the screws in the holes and turn them slightly.

When the controller and expansion module are properly positioned, tighten first the bottom screws, then
the top screws using a screwdriver. Torque to 1 Nm (8.8 lb-in).

Operating Position
You can mount the controller and the expansion module at an angle of up to 90 degrees perpendicular to
the normal vertical mounting plane.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

189

Installation

Replacing the Terminal Strips

The standard terminal strips of the controller and expansion module can be replaced with alternative
terminal strips, if required. With alternative terminal strips, wires are connected perpendicularly to the
controller or expansion module face.
To replace the standard strips with alternative strips:
Step

Action

Remove the 6 standard terminal strips using the connector extraction tool LTM9TCT to leverage the
strips away from the unit.

Push the alternative strips into place, making sure you position them correctly.

NOTE: There are two 4-pin terminal strips. These strips are not interchangeable. It is important, therefore,
that you read the markings on the terminal strips and follow the diagram below when positioning them.

190

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

1639502EN-04 09/2014

191

Installation

Wiring - Generalities
Overview
The wiring of each part of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module is detailed further with
its specificities:
Wiring the current transformers (see page 196).
Wiring the ground fault current transformers (see page 201).
Wiring the temperature sensors (see page 203).
Wiring the power supply (see page 204).
Wiring the logic inputs (see page 207).
Wiring the logic outputs (see page 210).
Wiring the voltage transformers on the LTM E expansion module.
The wiring of the communication port depends on the communication protocol and is described separately
(see page 216).
Wiring Rules
The following wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance due to EMC on the behavior
of the LTM R controller:
Keep a distance as large as possible between the communication cable and the power and/or control
cables (minimum 30 cm or 11.8 in.).
Cross over different types of cables at right angles, if necessary.
Do not bend or damage the cables. The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter.
Avoid sharp angles of paths or passage of the cable.
Use shielded cables to connect ground fault current transformers:
The cable shield must be connected to a protective ground at both ends.
The connection of the cable shield to the protective ground must be as short as possible.
Connect together all the shields, if necessary.
Perform the grounding of the shield with a collar.

Add filters on contactor coils for all contactors and relays.

Place the cable along the grounded plate around the withdrawable drawer.

For more information, refer to the Electrical Installation Guide (available in English only), chapter
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC).

192

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Wiring Diagram Example: LTM R Controls a 3-phase Motor

The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module used to
control a 3-phase motor in 3-wire (impulse) independent mode:

A1, A2 LTM R controller power supply

B1, B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs

1639502EN-04 09/2014

193

Installation

Wiring Diagram Example: LTM R Controls a Single-phase Motor

The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and its LTM E expansion module used to
control a single-phase motor in 3-wire (impulse) independent mode:

A1, A2 LTM R controller power supply

B1, B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs

LTM R Controller Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

The LTM R controller has the following plug-in terminals and pin assignments:
Terminal Block

Pin

Description

Control voltage, logic input, and

common source terminals

A1

Supply voltage input (+ / )

A2

The negative of a power supply for DC models, or the grounded

secondary of a control power transformer for AC models ( / )

I.1

Logic input 1

I.2

Logic input 2

I.3

Logic input 3

I.4

Logic input 4

I.5

Logic input 5

I.6

Logic input 6

Input common

9798

NO contact

9596

NC contact

O.4 Logic output terminals

Note: The 9798 contacts and the 9596 contacts are on the same relay, so the
open/closed status of one pair of contacts is always the opposite of the status of
the other pair.

194

O.1 to O.3 Logic output terminals 1314

NO contact logic output 1

2324

NO contact logic output 2

3334

NO contact logic output 3

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Terminal Block

Pin

Description

Ground fault input and

temperature sensor input, and
PLC terminals

Z1Z2

Connection for external ground fault current transformer

T1T2

Connection for embedded motor temperature sensing elements

PROFIBUS DP shield or FE pin

Receive/transmit data-N pin; A-line

Receive/transmit data-P pin; B-line

DGND

Data ground pin

VP

Power supply pin)

LTM E Expansion Module Plug-in Terminals and Pin Assignments

The LTM E expansion module has the following plug-in terminals and pin assignments:
Terminal block

Pin

Description

Voltage inputs

LV1

Phase 1 input voltage

LV2

Phase 2 input voltage

LV3

Phase 3 input voltage

I.7

Logic input 7

C7

Common for I.7

Logic inputs and common terminals

I.8

Logic input I.8

C8

Common for I.8

I.9

Logic input I.9

C9

Common for I.9

I.10

Logic input I.10

C10

Common for I.10

Terminal Wiring Characteristics

Both the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module terminals have the same characteristics.
Terminals have an insulation rating of 320 VAC.
The table below describes the characteristics of cables that may be used to wire the terminals:
Cable Type

No. of Conductors

Conductor Section
mm

AWG

Flexible (stranded) cable

Single conductor

0.2...2.5

24...14

2 conductors

0.2...1.5

24...16

Solid cable

Single conductor

0.2...2.5

24...14

2 conductors

0.2...1.0

24...18

Flexible (stranded) cable with insulated cable ends

Single conductor

0.25...2.5

24...14

2 conductors

0.5...1.5

20...16

Flexible (stranded) cable with non-insulated cable ends

Single conductor

0.25...2.5

24...14

2 conductors

0.2...1.0

24...18

The table below describes the characteristics of the terminals:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Pitch

5.08 mm

0.2 in.

Tightening torque

0.5 to 0.6 Nm

5 lb-in

Flat screwdriver

3 mm

0.10 in.

195

Installation

Wiring - Current Transformers (CTs)

Overview
The LTM R controller has 3 CT windows through which you can route motor leads to contactor load
connections.
The CT windows enable you to wire the controller in 4 different ways, depending on the voltage and
controller model used:

internal CT wiring through the windows

internal CT wiring using multiple passes
internal CT wiring using the lug kit (ref. Class 9999 MLPL)
external Load CT wiring

This section describes each of these options.

Internal CT Wiring Through the Windows
The following diagrams show typical wiring using the CT windows for either 3-phase or single-phase
motors:

196

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Internal CT Wiring Using Multiple Passes

The controller can physically support up to a maximum of 5 passes of 2.5 mm (14 AWG) wire through the
CT windows. There are 3 looping windows located under the CT windows that physically support up to a
maximum of 4 wire loops.
Set the parameter Load CT Multiple Passes to account for the number of times the motor wires pass
through the CT window in order to display the correct current readings. For more information, refer to Load
Current Transformer settings (see page 362).
The following diagram shows typical wiring using 2 passes (1 wire loop):

Multiply the current by the number of times that the motor wires pass through the CT windows to determine
the amount of current passing through the internal current sensors.
Adding multiple passes allows to:
increase the current sensed by the internal current sensors to a level that the controller can properly
detect, or
provide a more accurate reading by the internal current sensors.
We recommend that you select a controller with an FLC value range that includes the motor FLC. However,
if the motor FLC is less than the FLC range of the controller, multiple passes can increase the current level
sensed by the internal current sensors to one that the controller can detect.
For example, if using a controller with an FLC range of 5 to 100 A, and the motor FLC is 3 A, the controller
cannot properly sense the current. In this case, if you pass the power wiring through the internal current
sensors of the controller 2 times, the internal current sensors of the controller sense 6 A (2 passes x 3 A),
a current level that falls within the FLC range of the controller.
For more information about controller types, see LTM R Controller, page 15.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

197

Installation

Internal CT Wiring Using a Lug-Lug Kit

The controller accepts the Class 9999 Type MLPL lug-lug kit.
The following diagram shows typical wiring using the lug-lug kit:

NOTE: The lug-lug kit is IP0.

For more information on the lug-lug kit, refer to instruction bulletin 30072-013-101
supplied with the kit, or
available from http://products.schneider-electric.us/support/technical-library (under Technical Library).

198

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

External Load CT Wiring

The controller can accept 5 A and 1 A secondary signals from external current transformers. The
recommended controller model for these currents is the 0.4-8 A model. Use multiple passes through the
controller CT windows, if required.
External CTs are specified with a transformation ratio. The ratio of the external CT is the ratio of the motor
input current to the CT output current.
To enable the controller to adjust the FLC range and display the actual line current, set the following
parameters:
Load CT Primary (the first number of the CT ratio)
Load CT Secondary (the second number of the CT ratio)
Load CT Multiple Passes (the number of times the CT output wires pass through the controllers internal
CT windows)
For more information, refer to Load Current Transformer settings (see page 362).
The following diagram shows wiring using external CTs:

For a description of external CT characteristics, see Load Current Transformers, page 17.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

199

Installation

CT Wiring in Presence of Variable Speed Drive

When the motor is controlled by a variable speed drive (VSD):
The current transformers (external or internal) must be mounted upstream of the variable speed drive,
and not between the variable speed drive and the motor. The CTs cannot be used between the drive
outputs and the motor because the drive can output fundamental frequencies outside the 47-63 Hz
range.
Chokes must be mounted on the 3 phases, between the current transformers (external or internal) and
the variable speed drive, to minimize the soft start harmonics current and the voltage disturbances
generated by the variable speed drive.

200

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Wiring - Ground Fault Current Transformers

Ground Fault Current Transformer Installation
The following diagram shows a typical LTM R controller installation using a ground fault current
transformer (GFCT):

GFCTs are specified with a transformation ratio. The ratio of the GFCT is the ratio of the ground fault
current sensed to the current which it outputs.
To enable the controller to correctly measure the actual ground fault current flowing in the circuit, set the
following parameters:
Ground CT Primary (the first number of the GFCT ratio)
Ground CT Secondary (the second number of the GFCT ratio)
For a description of GFCT characteristics, see Ground Fault Current Transformers, page 17.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

201

Installation

Ground Fault Current Transformer Wiring

The external ground fault current transformer (GFCT) must be connected to the LTM R controller terminals
Z1 and Z2 using a shielded twisted pair cable. The shield must be connected to the earth at both ends by
the shortest possible connections.

202

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Wiring - Temperature Sensors

Temperature Sensors
The LTM R controller has 2 terminals dedicated to motor temperature sensing protection: T1 and T2.
These terminals return the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors (RTDs).
One of the following types of motor temperature sensor can be used:

PTC Binary
PT100
PTC Analog
NTC Analog

See Metering and Monitoring Functions, page 27 and Motor Protection Functions, page 59 for more
information on temperature sensors.
Temperature Sensor Wiring
The following table shows the maximum wire lengths for temperature sensor elements:
mm (AWG)

0.5 (20)

0.75 (18)

1.5 (16)

2.5 (14)

m (ft)

220 (656)

300 (985)

400 (1312)

600 (1970)

Use unshielded twisted pair cable to connect the controller to the temperature sensor.
For the controller to accurately measure the resistance of the temperature-sensing element, you must
measure the resistance of the twisted-pair and add it to the desired resistance for protection. This
compensates for the lead resistance.
The following diagram shows the wiring of the LTM R controller and the temperature sensor of a singlephase motor:

For more information about wiring, see Wiring - Generalities, page 192.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

203

Installation

Wiring - Power Supply

Overview
The LTM R controller supply voltage can be:
24 VDC, or
100240 VAC
The following table presents LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module association rules:
LTMRBD (VDC)

LTMRFM (VAC)

LTMEBD (VDC)

LTMEFM (VAC)

Association allowed

Association not allowed

DC Power Supply
A dedicated 24 VDC power supply is necessary to supply:
one or several LTM R controllers including the logic inputs of the LTM R controller(s)
the logic inputs of the LTM E expansion module(s)

An additional specific 24 VDC power supply is necessary to supply:

the LTM R controller logic outputs
other devices

The LTM R controller DC power supply must have the following characteristics:
AC/DC converter
galvanic isolation input AC / output DC: 4 kVAC minimum at 50 Hz
input voltage: 240 VAC (+15% / -20%)
output voltage: 24 VDC (+/-10%)

The following Schneider Electric ABL8RPS24 power supplies are recommended:

204

Reference Number

Input Voltage

Output Voltage/Current

Maximum Number of LTM R

Controllers Supplied

ABL8RPS24100

200500 VAC

24 VDC / 10 A

24

ABL8RPS24050

200500 VAC

24 VDC / 5 A

12

ABL8RPS24030

200500 VAC

24 VDC / 3 A

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

AC Power Supply
A dedicated AC/AC power supply or UPS is necessary to supply:
one or several LTM R controllers including the logic inputs of the LTM R controller(s)
the logic inputs of the LTM E expansion module(s)
An additional specific AC or DC power supply is necessary to supply:
the LTM R controller logic outputs
other devices
The LTM R controller AC power supply or UPS must have the following characteristics:
isolation transformer
output voltage: 115 or 230 VAC (+15% / -20%)
115 VAC output voltage is recommended
with 230 VAC output voltage, an additional LTM9F external filter may be necessary (see page 205)

power according to the number of LTM R controllers (several AC supplies are recommended)

AC Power Supply With LTM9F External Filter

The LTM9F external filter is a power filter dedicated to the LTM R controller with AC supply voltage.
Use an LTM9F external filter when the power supply output voltage exceeds 150 VAC and presents risks
of voltage peaks over 300 VAC. This rule applies even when an UPS is used as AC power supply. This is
due to the different types of UPS available and their operating modes.
If an LTM9F is required on one LTM R controller with AC supply voltage, an LTM9F must be used on each
LTM R controller with AC supply voltage on the system.
The LTM9F external filter must not be used when the power supply output voltage is lower than 150 VAC.
When LTM9F external filter is used with an UPS, the filter is wired after the UPS as shown below:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

205

Installation

Power Supply Daisy Chaining

When the same power supply (AC or DC) is used to supply several LTM R controllers, it is recommended
to close the loop:
to avoid power off,
to reduce voltage drop due to long cables.

206

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Wiring - Logic Inputs

Overview
10 logic inputs maximum are provided:
6 logic inputs on the LTM R controller, internally powered by the LTM R
4 logic inputs on the LTM E expansion module, independently powered

Logic Inputs of the LTM R Controller

The controller LTM R has 6 logic inputs:
available via field wiring terminals I.1- I.6
internally powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller (the input voltage is the same voltage
as the controller supply voltage)
isolated from the inputs of the LTM E expansion module
The 3 Common (C) terminals of the LTM R controller are connected to the A1 control voltage via an internal
filter, as shown in the wiring diagram examples (see page 192).

NOTICE
LOGIC INPUTS DESTRUCTION HAZARD

Connect the LTM R controllers inputs using the 3 Common (C) terminals connected to the A1 control
voltage via an internal filter.
Do not connect the Common (C) terminal to the A1 or A2 control voltage inputs.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

For more information, see the power supply wiring (see page 204) and the technical specifications of the
LTM R controller (see page 352).
Logic Inputs of the LTM E Expansion Module
The 4 logic inputs on the LTM E expansion module (I.7 - I.10) are not powered by the control voltage of the
LTM R controller.
For more information, refer to the technical specifications of the LTM E controller (see page 355) and to
the power supply description (see page 204).
Controller AC Inputs Setting
The LTM R controller uses internal filters to obtain a correct AC signal on the inputs.
For more accurate results, this filter can be configured by the controller AC inputs setting register
(see page 327) to set the voltage supply and activate the adaptive filtering internal feature.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

207

Installation

Connection of the Logic Inputs

Two types of connection are possible:
Direct connection for all information on logic inputs coming from the switchboard.
Connection via interposing relays for all information on logic inputs coming from outside of the
switchboard and mainly connected with long lines.
Using interposing relays reduces EMC disturbance effects on the LTM R controller and improves the
reliability of the information.
Recommended Interposing Relay
Interposing relays must have the following characteristics:
electromechanical relay with 2.5 kVAC isolation minimum
self-cleaning or low level contact (I < 5 mA)
installed in the switchboard as close as possible to the LTM R controller
AC or DC control circuit voltage, supplied by separate power supply (not supplied by the same power
supply as the LTM R controller, to respect the galvanic isolation)
In case of long distances between the process and the LTM R controller, interposing relays with DC control
circuit voltage are recommended.
The protection module is mandatory on the interposing relays in order to suppress the surge.
The following Schneider Electric RSB1 interposing relays are recommended:
Reference Number

Control Circuit Voltage

Protection Module

RSB1A120D

6, 12, 24, 48, 60, 110 VDC

Diode RZM040W

RSB1A1207

24, 48 VAC

RC circuit RZM041BN7

RSB1A1207

120, 220, 230, 240 VAC

RC circuit RZM041FU7

Use of DC Interposing Relays

The DC interposing relays are recommended because long wires distances can be used to command the
relay.
DC RSB1 relay voltage

24 VDC

48 VDC

110 VDC

Maximum distance for wires in parallel

without metallic screening

3,000 m (10,000 ft)

3,000 m (10,000 ft)

3,000 m (10,000 ft)

Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 3,000 m (10,000 ft)

metallic screening

3,000 m (10,000 ft)

3,000 m (10,000 ft)

The following diagram shows an example when using DC interposing relays:

208

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Use of AC Interposing Relays

The use of an AC interposing relay is allowed only on short distances if an AC voltage is mandatory.
AC RSB1 relay voltage

24 VAC

48 VAC

120 VAC

230/240 VAC

Maximum distance for wires in parallel

without metallic screening

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

1,650 m
(5,500 ft)

170 m (550 ft)

50 m (165 ft)

Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 2,620 m

metallic screening
(8,600 ft)

930 m (3,000 ft) 96 m (315 ft)

30 m (100 ft)

The following diagram shows an example when using AC interposing relays:

Use of AC Interposing Relays with a Rectifier

The use of AC interposing relay with a rectifier is recommended on long distances if an AC voltage is
mandatory.
Add a rectifier composed of 1 A / 1000 V diodes to command an AC interposing relay. In this way, rectified
AC current flows in the control cable when the switch in the continuous part is closed.
AC RSB1 relay voltage

24 VAC

48 VAC

120 VAC

230/240 VAC

Maximum distance for wires in parallel

without metallic screening

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

Maximum distance for wires in parallel with 3,000 m

metallic screening
(10,000 ft)

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

3,000 m
(10,000 ft)

The following diagram shows an example when using AC interposing relays with a rectifier:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

209

Installation

Wiring - Logic Outputs

Overview
The 4 logic outputs of the LTM R controller are relay outputs. The relay outputs command the motor
managed by the LTM R controller.
The 4 relay outputs on the LTM R controller are:
3 single pole / single throw (SPST, NO) relay outputs
1 double pole / single throw (DPST, NC+NO) relay output

Output Interposing Relays

When an output commands a contactor, an interposing relay may be required depending of the coil voltage
and the power required by the contactor used.
The following diagrams illustrate system wiring without and with the use of an interposing relay KA1:

B1, B2 Power supply dedicated to logic outputs

The LTM R controller logic output characteristics are:

rated insulation voltage: 300 V
AC rated thermal load: 250 VAC / 5 A
DC rated thermal load: 30 VDC / 5 A
AC 15 rating: 480 VA, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 2 A
DC 13 rating: 30 W, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 1.25 A
If the LTM R controller logic output is not able to control directly the contactor, an interposing relay is
required.
The protection module is mandatory on the interposing relays in order to suppress the surge.

210

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Recommended Contactors
The tables in the appendix, listing the references and characteristics of Schneider Electric contactors,
specify whether an interposing relay is required or not (see page 358).

1639502EN-04 09/2014

211

Installation

Connecting to an HMI Device

Overview
This section describes how to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device, such as a Magelis XBT or
a TeSys T LTM CU, or to a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM. The HMI device must be
connected to the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller, or to the HMI interface port (RJ45) on the LTM E
expansion module.
The Magelis XBT HMI device must be powered separately. Connect it to a controller in 1-to-many mode.
Wiring Rules
The wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance on the behavior of the LTM R controller
due to EMC.
The exhaustive list of wiring rules is described in the general recommendations (see page 192).

NOTICE
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Use Schneider Electric standard cables.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Connecting to a Magelis XBT HMI Device in 1-to-Many Mode
The diagram below shows a 1-to-many connection from the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to up to 8 controllers,
with and without the LTM E expansion module:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

212

Magelis XBTN410 HMI device

Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938
T-junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TF
Shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R
Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Connecting to a TeSys T LTM CU HMI Device

The diagrams below show the TeSys T LTM CU HMI device connected to the LTM R controller, without
and with the LTM E expansion module:

1
2
3
4
5

LTM CU Control Operator Unit

Grounding collar
LTM9CU HMI device connection cable
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module

Connecting to a Generic HMI Device

Connect the LTM R controller and the expansion module to an HMI device of your choice, using a shielded
cable for Modbus bus, reference TSX CSA .
The RJ45 port pinouts to connect to the HMI port of the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module
is:

The RJ45 wiring layout is:

Pin no.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Signal

Description

Reserved

Do not connect

Reserved

Do not connect

Not connected

D1 or D(B)

Communication between HMI and LTM R controller

D0 or D(A)

Communication between HMI and LTM R controller

Reserved

Do not connect

VP

+7 VDC (100 mA) power supply provided by the LTM R controller

Common

Signal and power supply common

213

Installation

Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1-to-1 Mode Using the HMI Port
The diagrams below show a 1-to-1 connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to the
HMI port of the LTM R controller, with and without the LTM E expansion module and the LTM CU:

214

1
2
3
4

PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

TCSMCNAM3M0 Modbus USB/RJ45 cable
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

Cable kit TCSMCNAM3M002P
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module
LTM CU Control Operator Unit
Grounding collar
LTM9CU HMI device connection cable

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Connecting to a PC Running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM in 1-to-Many Mode

The diagram below shows a 1-to-many connection from a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to
up to 8 controllers (with or without the LTM E expansion module):

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

Cable kit TCSMCNAM3M002P
T-junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TF, including a shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors
Shielded cable with 2 RJ45 connectors VW3 A8 306 R
Line terminator VW3 A8 306 R
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module

Connection Accessories
The following table lists connection accessories for the Magelis XBT and other HMI devices:
Designation

Description

T-junction boxes

Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for trunk cable and VW3 A8 306 TF03
an integrated 0.3 m (1 ft) cable with 1 RJ45 male
connector for tap-off

Reference

Box with 2 RJ45 female connector for trunk cable and VW3 A8 306 TF10
an integrated 1 m (3.2 ft) cable with 1 RJ45 male
connector for tap-off
Line terminator for RJ45 connector R = 120

Magelis connecting cable

XBTZ938

(Magelis XBTN410 only)

25 pts SUB-D connector to connect to Magelis XBT

Cable kit

Length = 2.5 m (8.2 ft)

USB to RS 485 converter

TCSMCNAM3M002P

Communication cables

Length = 0.3 m (1 ft)

VW3 A8 306 R03

Length = 1 m (3.2 ft)

VW3 A8 306 R10

HMI device connection cable

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Length = 2.5 m (8.2 ft)

VW3 A8 306 R

Length = 3 m (3.2 ft)

VW3 A8 306 R30

Length = 1 m (3.2 ft)

LTM9CU10

Length = 3 m (9.6 ft)

LTM9CU30

215

Installation

Section 5.2
Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network

Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network

Overview
This section describes how to connect an LTM R controller to an RS 485 PROFIBUS DP network with a
SUB-D 9 or an open-style connector.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL

The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and,
for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop.
Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.(1)
Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper
operation before being placed into service.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
(1) For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

216

Page

PROFIBUS DP Network Characteristics

217

PROFIBUS DP Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics

219

Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network

221

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

PROFIBUS DP Network Characteristics

Overview
The LTM R PROFIBUS DP controller complies with the PROFIBUS DP standard specification.
The PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Planning and PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for Cabling and
Assembly, published on www.profibus.com/downloads/, define the characteristics of the Modbus protocol.
PROFIBUS DP Network Standard Diagram
The diagram corresponds to the PROFIBUS DP standard specification.
The simplified diagram is as follows:

Characteristics for Connection to the PROFIBUS DP RS 485 Bus

The RS 485 standard allows variants of some characteristics:
polarization
line terminator
number of slaves
bus length

Characteristics

Value

Topology

Linear bus with line terminations

Transmission Mode

Half Duplex

Transmission Rate

From (in kBaud):

9.6
19.2
45.45
93.75
187.5
500
1,500
Up to (in MBaud):
3
6
12

Possible Transmission Media

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Twisted pair line (standard version, type RS-485)

217

Installation

Characteristics

Value

Maximum number of slaves connected to

1 master

128 (0, 126, and 127 are reserved)

Maximum number of slaves per derivation

32

Maximum number of repeaters per bus

9 repeaters maximum including 5 repeaters maximum cascaded in one

derivation

Line terminator

Active termination

Use of Repeaters
A PROFIBUS DP network bus can be segmented with repeaters for many reasons:
maximum length of the sum of derivations reached
need to connect more than 32 slaves on the bus
need to isolate the derivation
need for derivation
need for removable connection to equipment
For more information about the topology with a repeater, refer to the PROFIBUS Installation Guideline for
Planning.
Maximum Bus Cable Length
The bus cable lengths and corresponding baud rates are as follows:

218

Maximum Bus Cable Length

per Segment

Maximum Bus Cable Length

with 3 Repeaters

Baud Rates

1,200 m (3,936 ft)

4,800 m (15,748 ft)

9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 kBaud

1,000 m (3,280 ft)

4,000 m (13,123 ft)

187.5 kBaud

500 m (1,640 ft)

2,000 m (6,561 ft)

500 kBaud

200 m (656 ft)

800 m (2,624 ft)

1.5 MBaud

100 m (328 ft)

400 m (1,312 ft)

3 / 6 / 12 MBaud

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

PROFIBUS DP Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics

General
The main physical characteristics of a PROFIBUS DP port are:
Physical interface

Multipoint 2-wire RS 485 - electrical networking

Connector

Terminal block and SUB-D 9

Physical Interface and Connectors

The LTM R controller is equipped with 2 connector types, on the front face:
1. a female, shielded SUB-D 9 connector,
2. an open-style, pull-apart, terminal block.
The figure shows the LTM R front face with the PROFIBUS DP connectors:

Both connectors are electrically identical. They follow the PROFIBUS DP interoperability standards.
NOTE: The product must be connected through only 1 port. The use of the SUB-D 9 connector is
recommended.

CAUTION
NON-OPERATION
Pin VP of the terminal block is used for the line termination resistance connection. Do not connect any
power supply on it.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
SUB-D 9 Connector Pinout
The LTM R controller is connected to the PROFIBUS DP network with a female, SUB-D 9-pin connector
in compliance with the following wiring:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

219

Installation

The SUB-D 9 wiring layout is:

Pin no.

Signal

Description

(Shield)

Not used

M24

Not used

RxD/TxD-P (B)

Positive data transmission (RD+ / TD+) = B

CNTR-P

Positive repeater monitoring signal (direction monitoring)

DGND

Data transmission ground

VP

Line termination bias voltage

P24

Not used

RxD/TxD-N (A)

Negative data transmission (RD- / TD-) = A

CNTR-N

(Negative repeater monitoring signal, direction monitoring)

not used

Open Style Terminal Block

The LTM R controller has the following PROFIBUS DP network plug-in terminals and pin assignments.
Pin

Signal

Description

Shield

Shield

RxD/TxD-N (A)

Negative data transmission (RD- / TD-) = A

RxD/TxD-P (B)

Positive data transmission (RD+ / TD+) = B

DGND

Data transmission ground

VP

Line termination bias voltage

Open-Style Terminal Block Characteristics

220

Connector

5 pins

Pitch

5.08 mm (0.2 in.)

Tightening torque

0.5 to 0.6 Nm (5 lb-in)

Flat screwdriver

3 mm (0.10 in.)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network

Overview
The recommended way to connect an LTM R controller to a PROFIBUS DP network on the RS 485 bus is
the connection via the female shielded SUB-D 9 connector.
This section describes the connection of LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers.
Precautions
Always follow the recommendations for wiring and connecting.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This equipment must be installed, programmed, and serviced only by qualified personnel.

Follow all up-to-date instructions, standards and regulations.

Check the function settings before starting the motor.
Do not downgrade or modify these devices.

Incorrect configuration can result in unpredictable behavior of the devices.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
PROFIBUS DP Wiring Rules
The following wiring rules must be respected in order to reduce disturbance due to EMC on the behavior
of the LTM R controller:
Keep a distance as large as possible between the communication cable and the power or control cables
(minimum 30 cm or 11.8 in.).
Cross over the PROFIBUS DP cable and the power cables at right angles, if necessary.
Install the communication cables as close as possible to the grounded plate.
Do not bend or damage the cables. The minimum bending radius is 10 times the cable diameter.
Avoid sharp angles of paths or passage of the cable.
Use the recommended cables only.
A PROFIBUS DP cable must be shielded:
The cable shield must be connected to a protective ground.
The connection of the cable shield to the protective ground must be as short as possible.
Connect together all the shields, if necessary.
Perform the grounding of the shield with a collar.

When the LTM R controller is installed in a withdrawable drawer:

Connect together all the shield contacts of the withdrawable drawer part of the auxiliary connector to
the ground of the withdrawable drawer to create an electromagnetic barrier. See the Okken
Communications Cabling & Wiring Guide (available on request).
Do not connect the cable shield at the fixed part of the auxiliary connector.

Place an active termination at each end of the bus to avoid malfunctions on the communication bus.
Wire the bus between each connector directly, without intermediate terminal blocks.
The common polarity (0V) must be connected directly to protective ground, preferably at one point only
for the entire bus. In general, this point is chosen either on the master device or on the polarization
device.

For more information, refer to the Electrical Installation Guide (available in English only), chapter
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC).

NOTICE
COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION
Respect all the wiring and grounding rules in order to avoid communication malfunctions due to EMC
disturbance.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

221

Installation

LTM R Controllers Installed in a Blokset or Okken Motor Control Switchboard

The installation of LTM R controllers in withdrawable drawers of a switchboard presents constraints
specific to the type of switchboard:
For installation of LTM R controllers in an Okken switchboard, see the Okken Communications Cabling
& Wiring Guide (available on request).
For installation of LTM R controllers in a Blokset switchboard, see the Blokset Communications Cabling
& Wiring Guide (available on request).
For installation of LTM R controllers in other types of switchboard, follow the specific EMC instructions
described in this manual and refer to the relative instructions specific to your type of switchboard.
LTM R Controllers Installed in Withdrawable Drawers
The wiring diagram for connection of LTM R controllers installed in withdrawable drawers to the RS 485
bus via the SUB-D 9 connector and hardwired cables is as follows:

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

222

Master (PLC, PC, or communication module) with line terminator

PROFIBUS DP shielded cable TSX PBS CA 00
SUB-D 9 male connector 490 NAD 911 0
Grounding of the PROFIBUS DP cable shield
Withdrawable drawer
Withdrawable drawer part of the auxiliary connector
Fixed part of the auxiliary connector
Line terminator VW3 A8 306 DR (120 )

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Installation

Male SUB-D 9 Connector

The following figures detail the connection of a PROFIBUS DP cable:

SUB-D 9 Connector Wiring

The table below describes the procedure for wiring the SUB-D 9 connector bus interface:
Step

Action

Strip a length of 33 mm (1.3 in.) from the end of the cable.

Cut a length of 24 mm (0.95 in.) from the metallic braid and the shielding films, leaving a length of
9 mm (0.35 in.)

Strip a section of 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) in length from end of each wire and mount on terminals.

List of PROFIBUS DP Accessories

List of PROFIBUS DP connection accessories:
Designation

Description

Reference

PROFIBUS DP SUB-D 9 male connectors

Connector with terminator

490 NAD 911 03

In-line connector

490 NAD 911 04

In-line connector with programming port

490 NAD 911 05

List of PROFIBUS DP Cables

List of PROFIBUS DP connection cables:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Description

Reference

100 m (328 ft) cable

TSX PBS CA 100

400 m (1,312 ft) cable

TSX PBS CA 400

223

Installation

224

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 6
Commissioning

Commissioning

Overview
This chapter provides an overview for commissioning the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion
module.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Introduction

226

First Power-up

228

Required and Optional Parameters

230

FLC (Full Load Current) Settings

231

PROFIBUS DP Communication Checking

233

Verifying System Wiring

235

Verify Configuration

237

225

Commissioning

Introduction
Introduction
Commissioning must be performed after the physical installation of the LTM R controller, LTM E expansion
module and other hardware devices.
The commissioning process includes:

initialization of the installed devices, and

configuration of the LTM R controller parameters that are required for operation of the LTM R controller,
LTM E expansion module, and other system hardware

The person performing commissioning must be familiar with the system hardware, and how it will be
installed and used in the application.
Hardware devices can include:

motor
voltage transformers
external load current transformers
ground current transformers
communication network

The product specifications for these devices provide the required parameter information. You need to
understand how the LTM R controller will be used to be able to configure the protection, monitoring, and
control functions for the application.
For information about configuring control parameters, see Motor Control Functions, page 131.
For information about configuring protection parameters, see Motor Protection Functions, page 59.
Initialization
The LTM R controller is ready to be initialized after the hardware installation is complete. To initialize the
LTM R controller:

be sure the command to control the motor is off, then

turn on the LTM R controller

CAUTION
IMPROPER INITIALIZATION
Disconnect power to the motor before initializing the LTM R controller.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.
Neither the LTM R controller nor the LTM E expansion module require additional hardware configuration
(for example, turning dials, or setting dip-switches) to be initialized. When powered up for the first time, the
LTM R controller enters an initial state and is ready for commissioning.
Configuration Tools
Identify the configuration control sourceand the configuration toolbefore configuring parameters. The
LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module can be configured locally using an HMI device or remotely
via the network connection.
The LTM R controller can be commissioned using:
an LTM CU control operator unit,
a PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM,
a PLC connected to the LTM R controllers network port.
The following parameters identify the configuration control source:
Parameter

Enables Use of This Tool

Factory Setting

Config Via HMI Keypad Enable

TeSys T LTM CU control operator unit

Enabled

Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable

PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

Enabled

Config Via Network Port Enable

the network port (PLC or PC running SoMove

with TeSys T DTM)

Enabled

This chapter describes commissioning performed using the LTM CU control operator unit, or SoMove with
the TeSys T DTM.
226

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Commissioning

Commissioning Process
The commissioning process remains the same, regardless which configuration tool you select. This
process includes the following stages:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Stage

Description

First power-up

The LTM R controller initializes, and is ready for parameter configuration.

Configuring required settings

Configure these parameters to move the LTM R controller out of its initialization state.
The LTM R controller is ready for operations.

Configuring optional settings

Configure these parameters to support the LTM R controller functions required by the
application.

Verifying hardware

Check hardware wiring.

Verifying the configuration

Confirm accurate parameter settings.

227

Commissioning

First Power-up
Overview
First power-up describes the first time power is cycled to:

a new LTM R controller, or

an LTM R controller that has been previously commissioned, but whose parameter settings have been
restored to the factory settings, either as a result of:
execution of the Clear All Command, or
a firmware upgrade

On first power-up, the LTM R controller enters a locked, non-configured state, called the initialized state,
and the Controller System Config Required parameter is turned On. The LTM R controller exits this state
only after certain parameters, called required parameters, have been configured.
When commissioning is done, the LTM R controller is no longer locked, and is ready for operations. For
information on operating states, see Operating States, page 136.
First Power-up in the LTM CU
Using the LTM CU control operator unit, configuring the Menu First Setup menu parameters clears the
Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization.
The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory, the LTM CU control operator unit
LCD automatically displays the First Setup menu, with a list of parameters that need to be configured
immediately:

First setup
Phases
Load CT ratio
OK
Click OK.
When all parameters are set, the last menu item to show up is End Config:

First setup
Local channel
End Config
OK
Click OK.

End Config
No
Local channel
Yes
OK
Click Yes to save the configuration.
When the configuration is saved, the First Setup menu is no longer displayed.
Send a Clear All command to the product to access the first setup menu again.
For more information, see the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users Manual.

228

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Commissioning

First Power-up in SoMove with theTeSys T DTM

Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to set all parameters, at the first power up of the LTM R controller,
the Controller System Config Required parameter can be cleared by 2 ways:
In disconnected mode, by clicking Communication Store to Device to download the configuration
files
In connected mode, by clicking Device command exit configuration after setting all parameters
Both commands bring the LTM R controller out of initialization.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

229

Commissioning

Required and Optional Parameters

Introduction
In addition to the required parameters, configure optional parameters if required at first power-up or later.
In the LTM CU HMI
In the LTM CU HMI, required and optional parameters are located in the 5 sub-menus in the Menu.
In SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
In SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, required and optional parameters are located in tree view items in the
parameter list tab.

230

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Commissioning

FLC (Full Load Current) Settings

FLC Definition
The Full Load Current (FLC) represents the actual full-load current of the motor being protected by the
LTM R controller. The FLC is a motor characteristic and can be found on the motor plate.
Many protection parameters are set as a multiple of FLC.
The FLC can be set from FLCmin to FLCmax.
Examples of FLC settings are detailed below.
Other Definitions
Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * Passes)
Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio
Current range max is determined by the LTM R controller commercial reference. It is stored in units of
0.1 A and has one of the following values: 8.0, 27.0, or 100.0 A.
Contactor rating is stored in units of 0.1 A and is set by the user between 1.0 and 1000.0 A.
FLCmax is defined as the lower of the Current sensor max and the Contactor rating values.
FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 (rounded to the nearest 0.01 A.). FLCmin is stored internally in units
of 0.01 A.
NOTE:

The modification of the Contactor rating and/or Load CT ratio modifies the value of the FLC.
Do not set the FLC below the FLCmin.

Conversion of Amperes to FLC Settings

FLC values are stored as a percentage of FLCmax
FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax
NOTE: FLC values must be expressed as a percentage of FLCmax (resolution of 1 %). If you enter an
unauthorized value, the LTM R will round it up to the nearest authorized value. For example, on a 0.4-8 A
unit, the step between FLCs is 0.08 A. If you try to set an FLC of 0.43 A, the LTM R will round it up to 0.4 A.
Example 1 (No External CTs)
Data:
FLC (in A) = 0.43 A
Current range max = 8.0 A
Load CT primary = 1
Load CT secondary = 1
Passes = 1
Contactor rating = 810.0 A
Calculated parameters with 1 pass:
Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 1 / (1 * 1) = 1.0
Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 1.0 = 8.0 A
FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (8.0, 810.0) = 8.0 A
FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 8.0 / 20 = 0.40 A
FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 0.43 / 8.0 = 5 %
Example 2 (No External CTs, Multiple Passes)
Data:
FLC (in A) = 0.43 A
Current range max = 8.0 A
Load CT primary = 1
Load CT secondary = 1
Passes = 5
Contactor rating = 810.0 A

1639502EN-04 09/2014

231

Commissioning

Calculated parameters with 5 passes:

Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 1 / (1 * 5) = 0.2
Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 0.2 = 1.6 A
FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (1.6, 810.0) = 1.6 A
FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 1.6 / 20 = 0.08 A
FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 0.43 / 1.6 = 27 %
Example 3 (External CTs, Reduced Contactor Rating)
Data:
FLC (in A) = 135 A
Current range max = 8.0 A
Load CT primary = 200
Load CT secondary = 1
Passes = 1
Contactor rating = 150.0 A
Calculated parameters with 1 pass:
Load CT ratio = Load CT primary / (Load CT secondary * passes) = 200 / (1 * 1) = 200.0
Current sensor max = Current range max * Load CT ratio = 8.0 * 200.0 = 1600.0 A
FLCmax = min (Current sensor max, Contactor rating) = min (1600.0, 150.0) = 150.0 A
FLCmin = Current sensor max / 20 = 1600.0 / 20 = 80.0 A
FLC (in %) = FLC (in A) / FLCmax = 135 / 150.0 = 90 %

232

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Commissioning

PROFIBUS DP Communication Checking

Introduction
Networking is the last operation within the commissioning sequence. After the connectors are plugged in,
you must enter the correct communication parameters (via SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the HMI)
before communication can begin between the LTM R controller(s) and the PLC.
To select the communication parameters, see Communication Parameters, page 286
Check whether your system can communicate properly.
The PROFIBUS DP communication checking sequence is:

Step 1
On the LTM R controller front face, check the following 2 LEDs:
1. Fallback
2. BF (Bus Failure).
The figure shows the LTM R controller front face with both PROFIBUS DP communication LEDs:

The Communication Fallback is indicated by a red LED (1).

1639502EN-04 09/2014

If the red Fallback LED is...

Then...

Off

The LTM R is not in communication fallback mode.

On

The LTM R is in communication fallback mode.

233

Commissioning

The PROFIBUS DP communication status, marked as BF (Bus Failure), is indicated by a red LED (2).
If the red BF LED is...

Then...

Off

The communication is OK.

On

There is no communication because the master is not connected, because

there is a configuration mismatch, or because of another failure.

Blinking:
On = 2.5 s
Off = 0.5 s

The PROFIBUS DP address is invalid.

Communication is only possible after entering the correct communication parameters.

1

The BF LED switches on.

Get the internal configuration:

address,
identification (1 out of the 8 possible modules).

Check the configuration with the PLC.

The PLC performs a "Set Parameter" of the configuration.

The BF LED switches off.

Note: If the LED is blinking, it means that the address is invalid and should be changed.

Step 2
If the product should be communicating but the BF LED is not Off, check the cables and connectors and
correct any connection problems.
Step 3
If the product is still not communicating, check the configuration via:
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, or
the HMI.
The communication failure can be the result of a wrong address, speed or parity, an incorrect PLC
configuration, etc.

234

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Commissioning

Verifying System Wiring

Overview
After all required and optional parameters have been configured, be sure to check your systems wiring,
which can include:

motor power wiring

LTM R controller wiring
external current transformer wiring
diagnostic wiring
I/O wiring

Motor Power Wiring

To verify the motor power wiring, check the following:
Look at...

Action

The motor nameplate

Confirm that the motor generates current and voltage within the
ranges of the LTM R controller.

The power wiring diagram

Visually confirm that the actual power wiring matches the

intended power wiring, as described in the power wiring
diagram.

The list of faults and warnings in SoMove with the Look for any of the following faults or warnings:
TeSys T DTM or the LCD display of the HMI device overpower
underpower
over power factor
under power factor
The list of all or read only parameters in SoMove
with the TeSys T DTM or the scrolling HMI display
of the HMI device

Look for unexpected values in the following parameters:

active power
reactive power
power factor

Control Circuit Wiring

To verify control circuit wiring, check the following:
Look at...

Action

The control wiring diagram

Visually confirm that the actual control wiring matches the

intended control wiring, as described in the control wiring
diagram.

The LTM R controller Power LED

If the LED is off, the LTM R controller may not be receiving

power.

The LTM R controller HMI LED

If the LED is off, the LTM R controller may not be communicating

with the LTM CU or the PC running SoMove.

The LTM E expansion module Power LED

If the LED is off, the LTM E expansion module may not be

receiving power.

Current Transformer Wiring

Verify the load current transformer wiring and, if the application includes external load current transformers,
also verify that wiring by checking the following:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Look at...

Action

The external CT wiring diagram

Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended

wiring, as described in the wiring diagram.

The following load CT parameter settings, using

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM:
Load CT Ratio
Load CT Primary
Load CT Secondary
Load CT Multiple Passes

Confirm that the Load CT Ratio parameter, or the combination

of Load CT Primary and Load CT Secondary parameters
accurately reflect the intended load CT ratio.
Visually confirm that the Load CT Multiple Passes parameter
accurately reflects the number of passes the wiring makes
through the LTM R controllers embedded CT windows.

235

Commissioning

Look at...

Action

The following load motor parameter setting, using

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM:
Motor Phases

Visually confirm that the motor and LTM R controller are wired
for the number of phases set in the Motor Phases parameter.

The following load motor parameter setting, using

either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD
display of the HMI device:
Motor Phases Sequence

If the motor is a 3-phase motor, visually check that the phase

wiring sequence matches the Motor Phases Sequence
parameter setting.

Diagnostic Wiring
Verify the wiring for any motor temperature sensing device or external ground current transformer, if the
application includes these devices, by checking the following:
Look at...

Action

The wiring diagram

Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended

wiring, as described in the wiring diagram.

The external ground CT specifications

- and The following ground CT parameter settings, using
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM:
Ground CT Primary
Ground CT Secondary

Confirm that the combination of Ground CT Primary and Ground

CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended
ground CT ratio.

The motor temp sensor specifications

-and The following parameter setting, using either
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display
of the HMI device:
Motor Temp Sensor

Confirm that the motor temp sensor actually employed is the

same sensor type as set in the Motor Temp Sensor parameter.

I/O Wiring
Verify the wiring for any I/O connections by checking the following:

236

Look at...

Action

The wiring diagram

Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended

wiring, as described in the wiring diagram.

The AUX1 (Run 1), AUX2 (Run 2), and Stop

buttons on the HMI device
- and The following parameter setting, using either
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display
of the HMI device:
Control Local Channel Setting

Confirm that each command performs the intended start or stop

function, when control is via the terminal strip or the HMI port.

The Reset button on the HMI device

- and The following parameter setting, using either
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display
of the HMI device:
Thermal Overload Fault Reset

Confirm that the HMI can command a manual fault reset, when
control is set to manual.

The PLC, if the LTM R controller is connected to a

network
- and The following parameter setting, using either
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM or the LCD display
of the HMI device:
Thermal Overload Fault Reset

Confirm that the PLC can command the intended start, stop and
remote reset functions.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Commissioning

Verify Configuration
Overview
The final step in the commissioning process is to verify that all configurable parameters used in the
application are properly configured.
When performing this task, a master list of all the parameters to be configured and the desired settings is
required. It is imperative to compare this list against the actual settings of the configured parameters.
Process
Verifying parameter settings is a 3-part process:
Transfer the configuration file from the LTM R controller to the PC running SoMove with the TeSys T
DTM. This allows to view the LTM R controllers present parameter settings.
For information on transferring files from the LTM R controller to the PC, refer to the TeSys T DTM for
SoMove FDT Container Online help.
Compare the master list of intended parameters and settings against the same settings located in the
parameter list tab in SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
Change the configuration settings as desired. Do this using:
either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, then download the edited file from the PC to the LTM R
controller.
For information on transferring files from the PC to the LTM R controller, refer to the TeSys T DTM
for SoMove FDT Container Online help.
or LTM CU HMI: to edit parameters located in the Menu, navigate to the sub-menu settings and make
the appropriate edits.
For information about required settings, see Required and Optional Parameters, page 230.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

237

Commissioning

238

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Use
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 7
Use

Use

Overview
This chapter describes:

the user interface devices and the hardware configurations you can use to operate the LTM R controller
how to set parameters with each user interface
how to perform monitoring, fault handling, and control functions with each user interface.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Topic

7.1

Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone

7.2

Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit

Page
240
244

7.3

Configuring the Magelis XBTN410

247

7.4

Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many)

251

7.5

Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

279

7.6

Using the PROFIBUS DP Communication Network

282

239

Use

Section 7.1
Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone

Using the LTM R Controller Stand-Alone

Overview
This section describes how to use the LTM R controller, either by itself or connected to an LTM E
expansion module, in a stand-alone configuration without a user interface device.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

240

Page

Hardware Configurations

241

Stand-Alone Configuration

242

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Hardware Configurations
Overview
The LTM R controller, either alone or connected to an LTM E expansion module, can be operated with or
without a user interface device.
In any configuration, the LTM R controller can be configured to perform monitoring, fault management,
motor protection and control functions.
Communications
User interface devices and their communications interfaces include:
User interface device

Communicates via the

PC running SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or
LTM E expansion module

Network PLC

Network port on the LTM R controller via the network RJ45

connector or terminal wiring

NOTE: For any instructions about the LTM CU, see the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users
Manual.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

241

Use

Stand-Alone Configuration
Overview
Before the LTM R controller can operate in a stand-alone configuration, parameters must be set via an HMI
device or SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
When parameters are set, the device can be detached and you can use the following controls to operate
the LTM R controller:
Use this control

To

LEDs:
7 LTM R controller LEDs
5 LTM E expansion module LEDs

Monitor the state of the LTM R controller and LTM E expansion

module

LTM R controller Test / Reset button

Self test, manage faults, reset to factory settings

Programmed operating parameters

Logic inputs:
6 LTM R controller inputs
4 LTM E expansion module inputs

Control the:
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module
Motor
Power and control wiring
Any connected sensors, including
motor temp sensors
external ground fault CTs

Programmed protection parameters

Protect the:
LTM R controller
LTM E expansion module
Motor
Equipment

Configurations
The stand-alone physical configurations of the LTM R controller (with and without a connected LTM E
expansion module) are depicted below:
The LTM R controller alone

The LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module

242

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

LTM R Controller LEDs

Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM R controller to monitor its state, as follows:
LED

Color

Describes

Indicates

HMI Comm

Yellow

Communication activity between LTM R

controller and LTM E expansion module

On = communication
Off = no communication

Power

Green

LTM R controller power or internal fault

condition

Solid green = power-on, no internal faults,

and motor off

Flashing green = power-on, no internal

faults, and motor on

Off = power-off, or internal faults exist

Alarm/MS

Red

Protection fault or warning, or internal fault

condition

Solid red = internal or protection fault

Flashing red (2 x per s) = warning
Flashing red (5 x per s) = load shed or

rapid cycle condition

Off = no faults, warnings, load shed, or

rapid cycle (when power is On)

Fallback

Red

Communication connection between

LTM R controller and network module

Solid red = in fallback

Off = not in fallback (no power)

BF

Red

Communication activity between LTM R

controller and network module

Off = communication
Red = no communication

Flashing when the LED is lit up to 250 ms whatever the time cycle is.
Blinking when the LED is lit 50% of the time in the time cycle.

LTM E Expansion Module LEDs

Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM E expansion module to monitor its operating and communications
state, as follows:
LED

Color

Describes

Indicates

Power

Green or red

Module power or internal

fault condition

Solid green = power-on with no internal faults

Solid red = power-on with internal faults
Off = power-off

State of input

On = input activated
Off = input not activated

Logic inputs I.7, I.8, Yellow

I.9 and I.10

Flashing when the LED is lit up to 250 ms whatever the time cycle is.
Blinking when the LED is lit 50% of the time in the time cycle.

Test / Reset
Use the Test / Reset button to perform the following LTM R controllers functions:
Function

Description

Procedure

Fault reset

Resets all faults that can be reset. See Overview,

page 165 for more information about resetting faults.

Press the button and release within 3 s.

Performs a self test if:

Press and hold the button for more than

3 s up to and including 15 s.

Self test (See

Self Test with
Motor On,
page 344)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

No faults exist
Self-test function is enabled.

Local return to
factory setting

Press and hold the button down for more

Returns the LTM R controller to factory settings, if the
product is in one of the following states: Ready, Not ready than 15 s not exceeding 20 s.
or System configuration. If the product is in Start or Run
state, the return to factory setting is ignored.
When the reset button is pressed during more than 15 s,
the Alarm LED blinks at 2 Hz. If the reset button is
released, the product executes a reset to factory setting.

Induce a fault

Put the LTM R controller into internal fault condition.

Press and hold the button down for more

than 20 s.

243

Use

Section 7.2
Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit

Using the LTM CU Control Operator Unit

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic

244

Page

Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit

245

Configuration of the HMI Port

246

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Presentation of the LTM CU Control Operator Unit

Aim of the Product
The LTM CU Control Operator Unit is a remote operator terminal that enables the configuration, monitoring
and control of the LTM R controller, as part of the TeSys T motor management system. The LTM CU has
been specially developed to act as the Human Machine Interface (HMI) of the LTM R controller, and is
internally powered by the LTM R.
The diagram below shows the LTM CU front face:

LTM CU Functions
The LTM CU can be used to:
configure parameters for the LTM R controller,
display information about the LTM R controller configuration and operation,
monitor detected faults and warnings detected by the controller,
control the motor locally using the local control interface.
For more Information
See the TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users Manual.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

245

Use

Configuration of the HMI Port

HMI Port
The HMI port is the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller, or on the LTM E expansion module used to connect
the LTM R controller to an HMI device, such as a Magelis XBT or a TeSys T LTM CU, or to a PC running
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
Communication Parameters
Use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to modify the HMI port communication parameters:
HMI port address setting
HMI port baud rate setting
HMI port parity setting
HMI port endian setting
HMI Port Address Setting
The HMI port address can be set between 1 and 247.
Factory setting is 1.
HMI Port Baud Rate Setting
Possible transmission rates are:
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19,200 Baud (Factory setting)
HMI Port Parity Setting
The parity can be selected from:
Even (Factory setting)
None
Parity and stop bit behavior is linked:
If the parity is...

Then the number of stop bits is...

Even

None

HMI Port Endian Setting

The HMI port endian setting allows to swap the 2 words in a double word.
0 = least significant word first (little endian)
1 = most significant word first (big endian, factory setting)

HMI Port Fallback Setting

HMI port fallback setting (see page 47) is used to adjust the fallback mode in case of a loss of
communication with the PLC.

246

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Section 7.3
Configuring the Magelis XBTN410

Configuring the Magelis XBTN410

Overview
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can be used to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers, in a 1 HMI to many LTM R
controllers (1-to-many) physical configuration.
The HMI presents a unique user interface, including both LCD display and keypad and requires the use of:

a software application file, and

a keypad label

This section shows you how to obtain and install a software application in the Magelis XBTN410 for a 1to-many configuration.
Refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI for instructions on selecting
and installing the keypad label that is appropriate for your configuration.
After connecting the HMI port, refer to instructions about configuring the HMI port (see page 246).
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

248

Download 1-to-many Software Application Files

249

Transferring Application Software Files to

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software

Magelis

XBTN410 HMI

250

247

Use

Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software

Overview
The LTM R controller comes with a copy of Magelis XBT L1000 programming software. You need to:

install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC, and
use it to transfer a 1-to-many software application to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI.

NOTE: Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is a powerful programming tool. This document
describes only its utility in opening and transferring pre-programmed software applications to the Magelis
XBTN410 HMI. For more information about the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software, consult its help
file and printed documentation.
For instructions on how to download 1-to-many software applications, see Download 1-to-many Software
Application Files, page 249.
For instructions on how to transfer 1-to-many software applications from your PC to the Magelis XBTN410
HM, see Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI, page 250.
Installation Steps
To install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC:

248

Step

Action

Place the installation disk into your PCs disk drive. The installation program should begin.

If the installation program does not begin, use Microsoft Windows Explorer to navigate to and click on
the file Setup.exe.

If any screens appear that do not require action, click Next.

In the language screen, select a language and click OK.

In the name and company screen, type in your name and your company name (or accept the factory
settings) and click Next.

If a screen appears warning you that protocols will be uninstalled, click Yes to continue.

In the Protocols Choices screen, be sure that Modbus is selected, then click Next.

In the Select Components screen, make no selections then click Next.

In the Choose Destination Location screen, either accept proposed path or use the Browse button to
navigate to a new one, then click Next.

10

In the Start Copying Files screen, review your selections then click:
Back to return to earlier screens and make changes
Next to proceed to the final screen.

11

In the Finish screen, click Finish. The Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is installed.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Download 1-to-many Software Application Files

Overview
You must download the software application file required by your installation of the Magelis XBTN410
HMI from the www.schneider-electric.com website.
From the schneider-electric website, you can freely obtain the software application file
LTM_1T8_(language)_(version).dop.
For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software, see Installing Magelis
XBT L1000 Programming Software, page 248.
For instructions on transferring application files from the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on
your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI, see Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410
HMI, page 250.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

249

Use

Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI

Overview
After you have installed the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and downloaded the
required 1-to-many application software file, you are ready to transfer the application software file to the
Magelis XBTN410 HMI.
For instructions on downloading software application files, see Download 1-to-many Software Application
Files, page 249.
Transfer Steps
To transfer a software application file from Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the
Magelis XBTN410 HMI:

250

Step

Action

Supply power to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI.

Connect the PC 9-PIN Com1 port to the 25-pin data port on the HMI using an XBT Z915 programming
cable. The HMI LCD reads:
"FIRMWARE VX.X WAITING FOR TRANSFER"

Start up the Magelis XBT_L1000 programming software.

Close all child windows in the programming software.

In the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog is displayed.

In the Open dialog, navigate to the 1-to-many software application file (with a .dop extension) and click
Open. The programming software displays the selected file.

In the Transfers menu, select Export.

When notified that the Export command will destroy the existing application, click OK to continue the
export. The HMI LCD indicates:
"DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS" and then "DOWNLOAD COMPLETED"

Click OK when the programming software reports "Transfer accomplished successfully".

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Section 7.4
Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many)

Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI (1-to-many)

Overview
This section describes how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers, in a
1 HMI to many LTM R controllers (1-to-many) physical configuration.
The 1-to-many physical configuration presents a unique:

user interface (LCD display and keypad)

menu structure

NOTE: The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers that have previously been
commissioned. To commission an individual LTM R controller, use either:

an LTM CU control operator unit, or

SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Physical Description (1-to-many)

252

Command Lines (1-to-many)

255

Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many)

256

Editing Values (1-to-many)

257

Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many)

260

Menu Structure (1-to-many)

261

Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many)

262

Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many)

263

Controller Page (1-to-many)

265

Settings (1-to-many)

266

Statistics (1-to-many)

273

Product ID (1-to-many)

275

Monitoring (1-to-many)

276

Fault Management (1-to-many)

277

Service Commands (1-to-many)

278

251

Use

Physical Description (1-to-many)

1-to-many Interface
When a Magelis XBTN410 is used in a 1-to-many physical configuration, the face of the HMI looks like
this:

1
2

LCD display
8 button keypad

1-to-many Keypad
The 1-to-many configuration requires a customized keypad label. Using a blank keypad label, add the
names of the 6 bottom buttons to the label. For instructions on creating and installing a customized keypad
label, refer to the XBT-N Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI.
In a 1-to-many configuration, the keypad buttons perform the following functions:
Keys

Use this key to

enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 14

move to the adjacent left character within a numerical setting value
execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 14
reset statistics to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller
display the description of another fault, when the LCD displays fault messages

enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 58

move to a lower level in an LTM R controller menu structure
move to the adjacent right character within a numerical setting value
toggle between alternate values for Boolean settings
execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 58
reset settings to factory settings for a selected LTM R controller
display the description of another fault, when the LCD displays fault messages

scroll down through a page

decrement by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting
scroll up through a page
increment by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting

MOD

ESC

ENTER

DEL

select a numeric setting for editing

Note: after a setting is selected, you can increment or decrement either:

the entire value
- or a selected digit within the setting.
exit the present level in the HMI menu structure and move up to the next level
exit the selected setting without saving changes.
save changes and exit the selected setting

delete the value of the selected setting

Note: after deleting a setting value, you can either:

use the arrow keys to input a new value, then click

ENTER

to save it

- or click

252

ESC

to restore the deleted value.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

1-to-Many LCD
In a 1-to-many configuration, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI presents a flexible LCD that can display up to 4
rows of 20 characters, as follows:

In some cases, the LCD displays only 3 text lines, because one linecontaining a fault message or page
headeris twice the height of normal text.
Pages
The LCD displays pages of text. There are 2 types of pages:
Page type

Contains

Displayed

Menu structure page

page header that is twice the height of

by navigating through the HMI menu structure

to the specific page

Fault message page

ordinary LCD text

links to other pages
read-only parameter values
editable parameter settings
function commands

a flashing fault message

the number of active faults

automatically when a fault occurs

by selecting Faults in the Home page

Pages often contain more than 4 lines of text. See Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many), page 256
for instructions on how to navigate within and between pages.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

253

Use

Page examples
The Home page:
The top 4 lines of the Home page

Use the

button to scroll down and reveal more of this

page.
Note: click on a flashing

to navigate to that page.

Fault message pages:

The opening fault message page.
Note: the fault name "THERMAL OVERLOAD" and the
LTM R controller address "Controller 1" both flash when
displayed.

Click the

button to display additional fault message

pages.

Click the

button to scroll down and reveal more of the

Ground Current fault message.

254

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Command Lines (1-to-many)

Overview
Use the HMI keypad

and

keys to execute text line commands. A command line is identified by a:

at the right end of the text line, or

at the left end of the text line

A command can be executed only when its text line has focus. A text line has focus when the

or

at either end of the text lineplus any additional command characteris blinking.
Command Lines
The 1-to-many menu structure presents 4 different kinds of command lines, depending upon the command
characterif anynext to the command line arrow, as follows:
Command line characters
Left

Description

Right
Links to a page.
With no character next to the blinking arrow, click the:

N/A

0
- or 1
v

keypad button to move to the page indicated by the left arrow

keypad button to move to the page indicated by the right arrow.

Toggle bit commands.

With a 0 or a 1 next to the blinking arrow, click the

keypad button to toggle

the boolean setting value.

Value write commands.
With a v next to the blinking arrow, click the:

keypad button to execute the command indicated by the left arrow

keypad button to execute the command indicated by the right arrow.

For example:
Reset to Defaults: Statistics
Reset to Defaults: Settings
Self-Test

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Command cannot execute. There is no connection between the HMI and the
indicated LTM R controller.

255

Use

Navigating the Menu Structure (1-to-many)

Overview
Use the HMI keypad

and

ESC

buttons to:

scroll within a page

link to a page in the next, lower level in the menu structure
return to a page in the next, higher level in the menu structure
jump to the Home page

Example
The following navigation example begins and ends at the Home page:

256

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Editing Values (1-to-many)

Overview
Use the HMI keypad

MOD

and

ENTER

buttons to edit setting values. There are 3 kinds

of editable settings:

boolean
numeric
value list

Only settings that are displayed in the LCD can be edited. To display a setting, navigate to the page that
contains the setting. With the correct page opened, you may need to scroll down to display the setting.
Boolean settings
A boolean value setting includes a 0 or a 1 next to the

at the right end of the text line. The following

example shows you how to select then edit a boolean value:

1
2
3

The Settings page opens with focus at the top line.

Click the DOWN button to scroll down to the Local Control setting (HMI). The boolean value (0) and command line
arrow blink, indicating focus.
Click the RIGHT arrow to toggle the Local Control setting to Term Strip and the boolean value to 1.

NOTE: An edited boolean value is saved when its value changes.

Numeric settings
Numeric value settings are incremented or decremented, and can be edited in 2 ways:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

by selecting the entire setting and then incrementing or decrementing its value
by selecting individual characters within the setting and then incrementing or decrementing the value of
each digit.

257

Use

Use the

1
2
3

MOD

button to select the value to be edited, as follows:

The Long Start page opens with no setting selected for editing.
Click the MOD button once to select the first displayed numerical field for editing.
Click the MOD button a second time to select the next displayed numerical field for editing.

After a setting is selected for editing, you can use the

the entire value, then use the

ENTER

and

buttons to increment or decrement

button to save the edit:

Alternatively, after a setting is highlighted you can use the

and

buttons to select only a single

character within a field and edit that character, as follows:

258

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Value List settings

In a few cases, a setting presents a list of value selections. Selecting a value from the list is very much like
incrementing or decrementing the entire value of a numerical setting, as shown below:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

259

Use

Executing a Value Write Command (1-to-many)

Overview
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI, in 1-to-many configuration provides executable value write commands. A
value write command immediately executes a task. The value write command line is identified by either a:

v (at the left end of a command line, or)

(at the right end of a command line

If a value write command is unsuccessful, the HMI displays an error message.

Value write commands include:
Value write command

Task

Location

Clear Settings

Clears settings and restores factory settings.

Reset to Defaults page

Clear Statistics

Clears statistics and restores factory settings.

Self Test

Performs a self-test.

Controller page

Reset - Manual

Enables manual resetting of faults

Reset page

Reset - Remote

Enables remote resetting of faults

Reset - Automatic

Enables automatic resetting of faults

Example
Use the

or the

arrow key to execute a value write command. When a value write command

executes, the lower case "v" next to the arrow becomes an upper case "V", as shown below, then quickly
returns to a lower case "v" after the command executes:

260

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Menu Structure (1-to-many)

Overview
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1-to-many menu structure is hierarchical in its design and consists of 6 levels
of individual pages. The upper menu structure levels provide information and commands for the HMI itself
and for all LTM R controllers connected to the HMI. The lower menu structure levels provide settings,
statistics and commands for a selected LTM R controller.
Menu Structure Outline
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1-to-many menu structure presents the following outline of levels and pages:
Level

Pages

Description

Home page

The starting page navigation to all other pages begins here. Opens on
start-up when no faults exist.

Controller currents page

Displays average current as a percent of FLC for every LTM R

controller.
Provides a link to each LTM R controllers menu structure.

Controller status page

Displays operating status (On, Off, Fault) for every LTM R controller.
Provides a link to each LTM R controllers menu structure.

Fault pages

Displays a series of pages, each page describing an active fault. Opens

automatically when a fault exists.

Remote reset page

Executable commands for the remote reset of each LTM R controller.

Reset to defaults page

Executable commands to reset statistics or settings for each LTM R

controller.

XBTN reference page

Describes communication settings, application program file,

programming software version, and HMI firmware version.

Controller page

For a selected LTM R controller:

Displays dynamically changing parameter values
Self Test command
Links to its settings, statistics and Product ID information.

4, 5, 6

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Settings page and sub-pages

Contains configurable settings for a selected LTM R controller

Statistics page and sub-pages

Presents statistics for a selected LTM R controller, including fault n-0

and fault n-1 history.

Product ID page

LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module part and firmware

identification.

261

Use

Menu Structure - Home Page (1-to-many)

Overview
The Home Page opens on HMI start-up, when the Magelis XBTN410 is connected to 1 or more LTM R
controllersall of which are running without faults or warnings.
The Home page is the only page located in level 1 of the Magelis XBTN410 1-to-many menu structure. It
is the starting place for navigation to all other levels and pages in the menu structure.
Home Page
The Home page contains the following menu items:
Menu item

Description
Page header with LTM R controller firmware version.
VX.X
IMPORTANT

Links to a page with the following CAUTION message: Please set HMI
Port Endianess to LEndian to ensure that all values are correctly
displayed.

Controller currents

Links to a page that displays average current and provides links to data and
commands for each LTM R controller.

Controller status
Faults
Remote Reset

262

Links to a page that displays status (On, Off, Fault) and provides links to
data and commands for each LTM R controller.
Displays a series of fault messages.
Links to a page that displays the status of each LTM R controller; and
provides a reset command for each LTM R controller.

Reset to defaults

Links to a page with commands that reset to factory settings each LTM R
controllers statistics or settings.

XBTN Reference

Links to a page that describes communication speed and parity,

programming software and LTM R controller firmware.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Menu Structure - All LTM R Controllers and the HMI (1-to-many)

Overview
Pages located in level 2 of the menu structure contain:

information and commands for up to 8 connected LTM R controllers, or

fault information for all LTM R controller, or
information about the Magelis XBTN410 HMI

All level 2 menu structure pages are accessible from the Home page.
Controller Currents Page
Use the Controller Currents page to monitor the Average Current Ratio for all connected LTM R controllers,
and to navigate to other pages as described below:
Level 2

Description
Controller Currents

I1=XXXX%

I5=XXXX%

I2=XXXX%

I6=XXXX%

I3=XXXX%

I7=XXXX%

I4=XXXX%

Opens the Controller page for the selected LTM R controller (1-8).

I8=XXXX%
Controller status
Remote reset
Home

Opens the Controller Status page.

Opens the Remote Reset page.
Returns to the Home page.

Controller Status Page

Use the Controller Status page to monitor the System On and System Fault status of all connected LTM R
controllers, and to navigate to other pages as described below:
Level 2

Description
Controller Status

1:Off

5:OffFLT

2:Off

6:On

3:On FLT

7:Off

4:Off

Opens the Controller page for the selected controller (1-8).

8:Off
Controller currents
Remote reset
Home

Opens the Controller Currents page.

Opens the Remote Reset page.
Returns to the Home page.

Faults Display
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays active faults in a series of pages1 fault to a pagewhen:

a fault occurs, and the display of active faults automatically opens

you select Faults in the Home page and manually open the display of active faults.

For information about fault management, including the faults display pages, see Fault Management (1-tomany), page 277.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

263

Use

Remote Reset Page

Use the Remote Reset page to remotely execute a Fault Reset Command for a faulted LTM R controller
for controllers with Fault Reset Mode set to Remote, and to navigate to other pages:
Level 2

Description
Remote Reset

01FLT023

067FLT50

02FLT034

078FLT60

03FLT045

089FLT70

04FLT056

090FLT80

Executes a Fault Reset Command for the selected LTM R

controller (1-8) if remote fault reset is enabled for that controller.

Controller currents

Opens the Controller Currents page.

Controller status

Opens the Controller Status page.

Home

Returns to the Home page.

Each of the first 4 lines of this page provides the following fault reset information at the indicated locations:

1
2
3
4

fault reset bit (not significant)

LTM R controller number (18)
fault status (ON, OFF, FLT)
time to reset (seconds)

Reset to Defaults Page

The Reset to Defaults page provides the Clear Statistics Command and the Clear Controller Settings
Command for each LTM R controller, as displayed below:
Level 2

Description
Reset to defaults

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Stats

Settings

Clears statistics (left arrows) or settings (right arrows) for the

selected LTM R controller (1-8), and restores factory settings.

XBTN Reference Page

The XBTN Reference page provides information about the HMI. The following is an example of information
displayed in this page:
Level 2

Parameter name / description

XBTN Reference

MB Speed=
MB Parity=

19200
Even

LTM_1T8_E_Vx.xx.DOP

264

HMI Port Baud Rate Setting

HMI Port Parity Setting
file name for the HMI application program

XX/XX/200X

xx:xx:xx

XBT-L1000=

V 4.42

date of the HMI application program file

version of the XBT 1000 software

Firmware=

V 3.1

version of the HMI firmware

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Controller Page (1-to-many)

Overview
The Controller page presents information and commands for the LTM R controller that was selected in
either the Controller Currents page or the Controller Status page (see Controller Currents Page,
page 263).
The Controller page is the only page located in level 3 of the menu structure.
Use the Controller page to:

monitor dynamically changing current, voltage, and power values for a single, selected LTM R controller
navigate to editable parameter settings for an LTM R controller
navigate to read-only statistics and product information for an LTM R controller
execute the Self Test command for an LTM R controller

Controller Page
The Controller page displays dynamically changing parameter values, and contains the command lines,
as follows:
Level 3

Parameter name / Description

Page header indicating LTM R controller address (18).

Avg Current= xxxx%FLC

Average Current Ratio

L1 Current= xxxx%FLC

L1 Current Ratio

L2 Current= xxxx%FLC

L2 Current Ratio

L3 Current= xxxx%FLC

L3 Current Ratio

GRCurr= xxxx.x%FLCmin

Ground Current Ratio

Curr Ph Imb= xxx%Imb

Current Phase Imbalance

Th Capacity= xxxxx%

Thermal Capacity Level

Time To Trip= xxxxSec

Time To Trip

Avg Voltage= xxxx%FLCmin

Average Voltage

L1-L2 Volts= xxxxxV

L1-L2 Voltage

L2-L3 Volts= xxxxxV

L2-L3 Voltage

L3-L1 Volts= xxxxxV

L3-L1 Voltage

Volt Ph Imb= xxx%Imb

Voltage Phase Imbalance

Power Factor= xx.xx

Power Factor

Active Pwr= xxxx.xkW

Active Power

React Pwr= xxxx.xkVAR

Reactive Power

Temp Sensor= xxxx.x

Motor Temp Sensor

Settings

Links to editable settings for the LTM R controller.

Statistics

Links to read-only statistics for the LTM R controller.

Self Test v

Executes the Self Test command. See Self Test with Motor On, page 344.

Product ID

Links to product reference numbers and firmware versions for the LTM R
controller and expansion module.

Home

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Returns to the Home page.

265

Use

Settings (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides several pages of editable parameter settings, nested in levels 4, 5
and 6 of the menu structure. The settings page is your starting place for locating and editing settings,
including:

motor
local control
transfer mode
reset (fault)
current
voltage
power
load shed
rapid cycle lockouts
communication loss

The settings page is located in level 4 of the menu structure. To navigate to the settings page, use one of
the following paths:
Level

From this page...

Select...

Home page

Controller currents, or Controller status

Controller Currents page, or Controller Status page LTM R controller number

Controller page

Settings

Motor, Control, and Transfer Settings

Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following motor, local control and transfer mode settings:
Level 4

Level 5

Settings Addr. 1-8

Motor

266

Parameter name

Nom Voltage

Motor Nominal Voltage

Nom Power (kW)

Motor Nominal Power (expressed in kW)

Nom Power (hp)

Motor Nominal Power (expressed in hp)

DirTrans

Control Direct Transition

TransTime

Motor Transition Timeout

2step Level

Motor Step 1 to 2 Threshold

2step Time

Motor Step 1 to 2 Timeout

Aux Fan

Motor Auxiliary Fan Cooled

TEMP SENSOR

Fault

Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable

Fault Level

Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold

Warn

Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable

Warn Level

Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold

Local Control

Control Local Channel Setting

Transfer Mode

Control Transfer Mode

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Fault Reset Settings

Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following fault reset settings:
Level 4

Level 5

Settings Addr.1-8
Reset

Parameter name

Manual

Fault Reset Mode

Remote
Automatic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Net Port

Network Port Endian Setting

AUTO GROUP 1

Attempts

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting

Reset Time

Auto-Reset Group 1 Timeout

AUTO GROUP 2

Attempts

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting

Reset Time

Auto-Reset Group 2 Timeout

AUTO GROUP 3

Attempts

Auto-Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting

Reset Time

Auto-Reset Group 3 Timeout

267

Use

Current Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following current settings:
Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Parameter name

Fault

Thermal Overload Fault Enable

FLC1-OC1

Motor Full Load Current Ratio

FLC2-OC2

Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio

Settings Addr.1-8
Current

Th Overload

Phase Imb/Loss/Rev

Long Start

Jam

268

Trip Class

Motor Trip Class

Reset Level

Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold

Def O-Time

Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout (O-Time)

Def D-Time

Long Start Fault Timeout (D-Time)

Warn

Thermal Overload Warning Enable

Warn Level

Thermal Overload Warning Threshold

CURR PH IMB

Fault

Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable

Fault Level

Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold

FltTimeStrt

Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting

FltTimeRun

Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running

Warn

Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable

Warn Level

Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold

CURR PH LOSS

Fault

Current Phase Loss Fault Enable

Fault Time

Current Phase Loss Timeout

Warn

Current Phase Loss Warning Enable

CURR PH REV

Fault

Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable

Fault

Long Start Fault Enable

Fault Level

Long Start Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Long Start Fault Timeout

Fault

Jam Fault Enable

Fault Level

Jam Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Jam Fault Timeout

Warn

Jam Warning Enable

Warn Level

Jam Warning Threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Settings Addr.1-8
Current
Under/Over Curr
(continued)

Ground Current

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameter name

UNDER CURR

Fault

Undercurrent Fault Enable

Fault Level

Undercurrent Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Undercurrent Fault Timeout

Warn

Undercurrent Warning Enable

Warn Level

Undercurrent Warning Threshold

OVER CURR

Fault

Overcurrent Fault Enable

Fault Level

Overcurrent Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Overcurrent Fault Timeout

Warn

Overcurrent Warning Enable

Warn Level

Overcurrent Warning Threshold

Fault

Ground Current Mode

IntFltLvl

Internal Ground Current Fault Threshold

IntFltTime

Internal Ground Current Fault Timeout

ExtFltLvl

External Ground Current Fault Threshold

ExtFltTime

External Ground Current Fault Timeout

Warn

Ground Current Warning Enable

IntWarnLvl

Internal Ground Current Warning Threshold

ExtWarnLvl

External Ground Current Warning Threshold

269

Use

Voltage Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following voltage settings:
Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Parameter name

VOLT PH IMB

Settings Addr.1-8
Voltage

Phase Imb/Loss/Rev

Under/Over Voltage

270

Fault

Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable

Fault Level

Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold

FltTimeStart

Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting

FltTimeRun

Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running

Warn

Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable

Warn Level

Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold

VOLT PH LOSS

Fault

Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable

Fault Time

Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout

Warn

Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable

VOLT PH REV

Fault

Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable

UNDER VOLT

Fault

Undervoltage Fault Enable

Fault Level

Undervoltage Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Undervoltage Fault Timeout

Warn

Undervoltage Warning Enable

Warn Level

Undervoltage Warning Threshold

OVER VOLT

Fault

Overvoltage Fault Enable

Fault Level

Overvoltage Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Overvoltage Fault Timeout

Warn

Overvoltage Warning Enable

Warn Level

Overvoltage Warning Threshold

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Power Settings
From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following power settings:
Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Parameter name

UNDER POWER

Settings Addr.1-8
Power

Under/Over Power

Under/Over PowFact

Fault

Underpower Fault Enable

Fault Level

Underpower Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Underpower Fault Timeout Starting

Warn

Underpower Warning Enable

Warn Level

Underpower Warning Threshold

OVER POWER

Fault

Overpower Fault Enable

Fault Level

Overpower Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Overpower Fault Timeout

Warn

Overpower Warning Enable

Warn Level

Overpower Fault Enable

UNDER POW FACTOR

Fault

Under Power Factor Fault Enable

Fault Level

Under Power Factor Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Under Power Factor Fault Timeout

Warn

Under Power Factor Warning Enable

Warn Level

Under Power Factor Warning Threshold

OVER POW FACTOR

Fault

Over Power Factor Fault Enable

Fault Level

Over Power Factor Fault Threshold

Fault Time

Over Power Factor Fault Timeout

Warn

Over Power Factor Warning Enable

Warn Level

Over Power Factor Warning Threshold

Load Shed, Diagnostic, Rapid Cycle Lockouts, Communication Ports Settings

From the settings page, you can navigate to and edit the following load shed, diagnostic, rapid cycle
lockout, and communication ports settings:
Level 4

Level 5

Parameter name

Fault

Load Shedding

Settings Addr.1-8
Load Shed

Diagnostic

Fault Level

Voltage Dip Threshold

Fault Time

Load Shedding Timeout

RestartLvl

Voltage Dip Restart Threshold

RestartTime

Voltage Dip Restart Timeout

DIAG FAULT
Fault

Diagnostic Fault Enable

Warn

Diagnostic Warning Enable

WIRING CT REVERSAL
Fault
Rapid Cycle Lockout Time

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring fault enable

Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout

271

Use

Level 4

Level 5

Settings Addr.1-8
Comm Ports

272

Parameter name

Net Port

Network Port Endian Setting

HMI Port

HMI Port Endian Setting

NET PORT COMM LOSS

Fault

Network Port Fault Enable

Fault Time

Network Port Comm Loss Timeout

Warn

Network Port Warning Enable

HMI PORT COMM LOSS

Fault

HMI Port Fault Enable

Warn

HMI Port Warning Enable

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Statistics (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides read-only statistics pagesnested in levels 4 and 5 of the menu
structurefor a selected LTM R controller.
To navigate to the statistics page, use one of the following paths:
Level

From this page...

Select...

Home page

Controller currents, or Controller status

Controller Currents page, or Controller Status

page

LTM R controller number

Controller page

Statistics

Statistics
From the settings page, you can navigate to and read the following statistics:
Level 4

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Level 5

Parameter name

Statistics Addr. 1-8

CntrlTempMax

Controller Internal Temperature Max

OperTime

Operating Time

MtrStarts

Motor Starts Count

LastStartDur

Motor Last Start Duration

LastStart

Motor Last Start Current

All Faults

Faults Count

Th Ovld Flt

Thermal Overload Faults Count

Th Ovld Warn

Thermal Overload Warnings Count

Curr Imb Flt

Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count

LongStart Flt

Long Start Faults Count

UnderCurr Flt

Undercurrent Faults Count

Ground Faults

Ground Current Faults Count

VoltPhImb Flt

Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count

Under Volt Flt

Undervoltage Faults Count

Over Volt Flt

Overvoltage Faults Count

HMI Loss Flt

HMI Port Faults Count

Ntwk Int Flt

Network Port Internal Faults Count

Ntwk Cnfg Flt

Network Port Config Faults Count

Ntwk Port Flt

Network Port Faults Count

Cntrl Int Flt

Controller Internal Faults Count

InterPort Flt

Internal Port Faults Count

273

Use

Level 4

Level 5

Statistics Addr. 1-8

Fault n-0

Fault n-1

274

Parameter name

Fault Code

Fault Code n-0

Date (MMDDYYYY)

Date And Time n-0

Time (HHMMSS)

Date And Time n-0

FLC Ratio

Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-0

FLC Max

Motor Full Load Current Max n-0

Avg Current

Average Current n-0

L1 Current

L1 Current Ratio n-0

L2 Current

L2 Current Ratio n-0

L3 Current

L3 Current Ratio n-0

GRCurr

Ground Current Ratio n-0

Curr Ph Imb

Current Phase Imbalance n-0

Th Capacity

Thermal Capacity Level n-0

Avg Volts

Average Voltage n-0

L1-L2 Volts

L1-L2 Voltage n-0

L2-L3 Volts

L2-L3 Voltage n-0

L3-L1 Volts

L3-L1 Voltage n-0

Volt Ph Imb

Voltage Phase Imbalance n-0

Frequency

Frequency n-0

Active Pwr

Active Power n-0

Power Factor

Power Factor n-0

Temp Sensor

Motor Temp Sensor n-0

Fault Code

Fault Code n-1

Date (MMDDYYYY)

Date And Time n-1

Time (HHMMSS)

Date And Time n-1

FLC Ratio

Motor Full Load Current Ratio n-1

FLC Max

Motor Full Load Current Max n-1

Avg Current

Average Current n-1

L1 Current

L1 Current Ratio n-1

L2 Current

L2 Current Ratio n-1

L3 Current

L3 Current Ratio n-1

GRCurr

Ground Current Ratio n-1

Curr Ph Imb

Current Phase Imbalance n-1

Th Capacity

Thermal Capacity Level n-1

Avg Volts

Average Voltage n-1

L1-L2 Volts

L1-L2 Voltage n-1

L2-L3 Volts

L2-L3 Voltage n-1

L3-L1 Volts

L3-L1 Voltage n-1

Volt Ph Imb

Voltage Phase Imbalance n-1

Frequency

Frequency n-1

Active Pwr

Active Power n-1

Power Factor

Power Factor n-1

Temp Sensor

Motor Temp Sensor n-1

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Product ID (1-to-many)
Overview
The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides a description of the product number and firmware for both the
LTM R controller and LTM E expansion module.
To navigate to the Product ID page, use one of the following paths:
Level

From this page...

Select...

Home page

Controller currents, or Controller status

Controller Currents page, or Controller Status

page

LTM R controller number

Controller page

Product ID

Product ID
In the Product ID page, you can read the following information about the LTM R controller and LTM E
expansion module:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Level 4

Parameter name / description

Product ID Addr. 1-8

Controller Catalog Ref

Controller Commercial Reference (product number)

Controller Firmware

Controller Firmware Version

Exp Module Catalog Ref

Expansion Commercial Reference (product number)

Exp Module Firmware

Expansion Firmware Version

Network Type

Network Port ID Code

Network Firmware

Network Port Firmware Version

275

Use

Monitoring (1-to-many)
Overview
Use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI, in a 1-to-many configuration, to monitor:

operating status and average current for multiple LTM R controllers, or

current, voltage and power parameters for a selected LTM R controller.

Monitoring Multiple LTM R Controllers

Navigate to the following pages to simultaneously monitor these dynamically changing values for all LTM R
controllers:
Page

Value

Controller currents page

Average current ratio

Controller status page

Operating status (On, Off, Fault)

For more information on both pages, see Controller Currents Page, page 263.
Monitoring a Single LTM R Controller
Navigate to the Controller page for a selected LTM R controller to monitor the dynamically changing values
of the following parameters:

Current:
Average Current Ratio
L1 Current Ratio
L2 Current Ratio
L3 Current Ratio
Ground Current Ratio
Current Phase Imbalance

Thermal
Thermal Capacity Level
Time To Trip
Motor Temp Sensor

Voltage
Average Voltage
L1-L2 Voltage
L2-L3 Voltage
L3-L1 Voltage
Voltage Phase Imbalance

Power
Power Factor
Active Power
Reactive Power

For more information on the Controller page, see Controller Page (1-to-many), page 265.

276

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Fault Management (1-to-many)

Overview
When a fault occurs, the Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically opens a fault display, consisting of 1 page
for each active fault. Each page contains the:

fault name
address of the LTM R controller experiencing the fault
total number of unresolved faults

Fault Display Pages

A typical fault display page looks like this:

1
2
3
4

fault display page number

total number of active faults
fault name (flashing)
address of LTM R controller experiencing the fault (flashing)

If more than 1 fault is active, use the

and

keypad buttons to move back and forth through the

fault display pages.

Because some fault messages contain more than 4 lines of text, you may need to use the

and

keypad buttons to scroll up and down within a fault display page and display the entire fault message.
Opening / Closing the Fault Display
The 1-to-many HMI automatically opens the fault display whenever a fault occurs. When you remove the
cause of a specific fault and execute a fault reset command, that fault no longer appears in the fault display.
You can also close the fault display by clicking the

ESC

keypad button. This does not fix the underlying

cause of any fault, nor it does not clear any fault. You can re-open the fault display at any time by navigating
to the Home page, scrolling to the Faults command line, then clicking the

keypad button.

If you open the fault display when no faults are active, the HMI displays the message "No Faults Present".
Magelis XBT Communication Loss
If a key is pressed while the Magelis XBT HMI device loses communication, the keypad update will not
be complete. When the communication with the LTM R is back, the following message displays: "#203
Cannot connect to controller". Press any key or power cycle the device.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

277

Use

Service Commands (1-to-many)

Overview
The Magelis XBTN410, in 1-to-many configuration, provides the following service commands:

278

Command

Description

Location / Reference

Self Test

Performs an internal check of the

LTM R controller and LTM E
expansion module.

Level 3, Controller page. See Controller Page,

page 265 and Self Test with Motor On,
page 344.

Reset to Defaults: Statistics

Executes the Clear Statistics

Command for a selected LTM R
controller.

Level 2, Reset to Defaults page. See Reset to

Defaults Page, page 264.

Reset to Defaults: Settings

Executes the Clear Controller

Settings Command for a selected
LTM R controller.

Level 2, Reset to Defaults page. See Reset to

Defaults Page, page 264.

Remote Reset

Performs remote fault reset for a

selected LTM R controller

Level 2, Remote Reset page. See Remote

Reset Page, page 264.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Section 7.5
Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

Overview
The following topics show you how to use the LTM R controller when it is connected to a PC running
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

280

Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library

281

279

Use

Presentation of SoMove with the TeSys T DTM

Aim of the Software
SoMove software is a Microsoft Windows-based application, using the open FDT/DTM technology.
SoMove contains DTMs for different devices. The TeSys T DTM is a specific DTM that enables the
configuration, monitoring, control, and customization of the control functions of the LTM R controller, as
part of the TeSys T motor management system.
Functions
The TeSys T DTM can be used to:
configure parameters for the LTM R controller,
display information about the LTM R controller configuration and operation,
display the status of detected faults and warnings in the LTM R controller,
control the motor,
customize operating modes.

For More Information

See the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT Container Online Help embedded in the DTM software.

280

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Installing SoMove and the TeSys DTM Library

Overview
The installation of SoMove includes some DTMs such as the TeSys DTM library.
The TeSys DTM library includes:
TeSys T DTM
TeSys U DTM
These DTM are automatically installed during the SoMove installation process.
Downloading SoMove
SoMove can be downloaded from the Schneider Electric website (www.schneider-electric.com) by
entering SoMove Lite in the Search field.
Installing SoMove
Step

Action

Unzip the downloaded file: the SoMove file is unzipped in a folder named SoMove_Lite - V.X.X.X.X
(where X.X.X.X is the version number). Open this folder and double-click setup.exe.

In the Choose Setup Language dialog box, select the installation language.

Click OK.

In the Welcome to the Installation Wizard for SoMove Lite dialog box, click the Next button.

If an Install Shield Wizard dialog box appears and informs you that you must install Modbus driver,
click the Install button.
Result: Modbus driver is installed automatically.

In the Readme and Release Notes dialog box, click the Next button.

In the Readme dialog box, click the Next button.

In the License Agreement dialog box:

Read carefully the license agreement.
Select I accept the terms in the license agreement option.
Click the Next button.

In the Customer Information dialog box:

Enter the following information in the corresponding fields:
First name
Last name
Company name
Select an installation option:
Either the Anyone who uses this computer option if SoMove Lite is used by all users of this

computer, or
Only for me if SoMove Lite is used only by you.
Click the Next button.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

10

In the Destination Folder dialog box:

If necessary, modify the SoMove Lite destination folder by clicking the Change button.
Click the Next button.

11

In the Shortcuts dialog box:

If you want to create a shortcut on the desktop and/or in the quick launch bar, select the
corresponding options.
Click the Next button.

12

In the Ready to Install the Program dialog box, click the Install button.
Result: The SoMove Lite components are installed automatically:
Modbus communication DTM library which contains the communication protocol
DTM libraries which contain different drive catalogs
SoMove Lite itself

13

In the Installation Wizard Completed dialog box, click the Finish button.
Result: SoMove Lite is installed on your computer.

281

Use

Section 7.6
Using the PROFIBUS DP Communication Network

Using the PROFIBUS DP Communication Network

Overview
This section describes how to use the LTM R controller via the network port using the PROFIBUS DP
protocol.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL

The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and,
for certain critical functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure.
Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop and overtravel stop.
Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the
implications of anticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.(1)
Each implementation of an LTM R controller must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper
operation before being placed into service.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
(1) For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), "Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control".

WARNING
UNEXPECTED RESTART OF THE MOTOR
Check that the PLC application software:

considers the change from local to remote control,

manages appropriately the motor control commands during those changes.

When switching to the Network control channels, depending on the communication protocol
configuration, the LTM R controller can take into account the latest known state of the motor control
commands issued from the PLC and restart automatically the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
What Is in This Section?
This section contains the following topics:
Topic

282

Page

PROFIBUS DP Protocol Principle and Main Features

284

General Information on Implementation via PROFIBUS DP

285

Configuration of the LTM R PROFIBUS DP Network Port

286

Modules as Presented in the GS*-File

287

PROFIBUS DP Configuration via the SyCon Configuration Tool

288

PROFIBUS DP Profile

290

Cyclic Data Description

292

PKW: Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP V0

298

Acyclic Data Read/Write via PROFIBUS DP V1

300

Diagnostic Telegram for PROFIBUS DP

303

User Map Variables (User Defined Indirect Registers)

305

Register Map (Organization of Communication Variables)

306

Data Formats

307

Data Types

308

Identification Variables

314

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Statistics Variables

315

Monitoring Variables

321

Configuration Variables

327

Command Variables

334

User Map Variables

335

Custom Logic Variables

336

Identification and Maintenance Functions (IMF)

337

283

Use

PROFIBUS DP Protocol Principle and Main Features

Overview
PROFIBUS DP is an open industrial standard for integrated communication. It is a serial fieldbus, which
provides a decentralized connection between sensors, actuators and I/O modules produced by various
manufacturers, and connects them to the superset control level.
PROFIBUS DP (Distributed Periphery - Master/Slave Network) is a PROFIBUS communication profile
which is optimized for performance. It is optimized for speed, efficiency and inexpensive hook-up cost and
is designed especially for communication between automation systems and distributed peripheral
equipment.
The PROFIBUS DP network supports multiple master systems with several slaves.
The PROFIBUS DP protocol is a master-slave protocol:

PROFIBUS DP Features
The following table contains specifications of the PROFIBUS DP:

284

Standard

EN 501 70
DIN 19245

Transmission Equipment (Physical Profile)

EIA RS-485

Transfer Procedure

half-duplex

Bus Topology

linear bus with active bus termination

Bus Cable Type

shielded, twisted pair conductors

Connector

SUB-D 9-pin
open style

Number of Nodes on the Bus

maximum of 32 with no repeaters

maximum of 125 with 3 repeaters in 4
segments

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

General Information on Implementation via PROFIBUS DP

Overview
The PROFIBUS DP LTM R controller supports a PROFIBUS DP application profile based on DP V0 and
DP V1 services: Motor Management Starter (MMS).
Cyclic/ Acyclic Services
In general, data is exchanged via cyclic services and via acyclic services.
The application profiles define, for the cyclic data:

manufacturer independent data,

manufacturer specific data.

The fixed set and defined use of manufacturer independent data enables the replacement of a module from
vendor A by a module from vendor B.
DP V1 Read/ Write Services
DP V1 read and write services enable access to the data that cannot be accessed by cyclic data exchange.
PKW Feature
In order to make this data accessible also for DP V0 masters, a special feature, called PKW (Periodically
Kept in acyclic Words), is implemented.
In cyclically exchanged data, there are encapsulated request and response frames. They provide access
to TeSys T systems internal registers.
See Fallback Condition, page 47.
NOTE: This feature can be selected or deselected by choosing the relevant item (module) from the list
offered during configuration with any PROFIBUS DP configuration tool.
Failsafe Option
The LTM R controller supports the failsafe option. When the PROFIBUS DP master is in Clear Mode, the
LTM R controller generates a communication fault, if enabled, and applies its fallback condition
(see page 47).
As soon as PROFIBUS DP data packets are received, the LTM R controller removes its fallback condition.
NOTE: Clear Mode is only applied by the PROFIBUS DP master on DP V0 output data packets. Get
Diagnostics packets, SYNC packets, DP V1 packets are not impacted by Clear Mode. For this reason, if
communication fault is enabled, as for other faults, the LTM R controller O.4 output (fault relay) must be
used in the wiring diagram.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

285

Use

Configuration of the LTM R PROFIBUS DP Network Port

Communication Parameters
Use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to configure the PROFIBUS DP communication parameters:
Network port address setting
Network port baud rate setting
Configuration channel setting
Setting the Node-ID
The Node-ID is the address of the module on the PROFIBUS DP bus. You can assign an address from 1
to 125. The factory setting for the address is 126.
You must set the Node-ID before any communication can begin. Use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to
configure the communication parameter Network Port Address Setting.
NOTE: Address 0 is an invalid value and is not permitted. A return to factory settings command sets the
Node-ID to the invalid value 126.
Setting the Baud Rate
Set the baud rate to the only possible speed: 65,535 = Autobaud.
Use the TeSys T DTM or the HMI to configure the communication parameter Network Port Baud Rate
Setting.
The factory setting for the Network Port Baud Rate Setting parameter is Autobaud (0xFFFF). Using
Autobaud, the LTM R Controller adapts its baud rate to that of the master.
Setting the Configuration Channel
The LTM R configuration can be managed:
locally through the HMI port using the TeSys T DTM or the HMI
remotely through the network.

To manage the configuration locally, the Config via Network Port Enable parameter must be disabled
to prevent an overwrite of the configuration through the network.
To manage the configuration remotely, the Config via Network Port Enable parameter must be enabled
(factory setting).

286

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Modules as Presented in the GS*-File

Overview
The TeSys T system is presented as a "modular device" on PROFIBUS DP.
You must select one of the following modules with/without PKW during configuration.
The TeSys T system is described by a GS*-file. This file will be used by any PROFIBUS DP configuration
tool to get information about the device.
GS*-Files
The file for the PROFIBUS DP LTM R is called CCCCCC.GS*. The *-mark will be replaced for example by
E for English, F for French, G for German, and so on (D for Default).

For the GSx files 2.01, CCCCCC stands for SE210B48.GSx.

For the GSx files 2.02, CCCCCC stands for SE220B48.GSx.

The GS*-files and icons associated with the LTM R can be downloaded from schneider-electric.com
website (Products and Services > Automation and Control > Product offers > Motor control > TeSys T >
Downloads > Software/Firmware > EDS files > EDS&GSD for TeSys T). GS*-files and icons are grouped
in a single compressed Zip file that you must unzip to a single directory on your hard disk drive.

DANGER
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not modify the GS*-.file in any way.
Modifying the GS*-file can cause unpredictable behavior of the devices.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NOTE: If the GS*-file is modified in any way, the Schneider Electric guarantee is immediately voided.
Modules without PKW
Short and long description of modules without PKW:
Short Description as shown in the GSD

Long Description

MMC R

Motor Management Controller, remote configuration mode

MMC R EV40

Motor Management Controller, LTM EV40, remote configuration mode

MMC L

Motor Management Controller, local configuration mode

MMC L EV40

Motor Management Controller, LTM EV40, local configuration mode

In local configuration mode, the parameter Config via Network Port Enable must be disabled. This mode
preserves the local configuration made via the HMI port.
In remote configuration mode, the parameter Config via Network Port Enable must be enabled. This
mode enables the configuration of the MMC through the network.
Modules without PKW exchange cyclically 10 input bytes (5 input words) and 6 output bytes (3 output
words).
Modules with PKW
Short and long description of modules with PKW:
Short Description as shown in
the GSD

Long Fescription

MMC R PKW

Motor Management Controller, remote configuration mode with PKW

MMC R PKW EV40

Motor Management Controller, LTM EV40, remote configuration mode with PKW

MMC L PKW

Motor Management Controller, local configuration mode with PKW

MMC L PKW EV40

Motor Management Controller, LTM EV40, local configuration mode with PKW

PKW feature is implemented to allow acyclic read or write access to any register using cyclic data. They
are useful with Master DP V0.
Module with PKW exchange cyclically 18 input bytes (9 input words) and 14 output bytes (7 output words).

1639502EN-04 09/2014

287

Use

PROFIBUS DP Configuration via the SyCon Configuration Tool

Introduction
With SyCon software, you can configure the PROFIBUS DP network and generate an ASCII file to import
into the PLC configuration into Unity Pro (or PL7 or Concept).
Network conditions
The network conditions for the example are
protocol: PROFIBUS DP
address: 4
baud rate: 3 Mb/s
Configuration of a TeSys T System
Example of a network configuration:
Step

Action

Import your GSD file with File Copy GSD.

Select the path where GS*-files have been unzipped and click OK.

Insert a master:
click Insert Master..., or

select

Select the network speed:

click Settings Bus Parameter Baud rate
select the baud rate adapted to the transmission speed of your application (e.g. 3000 kBaud).
The PROFIBUS DP slaves adapt automatically their baud rate to the master baud rate.

In the Insert Master window, select a master (e.g. TSX PBY 100) from the Available masters list.
Press the Add>> button and confirm with OK.

Insert a slave:
click Insert Slave..., or

select

288

In the Insert Slave window, select LTM R - TeSys T Profibus from the Available slaves list.
Press the Add>> button and confirm with OK. The following view appears:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Step
8

Action
Select Slave1 and double-click to open the Slave Configuration:
Set Station address (e.g. to 4).
Change the factory setting of the Description (e.g. to MMC_4).
Select the correct module from the list:

Note:
Refer to Modules as Presented in the GS*-File, page 287.
Go on with steps 9 to 12 if a Remote (R) configuration mode has been selected.
9

Click the Parameter Data... button to open the Parameter Data window.

10

Click the Module button to open the corresponding Parameter Data window and set the parameter
values.

11

Double-click one of the available parameters (e.g. the Fallback strategy). An additional selection
table opens, allowing you to change the parameter value:

Click OK.
12

Click the OK button of each open dialog window to confirm the selected parameter values.

Save and Export the Network Configuration

Save and export the configuration for importation into the PLC configuration (PL7, Concept or Unity Pro).
Step

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Action

Select File Save As to open the Save as window.

Choose the Project path and a File name and click Save (extension .pb).

Select File Export ASCII to export the configuration as an ASCII file (extension .cnf).

Import the PROFIBUS DP configuration into the PLC configuration (PL7, Concept or Unity Pro).

289

Use

PROFIBUS DP Profile
Introduction
The LTM R controller is compliant with the Motor Management Starter (MMS) device class according to
the Low Voltage Switchgear (LSVG) PROFIBUS DP profile.
The cyclic data of these devices uses edge triggered signals.
Operational States
The following diagram gives the operational states of the Motor Management Starter in normal operation.

NOTE: The pulse width must be more than 1 s.

Sequence

Description

Device switched off (no current, no internal stored switch-on command)

REVERSE/FORWARD command activated

1.1

- actual or internal stored switch-on command activated

1.2

- after a delay time, current will be measured

1.3

- a measured current in addition to the actual or internal stored switch-on command

(RUN REVERSE/FORWARD) impacts the confirmation signal RUN FORWARD/REVERSE

OFF command activated

2.1

- the confirmation signal RUN FORWARD/REVERSE will be set back

2.2

- after a motor stop, no current will be measured

2.3

- no current and no (internal) stored switch-on command impacts the OFF signal

Type and Size of Cyclic Data

The size and type of the cyclic data exchanged depend on whether modules with PKW are selected or not
during configuration.
The table below indicates the size and type of cyclic data for each module.

without
PKW

Module

Inputs

Outputs

MMC R

10 status bytes
(= 4 status words)

6 command bytes
(= 3 command words)

10 status bytes
(= 4 status words)
+ 8 PKW in bytes
(= 4 PKW in words)

6 command bytes
(= 3 command words)
+ 8 PKW out bytes
(= 4 PKW out words)

MMC R EV40
MMC L
MMC L EV40

with
PKW

MMC R PKW
MMC R PKW EV40
MMC L PKW
MMC L PKW EV40

The 8 status bytes and 6 command bytes are common to all modules.
Modules with PKW exchange 8 additional bytes dedicated to PKW function (PKW: Encapsulated Acyclic
Accesses in DP V0, page 298).

290

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Cyclic Data Format

Depending on the PLC platform used, cyclic data bytes are seen and organized differently.
To make easier LTM R setup, cyclic data are described according to the following formats:
byte format (used by Siemens PLCs for example)
word little endian format (used by Premium PLCs for example)
word big endian format (used by Siemens PLCs for example)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

291

Use

Cyclic Data Description

Introduction
The tables below give a description of the different cyclic data types in byte format and word format (little
endian and big endian):
Status: input data
Command: output data
PKW IN: input data (available only in word format)
PKW OUT: output data (available only in word format)
Cyclic Data in Byte Format
Cyclic data types in byte format are:
Status: input data
Command: output data
Status input data in byte format: Input 0 to Input 9
Position

Description

Input 0.0
Run Reverse

The main circuit contacts are closed.

Input 0.1
Off

Indication that the device is in the OFF state.

Input 0.2
Run Forward

The main circuit contacts are closed.

Input 0.3
Thermal Overload Warning

An overload warning condition exists.

(461.3)

Input 0.4
Lockout Time

Communication status register high byte (456.4)

Input 0.5
Auto Mode

Indication to a remote host controller that the RUN FORWARD,

RUN REVERSE and STOP commands will or will not be accepted.
0 = LOCAL CONTROL
1 = AUTO MODE

Input 0.6
System Fault

A fault condition exists.

(455.2)

Input 0.7
System Warning

A warning condition exists.

(455.3)

Input 1.0 to 1.3

Reserved

Reserved

Input 1.4
System Ready

Ready
(455.0)

Input 1.5
Motor Ramping

Motor ramping: start in progress

(455.15)

Input 1.6
Motor Running

Motor running: current > 10% FLC

(455.7)

Input 1.7
System tripped

System tripped
(455.4)

Input 2

Iav average current - MSB

Input 3

Iav average current - LSB

Input 4
Logic Inputs 9-16 of expansion module

Logic inputs status

high byte
(457.8-15)

Logic inputs status

Input 5
Logic Inputs 1-6 of LTM R controller + inputs 7- low byte
(457.0-7)
8 of expansion module
Input 6
Reserved

292

Logic outputs status

high byte
(458.8-9)
(458.10-15 are not significant)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Position

Description

Input 7
Status of logic outputs 13, 23, 33, and 95

Logic outputs status

low byte
(458.0-3)
(458.4-7 are not significant)

Input 8
(456.8) Network port comm loss
(456.9) Motor lockout
(456.10-15) Reserved

System status register 2

high byte
(456.8-15)

Input 9
(456.0) Auto reset active
(456.1) Reserved
(456.2) Fault power cycle requested
(456.3) Motor restart time undefined
(456.4) Rapid cycle lockout
(456.5) Load shedding
(456.6) Motor high speed
(456.7) HMI port comm loss

System status register 2

low byte
(456.0-7)

Command output data in byte format: Output 0 to Output 5

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Position

Description

Output 0.0
Run Reverse

Instructs the starter to energize the motor in the reverse direction.

Output 0.1
Off

Instructs the device to go to the OFF state.

0 = ENABLE RUN FORWARD/ RUN REVERSE
1 = OFF

Output 0.2
Run Forward

Instructs the starter to energize the motor in the forward direction.

Output 0.3
Self Test Command

Instructs the device to initiate an internal test routine within the device.
(704.5)

Output 0.4
Clear Thermal Capacity Level
Command

Reset thermal memory

Instructs the starter to override any fault condition and allows starting.
(705.2)
Note: This command inhibits thermal protection. Continued operation with
inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate
restart is vital. By setting this bit to 1, the thermal state of the motor is lost: the
thermal protection will no longer protect an already warm motor.

Output 0.5
Reserved

Reserved

Output 0.6
Fault Reset Command

Trip reset
Instructs the starter to reset all resettable trips (one of the preconditions for
READY).
(704.3)

Output 0.7
Reserved

Reserved

Output 1.0 to 1.4

Reserved

Reserved

Output 1.5
Motor Low Speed Command

Low speed (704.6)

Output 1.6 to 1.7

Reserved

Reserved

Output 2
Additional Output

Analog output (to manage by custom logic, future extension)

(706.8-15)

Output 3
Additional Output

Analog output (to manage by custom logic, future extension)

(706.0-7)

Output 4
Additional Output

Logic outputs command register

high byte
(700.8-15: Reserved)

Output 5
Additional Output

Logic outputs command register

low byte
(700.0-3: associated to Output 1 to 4 if custom logic manages it)
(700.4-15: Reserved)

293

Use

Cyclic Data in Word Little Endian Format

Cyclic data types in Word little endian format are:
Status: input data
PKW IN: input data
Command: output data
PKW OUT: output data
Status input data in word little endian format: IW 0 to IW 4
Word arrangement
IW 0

MSB

LSB

IW 1

IW 2

IW 3

IW 4

bit 15

System tripped (455.4)

bit 14

Motor running (455.7)

bit 13

Motor starting (455.15)

bit 12

System ready (455.0)

bit 8 to bit 11

Reserved

bit 7

System warning (455.3)

bit 6

System fault (455.2)

bit 5

Auto mode

bit 4

Lock out time

bit 3

Thermal overload warning (461.3)

bit 2

Run Forward

bit 1

Off

Input 1

Input 0

bit 0

Run Reverse

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

IAV average current % FLC LSB

466.0 to 466.7

Input 3

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

IAV average current % FLC MSB

466.8 to 466.15

Input 2

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Logic inputs status LSB

457.0 to 457.7
Inputs 1-6 of controller
Inputs 7-8 of expansion module

Input 5

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Logic inputs status MSB

457.8 to 457.15
Inputs 9-16 of expansion module
(11-16 future extension)

Input 4

MSB

bit 12 to bit 15

Outputs 5-8 of expansion module

(future extension)
458.4 to 458.7

Input 7

bit 11

Logic output 95 status (458.3)

bit 10

Logic output 33 status (458.2)

bit 9

Logic output 23 status (458.1)

bit 8

Logic output 13 status (458.0)

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Outputs 9-16 of expansion module

(future extension)
458.8 to 458.15

Input 6

MSB

bit 15

HMI port comm loss (456.7)

Input 9

bit 14

Motor high speed (456.6)

bit 13

Load shedding (456.5)

LSB

294

Byte N

bit 12

Rapid cycle lockout (456.4)

bit 11

Motor restart time undefined (456.3)

bit 10

Fault power cycle requested (456.2)

bit 9

Reserved (456.1)

bit 8

Auto reset active (456.0)

bit 2 to bit 7

Reserved (456.10 to 456.15)

bit 1

Motor transition lockout (456.9)

bit 0

Network port comm loss (456.8)

Input 8

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

PKW IN input data in word little endian format: IW 5 to IW 8 (supported by modules with PW)
Word arrangement
IW 5
IW 6

IW 7
IW 8

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Object address MSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Object address LSB

MSB

bit 15

Toggle bit

bit 8 to bit 14

Function

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Not used: 0x00

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data read in register 1 MSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data read in register 1 LSB

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data read in register 2 MSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data read in register 2 LSB

Command output data in word little endian format: QW 0 to QW 2

Word arrangement
QW 0

MSB

LSB

QW 1

QW 2

Byte N
bit 14 to bit 15

Reserved

bit 13

Motor low speed command (704.6)

bit 8 to bit 12

Reserved

bit 7

Reserved

bit 6

Fault reset command

bit 5

Auto mode

bit 4

Clear thermal capacity level command (705.2)

bit 3

Self test command (704.5)

bit 2

Run Reverse

Output 1

Output 0

bit 1

Off

bit 0

Run Reverse

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Analog output LSB (future extension)

706.0 to 7

Output 3

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Analog output MSB (future extension)

706.8 to 15

Output 2

MSB

bit 9 to bit 15

logic output command register LSB

700.4 to 7
Outputs 5 to 8 (future extension)

Output 5

bit 8 to 11

logic output command register LSB

700.0 to 3
Outputs 1 to 4 (13, 23, 33, 95) if custom logic
manages it

bit 0 to bit 7

logic output command register MSB

700.8 to 15
Outputs 9 to 16 (future extension)

LSB

Output 4

PKW OUT output data in word little endian format: QW 3 to QW 6 (supported by modules with PW)
Word arrangement
QW 3
QW 4

QW 5
QW 6

1639502EN-04 09/2014

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Object address MSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Object address LSB

MSB

bit 15

Toggle bit

bit 8 to bit 14

Function

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Not used: 0x00

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data write in register 1 MSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data write in register 1 LSB

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data write in register 2 MSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data write in register 2 LSB

295

Use

Cyclic Data in Word Big Endian Format

Cyclic data types in Word big endian format are:
Status: input data
PKW IN: input data
Command: output data
PKW OUT: output data
Status input data in word big endian format: IW 0 to IW 4
Word arrangement
IW 0

MSB

LSB

IW 1

IW 2

IW 3

IW 4

bit 15

System warning (455.3)

bit 14

System fault (455.2)

bit 13

Auto mode

bit 12

Lock out time

bit 11

Thermal overload warning (461.3)

bit 10

Run Forward

bit 9

Off

bit 8

Run Reverse

bit 7

System tripped (455.4)

bit 6

Motor running (455.7)

bit 5

Motor ramping (455.15)

bit 4

System ready (455.0)

Input 0

Input 1

bit 0 to 3

Reserved

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

IAV average current % FLC MSB

466.8 to 466.15

Input 2

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

IAV average current % FLC LSB

466.0 to 466.7

Input 3

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Logic input status MSB

457.8 to 15
Inputs 9-16 of expansion module
(11-16 future extension)

Input 4

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Logic input status LSB

457.0 to 457.7
Inputs 1-6 of controller
Inputs 7-8 of expansion module

Input 5

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Outputs 9-16 of expansion module

(future extension)
458.8 to 458.15

Input 6

LSB

bit 4 to bit 7

Outputs 5-8 of expansion module

(future extension)
458.4 to 458.7

Input 7

bit 3

Logic output 95 status (458.3)

bit 2

Logic output 33 status (458.2)

bit 1

Logic output 23 status (458.1)

bit 0

Logic output 13 status (458.0)

bit 10 to bit 15

Reserved (456.10 to 456.15)

MSB

LSB

296

Byte N

bit 9

Motor transition lockout (456.9)

bit 8

Network port comm loss (456.8)

bit 7

HMI port comm loss (456.7)

bit 6

Motor high speed (456.6)

bit 5

Load shedding (456.5)

bit 4

Rapid cycle lockout (456.4)

bit 3

Motor restart time undefined (456.3)

bit 2

Fault power cycle requested (456.2)

bit 1

Reserved (456.1)

bit 0

Auto reset active (456.0)

Input 8

Input 9

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

PKW IN input data in word big endian format: IW 10 to IW 16 (supported by modules with PW)
Word arrangement
IW 10
IW12

IW 14
IW 16

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Object address LSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Object address MSB

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Not used: 0x00

LSB

bit 7

Toggle bit

bit 0 to bit 6

Function

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data read in register 1 LSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data read in register 1 MSB

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data read in register 2 LSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data read in register 2 MSB

Command output data in word big endian format: QW 0 to QW 4

Word arrangement
QW 0

MSB

QW 4

Reserved

bit 14

Fault reset command

bit 13

Auto mode

bit 12

Clear thermal capacity level command (705.2)

bit 11

Self test command (704.5)

bit 10

Run Reverse

bit 9

Off

Output 0

bit 8

Run Reverse

bit 6 to bit 7

Reserved

bit 5

Motor low speed command (704.6)

bit 0 to bit 4

Reserved

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Analog output MSB (future extension)

706.8 to 15

Output 2

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Analog output LSB (future extension)

706.0 to 7

Output 3

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

logic output command register MSB

700.8 to 15
Outputs 9 to 16 (future extension)

Output 4

LSB

bit 4 to bit 7

logic output command register LSB

700.4 to 7
Outputs 5 to 8 (future extension)

Output 5

bit 0 to 3

logic output command register LSB

700.0 to 3
Outputs 1 to 4 (13, 23, 33, 95) if custom logic
manages it

LSB

QW 2

Byte N
bit 15

Output 1

PKW OUT output data in word big endian format: QW 6 to QW 12 (supported by modules with PW)
Word arrangement
QW 6
QW 8

QW 10
QW 12

1639502EN-04 09/2014

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Object address LSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Object address MSB

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Not used: 0x00

LSB

bit 7

Toggle bit

bit 0 to bit 6

Function

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data write in register 1 LSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data write in register 1 MSB

MSB

bit 8 to bit 15

Data write in register 2 LSB

LSB

bit 0 to bit 7

Data write in register 2 MSB

297

Use

PKW: Encapsulated Acyclic Accesses in DP V0

Overview
Some PROFIBUS DP masters do not provide DP V1 services. The PKW feature is implemented to allow
acyclic read or write accesses to be encapsulated in DP V0.
This feature is enabled in the PROFIBUS DP configuration tool by selecting the appropriate module. For
each module, a second entry with PKW exists.
The PKW data is added to the cyclic data.
Read/Write Registers
With the PKW data, you can read or write any register. The 8 bytes are interpreted as a request telegram
or a response telegram encapsulated in IN data and OUT data.
PKW OUT Data
PKW OUT Data request (PROFIBUS DP Master LTM R) are mapped in modules supporting PKW.
To access a register, you must select 1 of the following function codes:
R_REG_16 = 0x25 to read 1 register
R_REG_32 = 0x26 to read 2 registers
W_REG_16 = 0x2A to write 1 register
W_REG_32 = 0x2B to write 2 registers.

Register numbers are given in Register Map (Organization of Communication Variables), page 306.
Word 1

Word 2

Word 3

Register address Toggle bit

(bit 15)

Function bits
(bits 8 to 14)

Not used
(bits 0 to 7)

Register number

R_REG_16
Code 0x25

0x00

0/1

Word 4
Data to write

R_REG_32
Code 0x26

W_REG_16
Code 0x2A

Data to write in
register

W_REG_32
Code 0x2B

Data to write in
register 1

Data to write in
register 2

Depending on the PLC platform used, refer to the PKW OUT description in Little and Big endian formats
to know the positioning of each field inside each word.
Any changes in the function field will trigger the handling of the request (except if Function code = 0x00).
Toggle bit must change at each consecutive request. This mechanism allows the request initiator to detect
that a response is ready by polling the toggle bit in response. When this bit in the OUT data becomes equal
to the response emitted toggle bit in the IN data, then the response is ready.
PKW IN Data
PKW IN Data Response (LTM R PROFIBUS DP Master) are mapped in modules supporting PKW. The
LTM R echoes the same register address and function code or eventually an error code:
Word 1

Word 2

Register address Toggle bit

(bit 15)
Same register
number as in
request

298

Same as request

Word 3

Function bits
(bits 8 to 14)

Not used
(bits 0 to 7)

ERROR
Code 0x4E

0x00

Word 4
Data to write
Error code

R_REG_16
Code 0x25

Data read in
register

R_REG_32
Code 0x26

Data read in
register 1

Data read in
register 2

W_REG_16
Code 0x2A

W_REG_32
Code 0x2B

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Depending on the PLC platform used, refer to the PKW IN description in Little and Big endian formats to
know the positioning of each field inside each word.
If the initiator tries to write a TeSys T object or register to an unauthorized value, or tries to access an
inaccessible register, an error code is answered (Function code = toggle bit + 0x4E). The exact error code
can be found in words 3 and 4. The request is not accepted and the object or register remains at the old
value.
If you want to re-trigger exactly the same command, you must:
reset the Function code to 0x00,
wait for the response frame with the function code equal to 0x00, then
set it again to its previous value.
This is useful for a limited master like an HMI.
Another way of re-triggering exactly the same command is to:
invert the toggle bit in the function code byte.
The response is valid when the toggle bit of the response is equal to the toggle bit written in the answer
(this is a more efficient method, but it requires higher programming capabilities).
PKW Error Codes
Case of a write error:
Error Code Error Name

Explanation

FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL

external request: sends back an error frame

FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND

register not managed (or the request needs super user

access rights)

FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED

external request: answer postponed

FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND

one or both registers cannot be found

FGP_ERR_READ_ONLY

register not authorized to be written

10

FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOHIGH

written value not in the range of the register (word

value is too high)

11

FGP_ERR_VAL_1WORD_TOOLOW

written value not in the range of the register (word

value is too low)

12

FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOHIGH

written value not in the range of the register (MSB

value is too high)

13

FGP_ERR_VAL_2BYTES_INF_TOOLOW

written value not in the range of the register (MSB

value is too low)

16

FGP_ERR_VAL_INVALID

written value not a valid value

20

FGP_ERR_BAD_ANSWER

external request: sends back an error frame

Case of a read error:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Error Code Error Name

Explanation

FGP_ERR_REQ_STACK_FULL

external request: sends back an error frame

FGP_ERR_REGISTER_NOT_FOUND

register not managed (or the request needs super user

access rights)

FGP_ERR_ANSWER_DELAYED

external request: answer postponed

FGP_ERR_NOT_ALL_REGISTER_FOUND

one or both registers cannot be found

299

Use

Acyclic Data Read/Write via PROFIBUS DP V1

Overview
For Acyclic DP V1 access, a mechanism based on slot/index and length-addressing is implemented in the
LTM R controller.
NOTE: All accessible registers are described in the Communication variable tables. They are organized in
groups (Identification variables, Statistics variables,...) and sub-groups, if necessary.
Variables are accessed every 10 registers. You cannot access registers located between 2 sub-groups. If
the access is not possible, no register is accessed and an error value (e.g. "not all registers found") will be
returned via DP V1.
Reading Acyclic Data (DS_Read)
With DS_Read function, the PROFIBUS DP master can read data from the slave. Below is the contents of
a frame that is to be sent:
Byte

Syntax

0 [Function Number]

0x5E [DS_Read Function]

1 [Slot Number]

Constant value = 1

2 [Index]

Register address / 10
Common access to registers is every 10 registers.
The index is always rounded down to an integer.

3 [Length]

Length of data blocks in bytes

(Number of registers) x 2
Maximum number of registers = 20 (40 bytes)
Any length between 2 and 40 bytes is possible.

4 to (length + 3)

Block of data bytes to be read.

DS_Read Example
Example: Reading of Identification registers 50 to 62
Byte

Value

0 [Function Number]

0x5E [DS_Read Function]

1 [Slot Number]

2 [Index]

5 [50/10]

3 [Length]

26 [(50 to 62 = 13) x 2]

4 to 29

Value of registers 50 to 62

Sending Acyclic Data (DS_Write)

With DS_Write function, the PROFIBUS DP master can send data to the slave.
Before writing a block of data, it is recommended to read a block of data first, in order to protect data that
is not impacted. The whole block will only be written if you have writing rights, to be checked within each
register table in the Communication variables tables. Column 3 table headers indicate if the variables
within each table are Read-only or Read/Write.
Below is the contents of a frame that is to be sent:

300

Byte

Syntax

0 [Function Number]

0x5F [DS_Write Function]

1 [Slot Number]

Constant value = 1

2 [Index]

Register address / 10
Common access to registers is every 10 registers.
The index is always rounded down to an integer.

3 [Length]

Length of data blocks in bytes

(Number of registers) x 2
Maximum number of registers = 20 (40 bytes)
Any length between 2 and 40 bytes is possible.

4 to (length + 3)

Block of data bytes to be written.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

DS_Write Example: Process Description

Example: Resetting a fault by setting bit 704.3 to 1
1. Read 700 to 704
Byte

Value

0 [Function Number]

0x5E [DS_Read Function]

1 [Slot Number]

2 [Index]

70 [700/10]

3 [Length]

10 [(700 to 704 = 5) x 2]

4 to 13

Current values of registers 700 to 704

2. Set bit 3 of register 704 to 1

3. Write the registers 700 to 704
Byte

Value

0 [Function Number]

0x5F [DS_Write Function]

1 [Slot Number]

2 [Index]

70 [700/10]

3 [Length]

10 [(700 to 704 = 5) x 2]

4 to 13

New values of registers 700 to 704

Feedback in Case of Error

If the access is not possible, no register is accessed and an error value will be returned via DP V1.
The first 4 bytes of the response on DP in the case of an error are as follows:
Byte

Value

Meaning

0xDE/ 0xDF

for DS_Read / DS_Write

0x80

indicating DP V1

0xB6

error class + error code1 = access denied

0xXX

error code 2, LTM R specific (see following table)

Below is Error Code 2, LTM R Specific:

Error Code 2

Meaning

01

Internal stack request full

03

Register not managed or super user access rights needed

06

Register defined but not written

07

Not all registers found

08

Registers not authorized to be written

10

Written value outside the register range, word value too large (too high)

11

Written value outside the register range, word value too small (too low)

12

Written value outside the register range (MSB value too large)

13

Written value outside the register range (MSB value too small)

14

Written value outside the register range (LSB value too large)

15

Written value outside the register range (LSB value too small)

16

Written value not a valid value

20

Module rejects, sends back an error frame

255

Internal error

The presentation of an error code and an error class to the user logic depends on the master implementation (for example, the PLC).
The mechanism only accesses blocks of parameters starting at a dedicated parameter (MB address). This
means that unused parameters (MB addresses) are also accessed. The data value read from theses
parameters is 0x00; but in case of writing, it is necessary to write the value 0x00 to these parameters.
Otherwise, the complete write access will be rejected.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

301

Use

TeSys T Internal Registers

For more details about the TeSys T internal registers, refer to the Communication Variables tables.

302

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Diagnostic Telegram for PROFIBUS DP

Overview
A Diagnostic Telegram is sent by the LTM R controller when:
there is a change of node address,
a system falldown situation is detected,
an error or a warning occurs.
The maximum length of a diagnostic telegram is equal to 36 bytes. This information is useful for
PROFIBUS DP master configuration.
Byte 0-9
DP V0 Byte

DP V1 Byte Byte Name

Description

0-5

0-5

PROFIBUS DP standard
diagnostic data

Header byte

Device-related diagnostic with length including

header

PROFIBUS DP firmware

PROFIBUS DP firmware version, high byte

PROFIBUS DP firmware

PROFIBUS DP firmware version, low byte

PROFIBUS DP firmware

PROFIBUS DP firmware version, test version

DP V1: 0x81= Status, Type: Diagnostic Alarm

DP V1: slot number, e.g. 0x01

DP V1: 0x81= Status, Type: Diagnostic Alarm

DP V0 / DP V1 Byte

Byte Name

Description

10

Manufacturer Specific ID

Module identifier:

Byte 10-13

31: LTM R controller only

32: LTM R controller with expansion module
11

1639502EN-04 09/2014

PROFIBUS DP device status

12

PROFIBUS DP error byte

13

PROFIBUS DP information and

error byte

State of the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus handler

11.0

Local / remote
0 = PROFIBUS DP parameters
have priority
1 = Locally set parameters have
priority

11.1 - 11.6

Reserved

11.7 = 1

PROFIBUS DP application profile:

1 = motor management starter

Report errors with internal communication

13.0

1 = an attempt to write setting

registers from a PROFIBUS DP
parameter frame was received
when the motor was running

13.1

1 = writing values from a

PROFIBUS DP parameter frame
failed even when the motor was
not running

13.2

1 = an internal error occurred

during the generation of the
PROFIBUS DP diagnostic frame

13.3

1 = the internal cyclic data

exchange (callback) failed

13.4

1 = system falldown was detected

13.5

1 = node address has changed

303

Use

Byte 14-35
DP V0 / DP V1 Byte

Byte Name

Description

14

Register 455 (455.8 - 455.15)

Monitoring of status

15

Register 455 (455.0 - 455.7)

16

Register 456 (456.8 - 456.15)

17

Register 456 (456.0 - 456.7)

18

Register 457 (457.8 - 457.15)

19

Register 457 (457.0 - 457.7)

20

Register 460 (460.8 - 460.15)

21

Register 460 (460.0 - 460.7)

22

Register 461 (461.8 - 15)

23

Register 461 (461.0 - 461.7)

24

Register 462 (462.8 - 462.15)

25

Register 462 (462.0 - 462.7)

26

Reserved

Monitoring of warnings

27
28

Register 451 (451.8 - 451.15)

29

Register 451 (451.0 - 451.7)

30

Register 452 (452.8 - 452.15)

31

Register 452 (452.0 - 452.7)

32

Register 453 (453.8 - 453.15)

33

Register 453 (453.0 - 453.7)

34

Reserved

Monitoring of faults

35

NOTE: For descriptions of registers, see the Communication Variables tables, introduced in Register Map
(Organization of Communication Variables), page 306.

304

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

User Map Variables (User Defined Indirect Registers)

Overview
User Map variables are designed to optimize the access to several non-contiguous registers in one single
request.
You can define several read and write areas.
The user map can be defined via:
a PC running SoMove with TeSys T DTM
a PLC via the network port
User Map Variables
User Map variables are divided into 2 groups:
User Map Addresses

800 to 898

User Map Values

900 to 998

The User Map Address group is used to select a list of addresses to read or write. It can be considered as
a configuration area.
The User Map Value group is used to read or write values associated to addresses configured in the User
Map Address area:

Read or write of register 900 allows to read or write the register address defined in register 800
Read or write of register 901 allows to read or write the register address defined in register 801,...

Example of Use
The User Map Address configuration below gives an example of user map address configuration to access
non-contiguous registers:
User Map Address Register

Value Configured

Register

800

452

Fault register 1

801

453

Fault register 2

802

461

Warning register 1

803

462

Warning register 2

804

450

Minimum wait time

805

500

Average current (0.01 A) MSW

806

501

Average current (0.01 A) LSW

850

651

HMI display items register 1

851

654

HMI display items register 2

852

705

Control register 2

With this configuration, monitoring information is accessible with one single read request through register
addresses 900 to 906.
Configuration and command can be written with one single write using registers 950 to 952.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

305

Use

Register Map (Organization of Communication Variables)

Introduction
Communication variables are listed in tables, according to the group (such as identification, statistics, or
monitoring) to which they belong. They are associated with an LTM R controller, which may or may not
have an LTM E Expansion Module attached.
Communication Variable Groups
Communication variables are grouped according to the following criteria:
Variable groups

Registers

Identification variables

00 to 99

Statistics variables

100 to 449

Monitoring variables

450 to 539

Configuration variables

540 to 699

Command variables

700 to 799

User Map variables

800 to 999

Custom Logic variables

1200 to 1399

Table Structure
Communication variables are listed in 4-column tables:
Column 1
Register (in decimal
format)

Column 2
Variable type (see Data
Types, page 308)

Column 4
Column 3
Note: code for additional
Variable name and access
via Read-only or Read/Write information
Modbus requests

Note
The Note column gives a code for additional information.
Variables without a code are available for all hardware configurations, and without functional restrictions.
The code can be:
numerical (1 to 9), for specific hardware combinations
alphabetical (A to Z), for specific system behaviors.
If the note is...

Then the variable is...

available for the LTM R + LTM EV40 combination

always available but with a value equal to 0 if no LTM EV40 is connected

3-9

Not used

If the note is...

Then...

the variable can be written only when the motor is off(1)

the variable can be written only in configuration mode (e.g. static characteristics)(1)

the variable can be written only with no fault(1)

D-Z

Not used

(1) Restrictions A, B and C may apply only to bits, not to whole registers. If you try to write a value when a restriction
is applied, the bit will not be changed and no exception code will be returned. Exception codes are returned at register
level, not at bit level.

Unused Addresses
Unused addresses fall into 3 categories:
Not significant, in Read-only tables, means that you should ignore the value read, whether equal to 0
or not.
Reserved, in Read/Write tables, means that you must write 0 in these variables.
Forbidden, means that read or write requests are rejected, that these addresses are not accessible at
all.

306

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Data Formats
Overview
The data format of a communication variable can be integer, Word, or Word[n], as described below. For
more information about a variable size and format, see Data Types, page 308.
Integer (Int, UInt, DInt, IDInt)
Integers fall into the following categories:
Int: signed integer using one register (16 bits)
UInt: unsigned integer using one register (16 bits)
DInt: signed double integer using 2 registers (32 bits)
UDInt: unsigned double integer using 2 registers (32 bits)
For all integer-type variables, the variable name is completed with its unit or format, if necessary.
Example:
Address 474, UInt, Frequency (x 0.01 Hz).
Word
Word: Set of 16 bits, where each bit or group of bits represents command, monitoring or configuration
data.
Example:
Address 455, Word, System Status Register 1.
bit 0

System ready

bit 1

System on

bit 2

System fault

bit 3

System warning

bit 4

System tripped

bit 5

Fault reset authorized

bit 6

(Not significant)

bit 7

Motor running

bits 8-13

Motor average current ratio

bit 14

Control via HMI

bit 15

Motor starting (in progress)

Word[n]
Word[n]: Data encoded on contiguous registers.
Examples:
Addresses 64 to 69, Word[6], Controller Commercial Reference (DT_CommercialReference
(see page 308)).
Addresses 655 to 658, Word[4], (DT_DateTime (see page 309)).

1639502EN-04 09/2014

307

Use

Data Types
Overview
Data types are specific variable formats which are used to complement the description of internal formats
(for instance, in case of a structure or of an enumeration). The generic format of data types is DT_xxx.
List of Data Types
Here is the list of the most commonly used data types:
DT_ACInputSetting
DT_CommercialReference
DT_DateTime
DT_ExtBaudRate
DT_ExtParity
DT_FaultCode
DT_FirmwareVersion
DT_Language5
DT_OutputFallbackStrategy
DT_PhaseNumber
DT_ResetMode
DT_WarningCode
These data types are described below.
DT_ACInputSetting
DT_ACInputSetting format is an enumeration that improves AC input detection:
Value

Description

None (factory setting)

< 170 V 50 Hz

< 170 V 60 Hz

> 170 V 50 Hz

> 170 V 60 Hz

DT_CommercialReference
DT_CommercialReference format is Word[6] and indicates a Commercial Reference:
Register

MSB

LSB

Register N

character 1

character 2

Register N+1

character 3

character 4

Register N+2

character 5

character 6

Register N+3

character 7

character 8

Register N+4

character 9

character 10

Register N+5

character 11

character 12

Example:
Addresses 64 to 69, Word[6], Controller Commercial Reference.
If Controller Commercial Reference = LTM R:
Register

MSB

LSB

64

65

(space)

66

67
68
69

308

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

DT_DateTime
DT_DateTime format is Word[4] and indicates Date and Time:
Register

Bits 12-15

Bits 8-11

Bits 4-7

Bits 0-3

Register N

Register N+1

Register N+2

Register N+3

Where:
S = second
The format is 2 BCD digits.
The value range is [00-59] in BCD.
0 = unused
H = hour
The format is 2 BCD digits.
The value range is [00-23] in BCD.
m = minute
The format is 2 BCD digits.
The value range is [00-59] in BCD.
M = month
The format is 2 BCD digits.
The value range is [01-12] in BCD.
D = day
The format is 2 BCD digits.
The value range is (in BCD):
[01-31] for months 01, 03, 05, 07, 08, 10, 12
[01-30] for months 04, 06, 09, 11
[01-29] for month 02 in a leap year
[01-28] for month 02 in a non-leap year.
Y = year
The format is 4 Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) digits.
The value range is [2006-2099] in BCD.
Data entry format and value range are:
Data entry format

DT#YYYY-MM-DD-HH:mm:ss

Minimum value

DT#2006-01-01:00:00:00

January 1, 2006

Maximum value

DT#2099-12-31-23:59:59

December 31, 2099

Note: If you give values outside the limits, the system will return an error.

Example:
Addresses 655 to 658, Word[4], Date and Time setting.
If date is September 4, 2008 at 7 a.m., 50 minutes and 32 seconds:
Register

15 12

11 8

74

30

655

656

657

658

With data entry format: DT#2008-09-04-07:50:32.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

309

Use

DT_ExtBaudRate
DT_ExtbaudRate depends on the bus used:
DT_ModbusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with Modbus network:
Value

Description

1200

1200 Baud

2400

2400 Baud

4800

4800 Baud

9600

9600 Baud

19200

19,200 Baud

65535

Autodetection (factory setting)

DT_ProfibusExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with PROFIBUS DP

network:
Value

Description

65535

Autobaud (factory setting)

DT_DeviceNetExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with DeviceNet network:

Value

Description

125 kBaud

250 kBaud

500 kBaud

Autobaud (factory setting)

DT_CANopenExtBaudRate format is an enumeration of possible baud rates with CANopen network:

Value

Description

10 kBaud

20 kBaud

50 kBaud

125 kBaud

250 kBaud (factory setting)

500 kBaud

800 kBaud

1000 kBaud

Autobaud

Factory setting

DT_ExtParity
DT_ExtParity depends on the bus used:
DT_ModbusExtParity format is an enumeration of possible parities with Modbus network:

310

Value

Description

None

Even

Odd

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

DT_FaultCode
DT_FaultCode format is an enumeration of fault codes:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Fault code

Description

No error

Ground current

Thermal overload

Long start

Jam

Current phase imbalance

Undercurrent

10

Test

11

HMI port error

12

HMI port communication loss

13

Network port internal error

16

External fault

18

On-Off diagnostic

19

Wiring diagnostic

20

Overcurrent

21

Current phase loss

22

Current phase reversal

23

Motor temp sensor

24

Voltage phase imbalance

25

Voltage phase loss

26

Voltage phase reversal

27

Undervoltage

28

Overvoltage

29

Underpower

30

Overpower

31

Under power factor

32

Over power factor

33

LTME configuration

34

Temperature sensor short-circuit

35

Temperature sensor open-circuit

36

CT reversal

37

Out of boundary CT ratio

46

Start check

47

Run checkback

48

Stop check

49

Stop checkback

51

Controller internal temperature error

55

Controller internal error (Stack overflow)

56

Controller internal error (RAM error)

57

Controller internal error (RAM checksum error)

58

Controller internal error (Hardware watchdog fault)

60

L2 current detected in single-phase mode

64

Non volatile memory error

65

Expansion module communication error

66

Stuck reset button

67

Logic function error

100-104

Network port internal error

109

Network port comm error

311

Use

Fault code

Description

111

Faulty device replacement fault

555

Network port configuration error

DT_FirmwareVersion
DT_FirmwareVersion format is an XY000 array that describes a firmware revision:
X = major revision
Y = minor revision.
Example:
Address 76, UInt, Controller firmware version.
DT_Language5
DT_Language5 format is an enumeration used for language display:
Language code

Description

English (factory setting)

Franais

Espaol

Deutsch

16

Italiano

Example:
Address 650, Word, HMI language.
DT_OutputFallbackStrategy
DT_OutputFallbackStrategy format is an enumeration of motor output states when loosing
communication.
Value

Description

Motor modes

Hold LO1 LO2

For all modes

Run

For 2-step mode only

LO1, LO2 Off

For all modes

LO1, LO2 On

Only for overload, independent and custom operating modes

LO1 On

For all modes except 2-step

LO2 On

For all modes except 2-step

DT_PhaseNumber
DT_PhaseNumber format is an enumeration, with only 1 bit activated:
Value

Description

1 phase

3 phases

DT_ResetMode
DT_ResetMode format is an enumeration of possible modes for thermal fault reset:

312

Value

Description

Manual or HMI

Remote by network

Automatic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

DT_WarningCode
DT_WarningCode format is an enumeration of warning codes:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Warning code

Description

No warning

Ground current

Thermal overload

Long start

Jam

Current phase imbalance

Undercurrent

10

HMI port

11

LTM R internal temperature

18

Diagnostic

19

Wiring

20

Overcurrent

21

Current phase loss

23

Motor temp sensor

24

Voltage phase imbalance

25

Voltage phase loss

27

Undervoltage

28

Overvoltage

29

Underpower

30

Overpower

31

Under power factor

32

Over power factor

33

LTM E configuration

46

Start check

47

Run checkback

48

Stop check

49

Stop checkback

109

Network port comm loss

555

Network port configuration

313

Use

Identification Variables
Identification Variables
Identification variables are described below:
Register

Variable type

0-34

Note,
page 306

(Not significant)

35-40

Word[6]

Expansion commercial reference

(See DT_CommercialReference, page 308)

41-45

Word[5]

Expansion serial number

46

UInt

Expansion ID code

47

UInt

Expansion firmware version

(See DT_FirmwareVersion, page 312)

48

UInt

Expansion compatibility code

61

Ulnt

Network port ID code

62

Ulnt

Network port firmware version

(See DT_FirmwareVersion, page 312)

63

Ulnt

Network port compatibility code

64-69

Word[6]

Controller commercial reference

(See DT_CommercialReference, page 308)

70-74

Word[5]

Controller serial number

75

Ulnt

Controller ID code

76

Ulnt

Controller firmware version

(See DT_FirmwareVersion, page 312)

77

Ulnt

Controller compatibility code

49-60

(Not significant)

78

Ulnt

Current scale ratio (0.1 %)

79

Ulnt

Current sensor max

Ulnt

Current range max (x 0.1 A)

95

Ulnt

Load CT ratio (x 0.1 A)

96

Ulnt

Full load current max (maximum FLC range, FLC = Full Load
Current) (x 0.1 A)

80
81

(Not significant)

82-94

97-99

314

Read-only variables

(Not significant)

(Forbidden)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Statistics Variables
Statistics Overview
Statistics variables are grouped according to the following criteria. Trip statistics are contained into a
main table and an extension table.
Statistics variable groups

Registers

Global statistics

100 to 121

LTM monitoring statistics

122 to 149

Last trip statistics

and extension

150 to 179
300 to 309

Trip n-1 statistics

and extension

180 to 209
330 to 339

Trip n-2 statistics

and extension

210 to 239
360 to 369

Trip n-3 statistics

and extension

240 to 269
390 to 399

Trip n-4 statistics

and extension

270 to 299
420 to 429

Global Statistics
The global statistics are described below:
Register

Variable type

100-101

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

(Not significant)

102

Ulnt

Ground current faults count

103

Ulnt

Thermal overload faults count

104

Ulnt

Long start faults count

105

Ulnt

Jam faults count

106

Ulnt

Current phase imbalance faults count

107

Ulnt

Undercurrent faults count

109

Ulnt

HMI port faults count

110

Ulnt

Controller internal faults count

111

Ulnt

Internal port faults count

112

Ulnt

(Not significant)

113

Ulnt

Network port config faults count

114

Ulnt

Network port faults count

115

Ulnt

Auto-resets count

116

Ulnt

Thermal overload warnings count

117-118

UDlnt

Motor starts count

119-120

UDlnt

Operating time (s)

121

lnt

Controller internal temperature max ( C)

315

Use

LTM Monitoring Statistics

The LTM monitoring statistics are described below:
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

122

Ulnt

Faults count

123

Ulnt

Warnings count

124-125

UDlnt

Motor LO1 closings count

126-127

UDlnt

Motor LO2 closings count

128

Ulnt

Diagnostic faults count

129

Ulnt

(Reserved)

130

Ulnt

Overcurrent faults count

131

Ulnt

Current phase loss faults count

132

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor faults count

133

Ulnt

Voltage phase imbalance faults count

134

Ulnt

Voltage phase loss faults count

135

Ulnt

Wiring faults count

136

Ulnt

Undervoltage faults count

137

Ulnt

Overvoltage faults count

138

Ulnt

Underpower faults count

139

Ulnt

Overpower faults count

140

Ulnt

Under power factor faults count

141

Ulnt

Over power factor faults count

142

Ulnt

Load sheddings count

143-144

UDlnt

Active power consumption (x 0.1 kWh)

1
1

145-146

UDlnt

Reactive power consumption (x 0.1 kVARh)

147

Ulnt

Auto restart immediate count

148

Ulnt

Auto restart delayed count

149

Ulnt

Auto restart manual count

Last Fault (n-0) Statistics

The last fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 300 to 310.
Register

316

Variable type

Read-only variables

150

Ulnt

Fault code n-0

151

Ulnt

Motor full load current ratio n-0 (% FLC max)

152

Ulnt

Thermal capacity level n-0 (% trip level)

153

Ulnt

Average current ratio n-0 (% FLC)

154

Ulnt

L1 current ratio n-0 (% FLC)

155

Ulnt

L2 current ratio n-0 (% FLC)

156

Ulnt

L3 current ratio n-0 (% FLC)

157

Ulnt

Ground current ratio n-0 (x 0.1 % FLC min)

158

Ulnt

Full load current max n-0 (x 0.1 A)

159

Ulnt

Current phase imbalance n-0 (%)

160

Ulnt

Frequency n-0 (x 0.1 Hz)

161

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor n-0 (x 0.1 )

162-165

Word[4]

Date and time n-0

(See DT_DateTime, page 309)

Note,
page 306

166

Ulnt

Average voltage n-0 (V)

167

Ulnt

L3-L1 voltage n-0 (V)

168

Ulnt

L1-L2 voltage n-0 (V)

169

Ulnt

L2-L3 voltage n-0 (V)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

170

Ulnt

Voltage phase imbalance n-0 (%)

171

Ulnt

Active power n-0 (x 0.1 kW)

172

Ulnt

Power factor n-0 (x 0.01)

173-179

(Not significant)

N-1 Fault Statistics

The n-1 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 330 to 340.
Register
180

Variable type
Ulnt

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Fault code n-1

181

Ulnt

Motor full load current ratio n-1 (% FLC max)

182

Ulnt

Thermal capacity level n-1 (% trip level)

183

Ulnt

Average current ratio n-1 (% FLC)

184

Ulnt

L1 current ratio n-1 (% FLC)

185

Ulnt

L2 current ratio n-1 (% FLC)

186

Ulnt

L3 current ratio n-1 (% FLC)

187

Ulnt

Ground current ratio n-1 (x 0.1 % FLC min)

188

Ulnt

Full load current max n-1 (x 0.1 A)

189

Ulnt

Current phase imbalance n-1 (%)

190

Ulnt

Frequency n-1 (x 0.1 Hz)

191

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor n-1 (x 0.1 )

192-195

Word[4]

Date and time n-1

(See DT_DateTime, page 309)

196

Ulnt

Average voltage n-1 (V)

197

Ulnt

L3-L1 voltage n-1 (V)

198

Ulnt

L1-L2 voltage n-1 (V)

199

Ulnt

L2-L3 voltage n-1 (V)

200

Ulnt

Voltage phase imbalance n-1 (%)

201

Ulnt

Active power n-1 (x 0.1 kW)

202

Ulnt

Power factor n-1 (x 0.01)

203-209

Ulnt

(Not significant)

N-2 Fault Statistics

The n-2 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 360 to 370.
Register
210

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Variable type
Ulnt

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Fault code n-2

211

Ulnt

Motor full load current ratio n-2 (% FLC max)

212

Ulnt

Thermal capacity level n-2 (% trip level)

213

Ulnt

Average current ratio n-2 (% FLC)

214

Ulnt

L1 current ratio n-2 (% FLC)

215

Ulnt

L2 current ratio n-2 (% FLC)

216

Ulnt

L3 current ratio n-2 (% FLC)

217

Ulnt

Ground current ratio n-2 (x 0.1 % FLC min)

218

Ulnt

Full load current max n-2 (x 0.1 A)

219

Ulnt

Current phase imbalance n-2 (%)

220

Ulnt

Frequency n-2 (x 0.1 Hz)

221

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor n-2 (x 0.1 )

317

Use

Register
222-225

Variable type
Word[4]

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Date and time n-2

(See DT_DateTime, page 309)

226

Ulnt

Average voltage n-2 (V)

227

Ulnt

L3-L1 voltage n-2 (V)

228

Ulnt

L1-L2 voltage n-2 (V)

229

Ulnt

L2-L3 voltage n-2 (V)

230

Ulnt

Voltage phase imbalance n-2 (%)

231

Ulnt

Active power n-2 (x 0.1 kW)

232

Ulnt

Power factor n-2 (x 0.01)

233-239

(Not significant)

N-3 Fault Statistics

The n-3 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 390 to 400.
Register
240

Variable type
Ulnt

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Fault code n-3

241

Ulnt

Motor full load current ratio n-3 (% FLC max)

242

Ulnt

Thermal capacity level n-3 (% trip level)

243

Ulnt

Average current ratio n-3 (% FLC)

244

Ulnt

L1 current ratio n-3 (% FLC)

245

Ulnt

L2 current ratio n-3 (% FLC)

246

Ulnt

L3 current ratio n-3 (% FLC)

247

Ulnt

Ground current ratio n-3 (x 0.1 % FLC min)

248

Ulnt

Full load current max n-3 (0.1 A)

249

Ulnt

Current phase imbalance n-3 (%)

250

Ulnt

Frequency n-3 (x 0.1 Hz)

251

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor n-3 (x 0.1 )

252-255

Word[4]

Date and time n-3

(See DT_DateTime, page 309)

256

Ulnt

Average voltage n-3 (V)

257

Ulnt

L3-L1 voltage n-3 (V)

258

Ulnt

L1-L2 voltage n-3 (V)

259

Ulnt

L2-L3 voltage n-3 (V)

260

Ulnt

Voltage phase imbalance n-3 (%)

261

Ulnt

Active power n-3 (x 0.1 kW)

262

Ulnt

Power factor n-3 (x 0.01)

263-269

(Not significant)

N-4 Fault Statistics

The n-4 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 420 to 430.
Register
270

318

Variable type
Ulnt

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Fault code n-4

271

Ulnt

Motor full load current ratio n-4 (% FLC max)

272

Ulnt

Thermal capacity level n-4 (% trip level)

273

Ulnt

Average current ratio n-4 (% FLC)

274

Ulnt

L1 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)

275

Ulnt

L2 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)

276

Ulnt

L3 current ratio n-4 (% FLC)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

277

Ulnt

Ground current ratio n-4 (x 0.1 % FLC min)

278

Ulnt

Full load current max n-4 (x 0.1 A)

279

Ulnt

Current phase imbalance n-4 (%)

280

Ulnt

Frequency n-4 (x 0.1 Hz)

Note,
page 306

281

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor n-4 (x 0.1 )

282-285

Word[4]

Date and time n-4

(See DT_DateTime, page 309)

286

Ulnt

Average voltage n-4 (V)

287

Ulnt

L3-L1 voltage n-4 (V)

288

Ulnt

L1-L2 voltage n-4 (V)

289

Ulnt

L2-L3 voltage n-4 (V)

290

Ulnt

Voltage phase imbalance n-4 (%)

291

Ulnt

Active power n-4 (x 0.1 kW)

292

Ulnt

Power factor n-4 (x 0.01)

293-299

(Not significant)

Last Fault (n-0) Statistics Extension

The last fault main statistics are listed at addresses 150-179.
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

300-301

UDlnt

Average current n-0 (x 0.01 A)

302-303

UDlnt

L1 current n-0 (x 0.01 A)

304-305

UDlnt

L2 current n-0 (x 0.01 A)

306-307

UDlnt

L3 current n-0 (x 0.01 A)

308-309

UDlnt

Ground current n-0 (mA)

310

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor degree n-0 ( C)

Note,
page 306

N-1 Fault Statistics Extension

The n-1 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 180-209.
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

330-331

UDlnt

Average current n-1 (x 0.01 A)

332-333

UDlnt

L1 current n-1 (x 0.01 A)

334-335

UDlnt

L2 current n-1 (x 0.01 A)

336-337

UDlnt

L3 current n-1 (x 0.01 A)

338-339

UDlnt

Ground current n-1 (mA)

340

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor degree n-1 ( C)

Note,
page 306

N-2 Fault Statistics Extension

The n-2 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 210-239.
Register

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Variable type

Read-only variables

360-361

UDlnt

Average current n-2 (x 0.01 A)

362-363

UDlnt

L1 current n-2 (x 0.01 A)

364-365

UDlnt

L2 current n-2 (x 0.01 A)

366-367

UDlnt

L3 current n-2 (x 0.01 A)

368-369

UDlnt

Ground current n-2 (mA)

370

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor degree n-2 ( C)

Note,
page 306

319

Use

N-3 Fault Statistics Extension

The n-3 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 240-269.
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

390-391

UDlnt

Average current n-3 (x 0.01 A)

392-393

UDlnt

L1 current n-3 (x 0.01 A)

394-395

UDlnt

L2 current n-3 (x 0.01 A)

396-397

UDlnt

L3 current n-3 (x 0.01 A)

398-399

UDlnt

Ground current n-3 (mA)

400

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor degree n-3 ( C)

Note,
page 306

N-4 Fault Statistics Extension

The n-4 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 270-299.
Register

320

Variable type

Read-only variables

420-421

UDlnt

Average current n-4 (x 0.01 A)

422-423

UDlnt

L1 current n-4 (x 0.01 A)

424-425

UDlnt

L2 current n-4 (x 0.01 A)

426-427

UDlnt

L3 current n-4 (x 0.01 A)

428-429

UDlnt

Ground current n-4 (mA)

430

Ulnt

Motor temperature sensor degree n-4 ( C)

Note,
page 306

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Monitoring Variables
Monitoring Overview
Monitoring variables are grouped according to the following criteria:
Monitoring variable groups

Registers

Monitoring of faults

450 to 454

Monitoring of status

455 to 459

Monitoring of warnings

460 to 464

Monitoring of measurements

465 to 539

Monitoring of faults
Variables for monitoring of faults are described below:
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

450

Ulnt

Minimum wait time (s)

451

Ulnt

Fault code (code of the last fault, or of the fault that takes
priority)
(See DT_FaultCode, page 311.)

452

Word

Fault register 1

Note,
page 306

bits 0-1 (Reserved)

bit 2 Ground current fault
bit 3 Thermal overload fault
bit 4 Long start fault
bit 5 Jam fault
bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault
bit 7 Undercurrent fault
bit 8 (Reserved)
bit 9 Test fault
bit 10 HMI port fault
bit 11 Controller internal fault
bit 12 Internal port fault
bit 13 (Not significant)
bit 14 Network port config fault
bit 15 Network port fault
453

Word

Fault register 2
bit 0 External system fault
bit 1 Diagnostic fault
bit 2 Wiring fault
bit 3 Overcurrent fault
bit 4 Current phase loss fault
bit 5 Current phase reversal fault

1639502EN-04 09/2014

bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault

bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault

bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault

bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault

bit 10 Undervoltage fault

bit 11 Overvoltage fault

bit 12 Underpower fault

bit 13 Overpower fault

bit 14 Under power factor fault

bit 15 Over power factor fault

321

Use

Register
454

Variable type
Word

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Fault register 3
bit 0 LTM E configuration fault
bit 1 LTM R configuration fault
bits 2-15 (Reserved)

Monitoring of status
Variables for monitoring of status are described below:
Register
455

Variable type
Word

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

System status register 1

bit 0 System ready
bit 1 System on
bit 2 System fault
bit 3 System warning
bit 4 System tripped
bit 5 Fault reset authorized
bit 6 Controller power
bit 7 Motor running (with detection of a current, if greater than
10% FLC)
bits 8-13 Motor average current ratio
32 = 100% FLC - 63 = 200% FLC
bit 14 Control via HMI
bit 15 Motor starting (start in progress)
0 = descending current is less than 150% FLC
1 = ascending current is greater than 10% FLC

456

Word

System status register 2

bit 0 Auto-reset active
bit 1 (Not significant)
bit 2 Fault power cycle requested
bit 3 Motor restart time undefined
bit 4 Rapid cycle lockout
bit 5 Load shedding

bit 6 Motor speed

0 = FLC1 setting is used
1 = FLC2 setting is used
bit 7 HMI port comm loss
bit 8 Network port comm loss
bit 9 Motor transition lockout
bits 10-15 (Not significant)

322

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Register
457

Variable type
Word

Read-only variables

Note,
page 306

Logic inputs status

bit 0 Logic input 1
bit 1 Logic input 2
bit 2 Logic input 3
bit 3 Logic input 4
bit 4 Logic input 5
bit 5 Logic input 6

458

Word

bit 6 Logic input 7

bit 7 Logic input 8

bit 8 Logic input 9

bit 9 Logic input 10

bit 10 Logic input 11

bit 11 Logic input 12

bit 12 Logic input 13

bit 13 Logic input 14

bit 14 Logic input 15

bit 15 Logic input 16

Logic outputs status

bit 0 Logic output 1
bit 1 Logic output 2
bit 2 Logic output 3
bit 3 Logic output 4
bit 4 Logic output 5

bit 5 Logic output 6

bit 6 Logic output 7

bit 7 Logic output 8

bits 8-15 (Reserved)

459

Word

I/O status
bit 0 Input 1
bit 1 Input 2
bit 2 Input 3
bit 3 Input 4
bit 4 Input 5
bit 5 Input 6
bit 6 Input 7
bit 7 Input 8
bit 8 Input 9
bit 9 Input 10
bit 10 Input 11
bit 11 Input 12
bit 12 Output 1 (13-14)
bit 13 Output 2 (23-24)
bit 14 Output 3 (33-34)
bit 15 Output 4 (95-96, 97-98)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

323

Use

Monitoring of warnings
Variables for monitoring of warnings are described below:
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

460

UInt

Warning code
(See DT_WarningCode, page 313.)

461

Word

Warning register 1

Note,
page 306

bits 0-1 (Not significant)

bit 2 Ground current warning
bit 3 Thermal overload warning
bit 4 (Not significant)
bit 5 Jam warning
bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning
bit 7 Undercurrent warning
bits 8-9 (Not significant)
bit 10 HMI port warning
bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning
bits 12-14 (Not significant)
bit 15 Network port warning
462

Word

Warning register 2
bit 0 (Not significant)
bit 1 Diagnostic warning
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 Overcurrent warning
bit 4 Current phase loss warning
bit 5 Current phase reversal warning
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning

463

Word

bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning

bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning

bit 9 (Not significant)

bit 10 Undervoltage warning

bit 11 Overvoltage warning

bit 12 Underpower warning

bit 13 Overpower warning

bit 14 Under power factor warning

bit 15 Over power factor warning

Warning register 3
bit 0 LTM E configuration warning
bits 1-15 (Reserved)

464

324

UInt

Motor temperature sensor degree ( C)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Monitoring of measurements
Variables for monitoring of measurements are described below:
Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

465

UInt

Thermal capacity level (% trip level)

466

UInt

Average current ratio (% FLC)

467

UInt

L1 current ratio (% FLC)

468

UInt

L2 current ratio (% FLC)

469

UInt

L3 current ratio (% FLC)

470

UInt

Ground current ratio (x 0.1 % FLC min)

471

UInt

Current phase imbalance (%)

472

Int

Controller internal temperature ( C)

473

UInt

Controller config checksum

474

UInt

Frequency (x 0.01 Hz)

Note,
page 306

475

UInt

Motor temperature sensor (x 0.1 )

476

UInt

Average voltage (V)

477

UInt

L3-L1 voltage (V)

478

UInt

L1-L2 voltage (V)

479

UInt

L2-L3 voltage (V)

480

UInt

Voltage phase imbalance (%)

481

UInt

Power factor (x 0.01)

482

UInt

Active power (x 0.1 kW)

483

UInt

Reactive power (x 0.1 kVAR)

484

Word

Auto restart status register

bit 0 Voltage dip occurred
bit 1 Voltage dip detection
bit 2 Auto restart immediate condition
bit 3 Auto restart delayed condition
bit 4 Auto restart manual condition
bits 5-15 (Not significant)

485

Word

Controller last power off duration

486-489

Word

(Not significant)

490

Word

Network port monitoring

bit 0 Network port monitoring
bit 1 Network port connected
bit 2 Network port self-testing
bit 3 Network port self-detecting
bit 4 Network port bad config
bits 5-15 (Not significant)

491

UInt

492
493

(Not significant)
UInt

Network port parity

(See DT_ExtParity, page 310.)

500-501

UDInt

Average current (x 0.01 A)

502-503

UDInt

L1 current (x 0.01 A)

504-505

UDInt

L2 current (x 0.01 A)

506-507

UDInt

L3 current (x 0.01 A)

508-509

UDInt

Ground current (mA)

510

UInt

Controller port ID

511

UInt

Time to trip (x 1 s)

494-499

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Network port baud rate

(See DT_ExtBaudRate, page 310.)

(Not significant)

325

Use

Register

Variable type

Read-only variables

512

UInt

Motor last start current ratio (% FLC)

513

UInt

Motor last start duration (s)

514

UInt

Motor starts per hour count

515

Word

Phase imbalances register

Note,
page 306

bit 0 L1 current highest imbalance

bit 1 L2 current highest imbalance
bit 2 L3 current highest imbalance
bit 3 L1-L2 voltage highest imbalance

bit 4 L2-L3 voltage highest imbalance

bit 5 L3-L1 voltage highest imbalance

bits 6-15 (Not significant)

326

516 - 523

(Reserved)

524 - 539

(Forbidden)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Configuration Variables
Configuration Overview
Configuration variables are grouped according to the following criteria:
Configuration variable groups

Registers

Configuration

540 to 649

Setting

650 to 699

Configuration Variables
The configuration variables are described below:
Register

Variable type

Read / Write variables

540

UInt

Motor operating mode

2 = 2-wire overload
3 = 3-wire overload
4 = 2-wire independent
5 = 3-wire independent
6 = 2-wire reverser
7 = 3-wire reverser
8 = 2-wire 2-step
9 = 3-wire 2-step
10 = 2-wire 2-speed
11 = 3-wire 2-speed
256-511 = Custom logic program (0-255)

541

UInt

Motor transition timeout (s)

Word

Controller AC inputs setting register

542-544
545

Note, page 306

B

(Reserved)
bits 0-3 Controller AC logic inputs configuration
(see DT_ACInputSetting, page 308)
bits 4-15 (Reserved)

546

UInt

Thermal overload setting

bits 0-2 Motor temperature sensor type

0 = None
1 = PTC binary
2 = PT100
3 = PTC analog
4 = NTC analog
bits 3-4 Thermal overload mode
0 = Definite
2 = Inverse thermal
bits 5-15 (Reserved)
547

UInt

548

Thermal overload fault definite timeout (s)

(Reserved)

549

UInt

Motor temperature sensor fault threshold (x 0.1 )

550

UInt

Motor temperature sensor warning threshold (x 0.1 )

551

UInt

Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree ( C)

552

UInt

Motor temperature sensor warning threshold degree ( C)

553

UInt

554

Rapid cycle lockout timeout (s)

(Reserved)

555

UInt

Current phase loss timeout (x 0.1 s)

556

UInt

Overcurrent fault timeout (s)

557

UInt

Overcurrent fault threshold (% FLC)

558

UInt

Overcurrent warning threshold (% FLC)

559

Word

Ground current fault configuration

bit 0 Ground current mode

bit 1 Ground fault disabled while starting
bits 2-15 (Reserved)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

327

Use

Register
560

Variable type
UInt

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

Ground CT primary

561

UInt

Ground CT secondary

562

UInt

External ground current fault timeout (x 0.01 s)

563

UInt

External ground current fault threshold (x 0.01 A)

564

UInt

External ground current warning threshold (x 0.01 A)

565

UInt

Motor nominal voltage (V)

566

UInt

Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting (x 0.1 s)

567

UInt

Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running (x 0.1 s)

568

UInt

Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold (% imb)

569

UInt

Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold (% imb)

570

UInt

Overvoltage fault timeout (x 0.1 s)

571

UInt

Overvoltage fault threshold (% Vnom)

572

UInt

Overvoltage warning threshold (% Vnom)

573

UInt

Undervoltage fault timeout

574

UInt

Undervoltage fault threshold (% Vnom)

575

UInt

Undervoltage warning threshold (% Vnom)

576

UInt

Voltage phase loss fault timeout (x 0.1 s)

577

Word

Voltage dip setting

bits 0-1 Voltage dip mode

0 = None (factory setting)
1 = Load shedding
2 = Auto-restart
bits 3-15 (Reserved)

328

578

UInt

Load shedding timeout (s)

579

UInt

Voltage dip threshold (% Vnom)

580

UInt

Voltage dip restart timeout (s)

581

UInt

Voltage dip restart threshold (% Vnom)

582

UInt

Auto restart immediate timeout (x 0.1 s)

583

UInt

Motor nominal power (x 0.1 kW)

584

UInt

Overpower fault timeout (s)

585

UInt

Overpower fault threshold (% Pnom)

586

UInt

Overpower warning threshold (% Pnom)

587

UInt

Underpower fault timeout (s)

588

UInt

Underpower fault threshold (% Pnom)

589

UInt

Underpower warning threshold (% Pnom)

590

UInt

Under power factor fault timeout (x 0.1 s)

591

UInt

Under power factor fault threshold (x 0.01 PF)

592

UInt

Under power factor warning threshold (x 0.01 PF)

593

UInt

Over power factor fault timeout (x 0.1 s)

594

UInt

Over power factor fault threshold (x 0.01 PF)

595

UInt

Over power factor warning threshold (x 0.01 PF)

596

UInt

Auto restart delayed timeout (s)

597-599

(Reserved)

600

(Not significant)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Register
601

Variable type
Word

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

General configuration register 1

bit 0 Controller system config required
0 = exit the configuration menu
1 = go to the configuration menu

bits 1-7 (Reserved)

Control mode configuration, bits 8-10 (one bit is set to 1):
bit 8 Config via HMI keypad enable
bit 9 Config via HMI engineering tool enable
bit 10 Config via network port enable
bit 11 Motor star-delta

bit 12 Motor phases sequence

0=ABC
1=ACB
bits 13-14 Motor phases
(see DT_PhaseNumber, page 312)

bit 15 Motor auxiliary fan cooled (factory setting = 0)

602

Word

General configuration register 2

bits 0-2 Fault reset mode
(see DT_ResetMode, page 312)

bit 3 HMI port parity setting

0 = none
1 = even (factory setting)
bits 4-8 (Reserved)
bit 9 HMI port endian setting
bit 10 Network port endian setting
bit 11 HMI motor status LED color
bits 12-15 (Reserved)
603

Ulnt

HMI port address setting

604

Ulnt

HMI port baud rate setting (Baud)

Ulnt

Motor trip class (s)

608

Ulnt

Thermal overload fault reset threshold (% trip level)

609

Ulnt

Thermal overload warning threshold (% trip level)

610

UInt

Internal ground current fault timeout (x 0.1 s)

605
606

(Reserved)

607

611

UInt

Internal ground current fault threshold (% FLCmin)

612

UInt

Internal ground current warning threshold (% FLCmin)

613

UInt

Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting (x 0.1 s)

614

UInt

Current phase imbalance fault timeout running (x 0.1 s)

615

UInt

Current phase imbalance fault threshold (% imb)

616

UInt

Current phase imbalance warning threshold (% imb)

617

UInt

Jam fault timeout (s)

618

UInt

Jam fault threshold (% FLC)

619

UInt

Jam warning threshold (% FLC)

620

UInt

Undercurrent fault timeout (s)

621

UInt

Undercurrent fault threshold (% FLC)

622

UInt

Undercurrent warning threshold (% FLC)

623

UInt

Long start fault timeout (s)

624

UInt

Long start fault threshold (% FLC)

625

1639502EN-04 09/2014

(Reserved)

(Reserved)

329

Use

Register
626

Variable type
UInt

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

HMI display contrast setting

bits 0-7 HMI display contrast setting
bits 8-15 HMI display brightness setting

627

UInt

Contactor rating (0.1 A)

628

UInt

Load CT primary

629

UInt

Load CT secondary

630

UInt

Load CT multiple passes (passes)

631

Word

Fault enable register 1

bits 0-1 (Reserved)
bit 2 Ground current fault enable
bit 3 Thermal overload fault enable
bit 4 Long start fault enable
bit 5 Jam fault enable
bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault enable
bit 7 Undercurrent fault enable
bit 8 (Reserved)
bit 9 Self test enable
0 = disable
1 = enable (factory setting)
bit 10 HMI port fault enable
bits 11-14 (Reserved)
bit 15 Network port fault enable

632

Word

Warning enable register 1

bit 0 (Not significant)
bit 1 (Reserved)
bit 2 Ground current warning enable
bit 3 Thermal overload warning enable
bit 4 (Reserved)
bit 5 Jam warning enable
bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning enable
bit 7 Undercurrent warning enable
bits 8- 9 (Reserved)
bit 10 HMI port warning enable
bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning enable
bits 12-14 (Reserved)
bit 15 Network port warning enable

330

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Register
633

Variable type
Word

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

Fault enable register 2

bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Diagnostic fault enable
bit 2 Wiring fault enable
bit 3 Overcurrent fault enable
bit 4 Current phase loss fault enable
bit 5 Current phase reversal fault enable
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault enable
bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault enable

634

Word

bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault enable

bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault enable

bit 10 Undervoltage fault enable

bit 11 Overvoltage fault enable

bit 12 Underpower fault enable

bit 13 Overpower fault enable

bit 14 Under power factor fault enable

bit 15 Over power factor fault enable

Warning enable register 2

bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Diagnostic warning enable
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 Overcurrent warning enable
bit 4 Current phase loss warning enable
bit 5 (Reserved)
bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning enable

635-6

bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning enable

bit 9 (Reserved)

bit 10 Undervoltage warning enable

bit 11 Overvoltage warning enable

bit 12 Underpower warning enable

bit 13 Overpower warning enable

bit 14 Under power factor warning enable

bit 15 Over power factor warning enable

(Reserved)

637

UInt

Auto-reset attempts group 1 setting (resets)

638

UInt

Auto-reset group 1 timeout (s)

639

UInt

Auto-reset attempts group 2 setting (resets)

640

UInt

Auto-reset group 2 timeout (s)

641

UInt

Auto-reset attempts group 3 setting (resets)

642

UInt

Auto-reset group 3 timeout (s)

643

UInt

Motor step 1 to 2 timeout (x 0.1 s)

644

UInt

Motor step 1 to 2 threshold (% FLC)

645

UInt

HMI port fallback setting

(see DT_OutputFallbackStrategy, page 312)

646-649

1639502EN-04 09/2014

bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning enable

(Reserved)

331

Use

Setting Variables
The setting variables are described below:
Register
650

Variable type
Word

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

HMI language setting register:

bits 0-4 HMI language setting
(see DT_Language5, page 312)
bits 5-15 (Not significant)

651

Word

HMI display items register 1

bit 0 HMI display average current enable
bit 1 HMI display thermal capacity level enable
bit 2 HMI display L1 current enable
bit 3 HMI display L2 current enable
bit 4 HMI display L3 current enable
bit 5 HMI display ground current enable
bit 6 HMI display motor status enable
bit 7 HMI display current phase imbalance enable
bit 8 HMI display operating time enable
bit 9 HMI display I/O status enable
bit 10 HMI display reactive power enable
bit 11 HMI display frequency enable
bit 12 HMI display starts per hour enable
bit 13 HMI display control mode enable
bit 14 HMI display start statistics enable
bit 15 HMI motor temperature sensor enable

652

Ulnt

Motor full load current ratio, FLC1 (% FLCmax)

653

Ulnt

Motor high speed full load current ratio, FLC2 (% FLCmax)

654

Word

HMI display items register 2

bit 0 HMI display L1-L2 voltage enable

bit 1 HMI display L2-L3 voltage enable

bit 2 HMI display L3-L1 voltage enable

bit 3 HMI display average voltage enable

bit 4 HMI display active power enable

bit 5 HMI display power consumption enable

bit 6 HMI display power factor enable

bit 7 HMI display average current ratio enable

bit 8 HMI display L1 current ratio enable

bit 9 HMI display L2 current ratio enable

bit 10 HMI display L3 current ratio enable

bit 11 HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable

bit 12 HMI display time to trip enable
bit 13 HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable

bit 14 HMI display date enable

bit 15 HMI display time enable
655-658

Word[4]

Date and time setting

(See DT_DateTime, page 309)

659

Word

HMI display items register 3

bit 0 HMI display temperature sensor degree CF
bits 1-15 (Reserved)

660-681
682

332

(Reserved)
Ulnt

Network port fallback setting (see DT_OutputFallbackStrategy,

page 312)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Register
683

Variable type
Word

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

Control setting register (see page 133)

bits 0-1 (Reserved)
bit 2 Control remote local default mode (with LTM CU)
0 = remote
1 = local
bit 3 (Reserved)
bit 4 Control remote local buttons enable (with LTM CU)
0 = disable
1 = enable
bits 5-6 Control remote channel setting (with LTM CU)
0 = network
1 = terminal strip
2 = HMI
bit 7 (Reserved)
bit 8 Control local channel setting
0 = terminal strip
1 = HMI
bit 9 Control direct transition
0 = stop required during transition
1 = stop not required during transition
bit 10 Control transfer mode
0 = bump
1 = bumpless
bit 11 Stop terminal strip disable
0 = enable
1 = disable
bit 12 Stop HMI disable
0 = enable
1 = disable
bits 13-15 (Reserved)

684-692
693

Ulnt

Network port comm loss timeout (x 0.01 s) (Modbus only)

694

Ulnt

Network port parity setting (Modbus only)

695

Ulnt

Network port baud rate setting (Baud)

(see DT_ExtBaudRate, page 310)

696

Ulnt

Network port address setting

697-699

1639502EN-04 09/2014

(Reserved)

(Not significant)

333

Use

Command Variables
Command Variables
Command variables are described below:
Register
700

Variable type
Word

Read / Write variables

Note, page 306

Logic outputs command register

bit 0 Logic output 1 command
bit 1 Logic output 2 command
bit 2 Logic output 3 command
bit 3 Logic output 4 command
bit 4 Logic output 5 command

bit 5 Logic output 6 command

bit 6 Logic output 7 command

bit 7 Logic output 8 command

bits 8-15 (Reserved)

701-703
704

(Reserved)
Word

Control register 1
bit 0 Motor run forward command
bit 1 Motor run reverse command
bit 2 (Reserved)
bit 3 Fault reset command
bit 4 (Reserved)
bit 5 Self test command
bit 6 Motor low speed command
bits 7-15 (Reserved)

705

Word

Control register 2
bit 0 Clear all command
Clear all parameters, except:
Motor LO1 closings count
Motor LO2 closings count
Controller internal temperature max
Thermal capacity level
bit 1 Clear statistics command
bit 2 Clear thermal capacity level command
bit 3 Clear controller settings command
bit 4 Clear network port settings command
bits 5-15 (Reserved)

334

706-709

(Reserved)

710-799

(Forbidden)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

User Map Variables

User Map Variables
User Map variables are described below:
User map variable groups
User Map addresses

800 to 899

User Map values

900 to 999

Register
800-898

Variable type
Word[99]

899

Register
900-998
999

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Registers

Read/Write variables

Note, page 306

User map addresses setting

(Reserved)

Variable type
Word[99]

Read/Write variables

Note, page 306

User map values

(Reserved)

335

Use

Custom Logic Variables

Custom Logic Variables
Custom logic variables are described below:
Register

Variable type

1200

Word

Read-only variables

Note (see page 306)

Custom logic status register

bit 0 Custom logic run
bit 1 Custom logic stop
bit 2 Custom logic reset
bit 3 Custom logic second step
bit 4 Custom logic transition
bit 5 Custom logic phase reverse
bit 6 Custom logic network control
bit 7 Custom logic FLC selection
bit 8 (Reserved)
bit 9 Custom logic auxiliary 1 LED
bit 10 Custom logic auxiliary 2 LED
bit 11 Custom logic stop LED
bit 12 Custom logic LO1
bit 13 Custom logic LO2
bit 14 Custom logic LO3
bit 15 Custom logic LO4

1201

Word

Custom logic version

1202

Word

Custom logic memory space

1203

Word

Custom logic memory used

1204

Word

Custom logic temporary space

1205

Word

Custom logic non volatile space

1206-1249

(Reserved)

Register

Variable type

1250

Word

Read/Write variables

Note (see page 306)

Custom logic setting register 1

bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Logic input 3 external ready enable
bits 2-15 (Reserved)

1251-1269
1270

(Reserved)
Word

Custom logic command register 1

bit 0 Custom logic external fault command
bits 1-15 (Reserved)

1271-1279

(Reserved)

Register

Variable type

1280

Word

Read-only variables

Note (see page 306)

Custom logic monitoring register 1

bit 0 (Reserved)
bit 1 Custom logic system ready
bits 2-15 (Reserved)

1281-1300

336

(Reserved)

Register

Variable type

1301-1399

Word[99]

Read/Write variables

Note
(see page 306)

General purpose registers for logic functions

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Use

Identification and Maintenance Functions (IMF)

IM Index Space and Partitions
In order to avoid conflicts with any PROFIBUS DP devices already installed in the field and to save address
space for operational parameters, the I&M proposal follows the CALL_REQ service defined within IEC
61158-6.
This service, part of the "Load Domain" Upload/Download services, can be used within any module
independent from any directory in a representative module (e.g. slot 0) of a device. It uses index 255 within
any slot and opens a separate addressable sub-index space. For I&M functions, the sub-index range from
65000 to 65199 is reserved. Sub-index blocks are called IM_Index.

The CALL_REQ service needs several header bytes, reducing the possible net data length to 236 bytes.
For I&M functions the following block of sub indices (IM_INDEX) will be used:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

337

Use

I&M0 - The Mandatory Record

The transport of the I&M parameters across the PROFIBUS DP network via MS1 (optional) or MS2
(mandatory) is supported. Only I&M0 data with IM0_Index = 65000 can be read. No other IM_Indices are
supported.
Structure of the I&M0 record:

During startup of the firmware this structure is initialized with the relevant information. A PROFIBUS DPV1
master (MS1 or MS2) can read this information at any time using the CALL_REQ mechanism.

338

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Maintenance
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter 8
Maintenance

Maintenance

Overview
This chapter describes the maintenance and self-diagnostic features of the LTM R controller and the
expansion module.

WARNING
UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems. Only
persons with such expertise should be allowed to program, install, alter, and apply this product. Follow
all local and national safety codes and standards.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Detecting Problems

340

Troubleshooting

341

Preventive Maintenance

343

Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module

345

Communication Warnings and Faults

346

339

Maintenance

Detecting Problems
Overview
The LTM R controller and the expansion module perform self-diagnostic checks at power-up and during
operation.
Problems with either the LTM R controller or expansion module can be detected using

Power and Alarm LEDs on the LTM R controller,

Power and Input LEDs on the expansion module,
LCD Display on either a Magelis XBTN410 HMI device or a TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit
connected to the LTM R controllers HMI port, or
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM running on a PC connected to the LTM R controllers HMI port.

Device LEDs
The LEDs on the LTM R controller and expansion module can indicate the following problems:
LTM R LED

LTM E LED

Problem

Power

Alarm

PLC Alarm

Power

Off

Solid red

On

Solid red

Protection fault

On

Flashing red (2x per second)

Protection warning

On

Flashing red (5x per second)

Load shed or rapid cycle

On

Solid red

Internal fault

Internal fault

Magelis XBT HMI Device

The Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically displays information about a fault or warning, including LTM R
controller self-diagnostic faults and warnings, when it occurs.
For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1-to-many configuration,
see Fault Management (1-to-many), page 277.
LTM CU Control Operator Unit
The TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit automatically displays information about a fault or warning.
For more information, see Faults and Warnings Display in TeSys T LTM CU Control Operator Unit Users
Manual.
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM displays a visual array of active faults and warnings, including LTM R
controller self-diagnostic faults and warnings, when these faults occur.
For information about this display of active faults and warnings, refer to the TeSys T DTM for SoMove FDT
Container Online help.

340

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Maintenance

Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Tests
The LTM R controller performs self-diagnostic tests at power-up and during operation. These tests, the
errors they detect, and the steps to take in response to a problem are described below:
Type

Error

Action

Major internal
faults

Internal temperature fault

This fault indicates a warning at 80 C, a minor fault at 85 C, and a major

fault at 100 C. Take steps to reduce ambient temperature, including:
add an auxiliary cooling fan
remount the LTM R controller and expansion module to provide
more surrounding free space.
If the condition persists:
1 Cycle power.
2 Wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.

CPU failure
Program checksum error
RAM test error

These faults indicate a hardware failure. Take the following steps:

1 Cycle power.
2 Wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.

Stack overflow
Stack underflow
Watchdog timeout
Minor internal
faults

Invalid configuration error

Configuration checksum
(EEROM) error

Internal network
communications failure
A/D out of range error
Diagnostic
errors

Start command check

Stop command check
Stop check back
Run check back

Indicates either a bad checksum (Config checksum error) or good

checksum but bad data (Invalid config error). Both caused by hardware
failure. Take the following steps:
1 Cycle power and wait 30 s.
2 Reset the configuration settings to factory settings.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
These faults indicate a hardware failure. Take the following steps:
1 Cycle power and wait 30 s.
2 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Check the following:
relay outputs
all wiring, including:
control wiring circuit, including all electromechanical devices
power wiring circuit, including all components
load CT wiring.

After all checks are complete:

1 Reset the fault.
2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

341

Maintenance

Type

Error

Wiring/config
errors

CT reversal error

Action
Correct the polarity of the CTs. Be sure that:
all external CTs face the same direction
all load CT wiring passes through windows in the same direction

After the check is complete:

1 Perform a fault reset.
2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s.
3 If the fault still persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Current/Voltage phase
reversal error
Phase configuration error

Check:
L1, L2 and L3 wiring connection to be sure wires are not crossed
Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting (ABC versus ACB)
After all checks are complete:
1 Perform a fault reset.
2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.

PTC connection error

Check for:
short circuit or open circuit in the motor temp sensor wiring
wrong type of motor temp sensing device
improper configuration of parameters for selected device.

After all checks are complete:

1 Perform a fault reset.
2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.
Voltage phase loss error

Check for:
improper wiring, such as loose terminations
blown fuse
cut wire
single-phase motor configured for 3-phase operation
failure to wire a single phase motor through both A and C load CT
windows
failure of power source (for example, utility power failure).

After all checks are complete:

1 Perform fault reset.
2 If the fault persists, cycle power and wait 30 s.
3 If the fault persists, replace the LTM R controller.

342

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance
Overview
The following protective measures should be performed between major system checks, to help maintain
your system and protect it against irrecoverable hardware or software failure:

Continuously review operating statistics,

Save LTM R controller parameter configuration settings to a backup file,
Maintain the LTM R controllers operating environment,
Periodically perform a LTM R controller self test,
Check the LTM R controller internal clock to ensure accuracy.

Statistics
The LTM R controller collects the following types of information:

real-time voltage, current, power, temperature, I/O and fault data

a count of the number of faults, by fault type, that occurred since last power-up
a time-stamped history of the state of the LTM R controller (displaying measures of voltage, current,
power, and temperature) at the moment that each of the previous 5 faults occurred

Use either SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, a Magelis XBTN410 HMI, or a TeSys T LTM CU Control
Operator Unit to access and review these statistics. Analyze this information to determine whether the
actual record of operations indicates a problem.
Configuration Settings
In the event of irrecoverable LTM R controller failure, you can quickly restore configuration settings if you
saved these settings to a file. When the LTM R controller is first configured, and every subsequent time
any configuration settings are changed, use SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to save the parameter settings
to a file.
To save a configuration file:
Select File Save As....

To restore the saved configuration file:

1. Open the saved file: Select File Open (then navigate to the file).
2. Download the configuration to the new controller.
3. Select Communication Store to Device.
Environment
Like any other electronic device, the LTM R controller is affected by its physical environment. Provide a
friendly environment by taking common-sense preventive measures, including:

Scheduling periodic examinations of battery packs, fuses, power strips, batteries, surge suppressors,
and power supplies.
Keeping the LTM R controller, the panel, and all devices clean. An unobstructed flow of air will prevent
dust build-up, which can lead to a short-circuit condition.
Remaining alert to the possibility of other equipment producing electromagnetic radiation. Be sure no
other devices cause electromagnetic interference with the LTM R controller.

Self Test with Motor Off

Perform a self test by either
holding down the Test/Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller for more than 3 seconds and
up to 15 seconds, or
setting the Self Test Command parameter.
A self test can be performed only if
no faults exist,
the Self Test Enable parameter is set (factory setting).
The LTM R controller performs the following checks during a self test:

Watchdog check
RAM check

During the self-test sequence, the LTM R controller calibrates the thermal memory time constant, which
keeps track of time while it is not powered.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

343

Maintenance

If any of the above tests fails, a minor internal fault occurs. If not, the self test continues and the LTM R
controller performs:

LTM E expansion module test (if it is connected to an expansion module). If this test fails, the LTM R
controller experiences a minor internal fault.
Internal communication test. If this test fails, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault.
LED test: turns all LEDs off, then turns each LED on in sequence:
HMI communication activity LED
Power LED
Fallback LED
PLC communication activity LED
At the end of the test, all LEDs return to their initial state.
Output relay test: opens all relays, and restores them to their original state only after a reset command
executes, or power is cycled.
If current is measured during the relay self test, the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault.

During the LTM R self test, a "self test" string displays on the HMI device.
During a self test, the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1. When the self test
finishes, this parameter is reset to 0.
Self Test with Motor On
Perform a self test by using
the Test/Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller,
Menus command from the HMI connected to the RJ45 port,
SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, or
PLC.

When the motor is On, performing a self test simulates a thermal fault, in order to check if the logic output
O.4 is working correctly. It triggers a Thermal Overload fault.
During a self test, the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1. When the self test
finishes, this parameter is reset to 0.
Internal Clock
To ensure an accurate record of faults, be sure to maintain the LTM R controllers internal clock. The
LTM R controller time stamps all faults, using the value stored in the Date And Time Setting parameter.
Internal clock accuracy is +/-1 second per hour. If power is continuously applied for 1 year, the internal
clock accuracy is +/-30 minutes per year.
If power is turned Off for 30 minutes or less, the LTM R controller retains its internal clock settings, with
accuracy of +/- 2 minutes.
If power is turned Off for more than 30 minutes, the LTM R controller resets its internal clock to the time
when power was turned Off.

344

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Maintenance

Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module

Overview
Questions to consider in advance of replacing either an LTM R controller or an LTM E expansion module
are:

is the replacement device the same model as the original?

have the configuration settings of the LTM R controller been saved, and are they available to be
transferred to its replacement?

Be sure the motor is turned off before replacing either the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion
module.
Replacing the LTM R Controller
The time to plan for the replacement of an LTM R controller is:

when the LTM R controller settings are initially configured, and

any time that one or more of its settings are subsequently re-configured

Because setting values may not be accessible when the LTM R controller is replaced, for example, in case
of device failure, you should create a record of setting values whenever they are made.
Using SoMove with the TeSys T DTM, all of the LTM R controllers configured settings, except for date and
time, can be saved to a file. Once saved, you can use SoMove with the TeSys T DTM to transfer these
settings either to the original LTM R controller or to its replacement.
NOTE: Only configured settings are saved. Historical statistical data is not saved, and therefore cannot be
applied to a replacement LTM R controller.
For information on how to use SoMove software to create, save and transfer configuration setting files,
refer to the SoMove Lite Online Help.
Replacing the Expansion Module
The primary consideration in replacing an LTM E expansion module, is to replace it with the same model,
24 VDC or 110-240 VAC, as the original.
Retiring Devices
Both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module contain electronic boards that require
particular treatment at the end of their useful life. When retiring a device be sure to observe all applicable
laws, regulations and practices.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

345

Maintenance

Communication Warnings and Faults

Introduction
Communication warnings and faults are managed in a standard way, like any other types of warnings and
faults.
The presence of a fault is signaled by various indicators:
State of the LEDs (1 LED is dedicated to communication: BF, see PROFIBUS DP Communication
Checking, page 233)
State of the output relays
Warning
Message(s) displayed on HMI screen
Presence of an exception code (such as a report from the PLC)
PLC Communication Loss
A communication loss is managed like any other fault.
The LTM R controller monitors the communication with the PLC. Using an adjustable network idle time
(timeout), the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss (firmware watchdog).
NOTE: This timeout is not defined in the LTM R controller but at the PROFIBUS DP master level. If the
PROFIBUS DP master allows the modification of this timeout, then, its value must be transmitted by the
master to the LTM R controller.
In the event of a network loss, the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions. These
depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the network loss.
If PLC-LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in network control mode, the
LTM R controller enters the fallback state. If PLC- LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R
controller is in local control mode, and then the control mode is changed to network control, the LTM R
controller enters the fallback state.
If PLC-LTM R controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to network control, the
LTM R controller exits the fallback state. If the control mode is changed to local control, the LTM R exits
from the fallback state, regardless of the state of PLC-controller communications.
The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller can take during a communication
loss that the user can select when configuring the LTM R controller.
Network communication loss actions:
LTM R Controller Output Control Mode Available LTM R Actions After PLC-LTM R Controller Network Loss
Prior to Network Loss

346

Terminal Strip

Fault and Warning control possibilities:

Signal nothing
Activate a warning
Activate a fault
Activate a fault and warning

Local RJ45

Fault and Warning control possibilities:

Signal nothing
Activate a warning
Activate a fault
Activate a fault and warning

Remote

Fault and Warning control possibilities:

Signal nothing
Activate a warning
Activate a fault
Activate a fault and warning
The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor
controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Maintenance

HMI Communication Loss

The LTM R controller monitors the communication with any approved HMI device. Using a fixed network
idle time (timeout), the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss. In the event of a
communication loss, the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions. These depend on the
control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the communication loss.
If HMI-controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in Local RJ45 control mode, the LTM R
controller enters the fallback state. If HMI-LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R
controller is not in Local RJ45 control mode, and then the control mode is changed to Local RJ45 control,
the LTM R controller enters the fallback state.
If HMI-controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to Local RJ45 control, the LTM R
exits from the fallback state. If the control mode is changed to Terminal Strip or Network control, the LTM R
exits from the fallback state, regardless of the state of HMI-controller communications.
The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication
loss. Select one of these actions when configuring the LTM R controller.
Local RJ45 communication loss actions:
LTM R Controller Output Control Mode Available LTM R Controller Actions After HMI-LTM R Controller
Prior to Network Loss
Network Loss
Terminal Strip

Fault and Warning control possibilities:

Signal nothing
Activate a warning
Activate a fault
Activate a fault and warning

Local RJ45

Fault and Warning control possibilities:

Signal nothing
Activate a warning
Activate a fault
Activate a fault and warning

Remote

Fault and Warning control possibilities:

Signal nothing
Activate a warning
Activate a fault
Activate a fault and warning
The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor
controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen

NOTE: For more information about a communication loss and the fallback strategy, refer to the Fallback
Condition (see page 47) portion of the topic describing Communication Loss.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

347

Maintenance

348

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Appendices

What Is in This Appendix?

The appendix contains the following chapters:
Chapter

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Chapter Name

Page

Technical Data

351

Configurable Parameters

361

Wiring Diagrams

375

349

350

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Technical Data
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Appendix A
Technical Data

Technical Data

Overview
This appendix presents technical data related to the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller

352

Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module

355

Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions

357

Recommended Contactors

358

351

Technical Data

Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller

Technical Specifications
The LTM R controller meets the following specifications:
Certification(1)

UL, CSA, CE, CTICK, CCC, NOM, GOST,

IACS E10 (BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos), ATEX

Conformity to
Standards

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508, CSA C22.2 no.14, IACS E10

European Community
directives

CE marking, satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage (LV) machinery and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives.

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

According to IEC/EN 60947-1

Rated impulse
withstand voltage
(Uimp)

Withstand to shortcircuit

Overvoltage category III,

degree of pollution: 3

690 V

According to UL508, CSA C22-2 no. 14

690 V

According to IEC60947-1
8.3.3.4.1 paragraph 2

220 V power, input and

output circuits

4.8 kV

24 V power, input and

output circuits

0.91 kV

Communication circuits

0.91 kV

PTC and GF circuits

0.91 kV

According to IEC60947-4-1

100 kA

Degree of protection

According to IEC60947-1 (protection against direct contact)

IP20

Protective treatment

IEC/EN 60068

"TH"

IEC/EN 60068-2-30

Cycle humidity

12 cycles

IEC/EN 60068-2-11

Salt spray

48 h

Ambient air
temperature around
the device

Storage

-40+80 C (-40176 F)

Operation

-20+60 C (-4140 F)

Maximum operating
altitude

Derating accepted

4500 m (14,763 ft)

Without derating

2000 m (6,561 ft)

Fire resistance

According to UL 94

V2

According to IEC60695-2-1

(Parts supporting live

components)
(Other components)

Half-sine mechanical
shock pulse = 11 ms

According to IEC60068-2-27

Resistance to
vibration

According to IEC60068-2-6(2)

Immunity to radiated
fields

According to EN61000-4-3

Immunity to fast
transient bursts

According to EN61000-4-4

Immunity to
radioelectric fields

According to EN610-4-6(3)

650 C (1,202 F)
15 gn

(2)

Immunity to
According to EN61000-4-2
electrostatic discharge

960 C (1,760 F)

Panel mounted

4 gn

DIN rail mounted

1 gn

Through air

8 kV level 3

Over surface

6 kV level 3
10 V/m level 3

On power lines and relay

outputs

4 kV level 4

All other circuits

2 kV level 3
10 V rms level 3

(1) Some certifications are in progress.

(2) Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction.
(3) NOTE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause
unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.

352

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Technical Data

Surge immunity

According to IEC/EN 61000-4-5

Common mode

Differential mode

Power lines and relay outputs

4 kV (12 /9 F)

2 kV (2 /18 F)

24 VDC inputs and power

1 kV (12 /9 F)

0.5 kV (2 /18 F)

100-240 VAC inputs and power

2 kV (12 /9 F)

1 kV (2 /18 F)

Communication

2 kV (12 /18 F)

Temperature sensor (IT1/IT2)

1 kV (42 /0.5 F)

0.5 kV (42 /0.5 F)

(1) Some certifications are in progress.

(2) Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction.
(3) NOTE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause
unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.

Control Voltage Characteristics

The LTM R controller has the following control voltage characteristics:
Control voltage

24 VDC

100-240 VAC

Power consumption

According to IEC/EN 60947-1

56...127 mA

8...62.8 mA

Control voltage range

According to IEC/EN 60947-1

20.4...26.4 VDC

93.5...264 VAC

Overcurrent protection

24 V fuse 0.5 A gG

100-240 V fuse
0.5 A gG

Resistance to Microbreaks

3 ms

3 ms

70% of UC min. for

500 ms

70% of UC min. for

500 ms

Resistance to voltage dips

According to IEC/EN 61000-4-11

Logic Inputs Characteristics

Nominal input values

Input limit values

At state 1

At state 0
Response time

Voltage

24 VDC

100-240 VAC

Current

7 mA

3.1 mA at 100 VAC

7.5 mA at 240 VAC

Voltage

15 V minimum

79 V < V < 264 V

Current

2 mA min to 15 mA max

2 mA min. at 110 VAC to

3 mA min. at 220 VAC

Voltage

5 V maximum

0V < V < 40 V

Current

15 mA maximum

15 mA maximum

Change to state 1

15 ms

25 ms

Change to state 0

5 ms

25 ms

IEC 61131-1 conformity

Type 1

Type 1

Type of input

Resistive

Capacitive

Logic Outputs Characteristics

Rated insulation voltage

1639502EN-04 09/2014

300 V

AC rated thermal load

250 VAC / 5 A

DC rated thermal load

30 VDC / 5 A

AC 15 rating

480 VA, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 2 A

DC 13 rating

30 W, 500,000 operations, Ie max = 1.25 A

Associated fuse protection

gG at 4 A

Maximum operating rate

1,800 cycles/h

Maximum frequency

2 Hz (2 cycles/s)

Response time closing

< 10 ms

Response time opening

< 10 ms

Contact rating

B300

353

Technical Data

Altitude Derating
The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating
temperature according to altitude.

354

Corrective factors for altitude

2000 m
(6,561.68 ft)

3000 m
(9,842.52 ft)

3500 m
(11,482.94 ft)

4000 m
(13,123.36 ft)

4500 m
(14,763.78 ft)

Dielectric Strength Ui

0.93

0.87

0.8

0.7

Max Operating Temperature

0.93

0.92

0.9

0.88

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Technical Data

Technical Specifications of the LTM E Expansion Module

Technical Specifications
The LTM E expansion module meets the following specifications:
Certifications(1)

UL, CSA, CE, CTICK, CCC, NOM, GOST,

IACS E10 (BV, LROS, DNV, GL, RINA, ABS, RMRos), ATEX

Conformity to
Standards

IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL 508 - CSA C22-2, IACSE10

European Community
directives

CE marking. Satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage (LV) machinery and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives.

Rated insulation
voltage (Ui)

According to IEC/EN 60947-1

Rated impulse
withstand voltage
(Uimp)

Overvoltage category III,

degree of pollution: 3

690 V UI on voltage inputs

According to UL508, CSA C22-2 no. 14

690 V UI on voltage inputs

According to IEC60947-1
8.3.3.4.1 Paragraph 2

220 V inputs circuits

4.8 kV

24 V inputs circuits

0.91 kV

Communication circuits

0.91 kV

voltage input circuits

7.3 kV

Degree of protection

According to 60947-1 (protection against direct contact)

IP20

Protective treatment

IEC/EN 60068

"TH"

Ambient air
temperature around
the device

IEC/EN 60068-2-30

Cycle humidity

12 cycles

IEC/EN 60068-2-11

Salt spray

48 h
-40+80 C (-40176 F)

Storage
Operation

(2)

>40 mm (1.57 inches)

spacing

-20+60 C (-4140 F)

<40 mm (1.57 inches) but -20+55 C (-4131 F)

>9 mm (0.35 inches)
spacing
<9 mm (0.35 inches)
spacing
Maximum operating
altitude
Fire resistance

-20+45 C (-4113 F)

Derating accepted

4500 m (14,763 ft)

Without derating

2000 m (6,561 ft)

According to UL 94
According to IEC60695-2-1

V2
(Parts supporting live
components)

960 C (1,760 F)

(Other components)

650 C (1,202 F)

Half-sine mechanical
shock pulse = 11 ms

According to IEC60068-2-27(3)

30 g 3 axis and 6 directions

Resistance to
vibration

According to IEC60068-2-6(3)

5 gn

Immunity to
According to EN61000-4-2
electrostatic discharge
Immunity to radiated
fields

According to EN61000-4-3

Immunity to fast
transient bursts

According to EN61000-4-4

Immunity to
radioelectric fields

According to EN61000-4-6(4)

Through air

8 kV Level 3

Over surface

6 kV Level 3
10V/m Level 3

All circuits

4 kV Level 4
2 kV on all other circuits
10 V rms Level 3

(1) Some certifications are in progress.

(2) he maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with
the LTM R controller.
(3) Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction.
(4) NOTE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause
unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

355

Technical Data

Surge immunity

According to IEC/EN 61000-4-5

Common mode

Differential mode

100-240 VAC inputs

4 kV (12 )

2 kV (2 )

24 VDC inputs

1 kV (12 )

0.5 kV (2 )

Communication

1 kV (12 )

(1) Some certifications are in progress.

(2) he maximum rated ambient temperature of the LTM E expansion module depends on the installation spacing with
the LTM R controller.
(3) Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction.
(4) NOTE: This product has been designed for use in environment A. Use of this product in environment B may cause
unwanted electromagnetic disturbance, which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures.

Logic Inputs Characteristics

Control voltage
Nominal input values

Input limit values

At state 1

At state 0
Response time

24 VDC

115-230 VAC

Voltage

24 VDC

100-240 VAC

Current

7 mA

3.1 mA at 100 VAC

7.5 mA at 240 VAC

Voltage

15 V maximum

79 V < V < 264 V

Current

2 mA min to 15 mA max

2 mA min. at 110 VAC to

3 mA min. at 220 VAC

Voltage

5 V maximum

0V < V < 40 V

Current

15 mA maximum

15 mA maximum

Change to state 1

15 ms (input only)

25 ms (input only)

Change to state 0

5 ms (input only)

25 ms (input only)

IEC61131-1 conformity

Type 1

Type 1

Type of input

Resistive

Capacitive

Altitude Derating
The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating
temperature according to altitude.

356

Corrective factors for altitude

2000 m
(6,561.68 ft)

3000 m
(9,842.52 ft)

3500 m
(11,482.94 ft)

4000 m
(13,123.36 ft)

4500 m
(14,763.78 ft)

Dielectric Strength Ui

0.93

0.87

0.8

0.7

Max Operating Temperature

0.93

0.92

0.9

0.88

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Technical Data

Characteristics of the Metering and Monitoring Functions

Measurement
Parameter

Accuracy(1)

Value saved on
power loss

L1 current (A)
L2 current (A)
L3 current (A)
L1 current ratio (% FLC)
L2 current ratio (% FLC)
L3 current ratio (% FLC)

+/ 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/ 2 % for 100 A models

No

Ground current ratio (% FLCmin)

Internal ground current:

No

+/ 10 to 20 % for ground current greater than:

0.1 A on 8 A models
0.2 A on 27 A models
0.3 A on 100 A models
External ground current: greater of +/ 5 % or

+/ 0.01 A
Average current (A)
Average current ratio (% FLCmin)

+/ 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/ 2 % for 100 A models

No

Current phase imbalance (% imb)

+/ 1.5 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/ 3 % for 100 A models

No

Thermal capacity level (% trip level)

+/ 1 %

No

Time to trip (s)

+/ 10 %

No

Minimum wait time (s)

+/ 1 %

No

Motor temperature sensor ()

+/ 2 %

No

Controller internal temperature ( C)

+/ 4 %

No

Frequency (Hz)

+/ 2 %

No

L1-L2 voltage (V)

L2-L3 voltage (V)
L3-L1 voltage (V)

+/ 1 %

No

Voltage phase imbalance (% imb)

+/ 1.5 %

No

Average voltage (V)

+/ 1 %

No

Power factor (cos )

+/ 10 %

No

Active power (kW)

+/ 15 %

No

Reactive power (kVAR)

+/ 15 %

No

Active power consumption (kWh)

+/ 15 %

No

Reactive power consumption (kVARh)

+/ 15 %

No

(1) Note: The accuracy levels presented in this table are typical accuracy levels. Actual accuracy levels may be lower
or greater than these values.

Motor History
Parameter

Accuracy

Value saved on power loss

Motor starts count

Motor LO1 closings count
Motor LO2 closings count

+/ 1

Yes

Motor starts per hour count

+ 0/ 5 mn

Yes

Load sheddings count

+/ 1

Yes

Motor last start current ratio (% FLC)

+/ 1 % for 8 A and 27 A models

+/ 2 % for 100 A models

Yes

Motor last start duration (s)

+/ 1 %

No

Operating time (s)

Controller internal temperature max ( C)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Yes
+/ 4 C

Yes

357

Technical Data

Recommended Contactors
Recommended Contactors
You can use the following contactor types:

Schneider Electric IEC-style contactors, from the TeSys D or TeSys F ranges

Square D NEMA-style contactors, from the S range
TeSys D IEC Contactors
Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys D IEC contactors are listed in the table below. Coil
voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
TeSys D catalog Control Circuit
Frequency
references
(Hz)

VA or W
maintained
(max)

LC1D09...LC1D38

50-60

LC1D40...LC1D95

Coil voltages
interposing relay not
required

interposing relay required

7.5

AC = 24, 32, 36, 42, 48, 60,

100, 127, 200, 208, 220,
230, 240

AC = 277, 380, 400, 415,

440, 480, 575, 600, 690

DC (std) = 24

DC (std) = 36, 48, 60, 72, 96,

100, 110, 125, 155, 220,
250, 440, 575

2.4

DC (low consumption) = 24

DC (low consumption) = 48,

72, 96, 110, 220, 250

26

AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110,

115, 120, 127, 208, 220,
220/230, 230, 240

AC = 256, 277, 380,

380/400, 400, 415, 440,
480, 500, 575, 600, 660

22
LC1D115

18

DC = 24, 36, 48, 60, 72, 110,

125, 220, 250, 440
AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110,
115, 120, 127, 208, 220,
230, 240

22
LC1D150

18

AC = 277, 380, 400, 415,

440, 480, 500
DC = 24, 48, 60, 72, 110,
125, 220, 250, 440

AC = 24, 32, 42, 48, 110,

115, 120, 127, 208, 220,
230, 240

AC = 277, 380, 400, 415,

440, 480, 500
DC = 24, 48, 60, 72, 110,
125, 220, 250, 440

TeSys F IEC Contactors

Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys F IEC contactors are listed in the table below. Coil
voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
TeSys F catalog
references

Control Circuit
Frequency
(Hz)

VA or W
maintained
(max)

LC1F115

50
60

interposing relay required

45

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

AC = 380/400, 415/440,
500, 660, 1000

45

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240, 265/277,
380, 415, 460/480, 660,
1000

358

Coil voltages
interposing relay not
required

DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,

220/230, 250, 440/460

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Technical Data

TeSys F catalog
references

Control Circuit
Frequency
(Hz)

VA or W
maintained
(max)

LC1F150

50
60

Coil voltages
interposing relay not
required

interposing relay required

45

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

AC = 380/400, 415/440,
500, 660, 1000

45

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240, 265/277,
380, 415, 460/480, 660,
1000

5
LC1F185(1)

DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,

220/230, 250, 440/460

50

55

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

60

55

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240, 265/277,
380, 415, 460/480, 660,
1000

5
LC1F225(1)

DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,

220/230, 250, 440/460

50

55

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

AC = 380/400, 415/440,
500, 660, 1000

60

55

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

AC = 265/277, 380, 415,

460/480, 660, 1000

5
LC1F265

LC1F330

LC1F400

40...400(2)

DC = 24, 48, 110, 125,

220/230, 250, 440/460

10

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

AC = 277, 380/415,
480/500, 600/660, 1000

DC = 24

DC = 48, 110, 125, 220/230,

250, 440/460

10

AC = 24, 42, 48, 110/115,

127, 220/230, 240

AC = 277, 380/415,
480/500, 600/660, 1000

DC = 24

DC = 48, 110, 125, 220/230,

250, 440/460

15

AC = 48, 110/120, 125, 127, AC = 265, 277, 380/400,

200/208, 220/230, 230/240 415/480, 500, 550/600,
1000

8
LC1F500

18

DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250,

440
AC = 48, 110/120, 127,
200/208, 220/230, 230/240,
265, 277, 380/400, 415/480,
500, 550/600, 1000

8
LC1F630

22

DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250,

440
AC = 48, 110/120, 125, 127, AC = 265/277, 380/400,
200/208, 220/240
415/480, 500, 550/600,
1000

73
LC1F780(1)

50

DC = 48, 110, 125, 220, 250,

440
AC = 110/120, 127,
200/208, 220/240

52
LC1F800

AC = 380/400, 415/440,
500, 660, 1000

15

AC = 265/277, 380,
415/480, 500
DC = 110, 125, 220, 250,
440

AC = 110/127, 220/240

25

AC = 380/440
DC =110/127, 220/240,
380/440

(1) Dual-parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay.

(2) Control circuit frequency may be 40-400 Hz; but power to contactors, monitored by CTs, must be 50 Hz
or 60 Hz in frequency.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

359

Technical Data

NEMA Type S Contactors

Catalog references and characteristics for NEMA Type S contactors are listed in the table below. Coil
voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required:
NEMA size VA maintained
(max)

Control Circuit
Frequency
(Hz)

00

33

50/60

00, 0,1

27

37

Coil voltages
interposing relay not
required

interposing relay required

24, 115, 120, 208, 220, 240

277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600

115, 120, 208, 220, 240

277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600

38
3

47
89

4
5

15

115, 120, 208, 220, 240

277, 380, 440, 480

59

115, 120, 208, 220, 240

277, 380, 440, 480, 550, 600

360

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Configurable Parameters
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Appendix B
Configurable Parameters

Configurable Parameters

Overview
The configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module are described
below. The sequence of parameter configuration depends on the configuration tool utilized, either an
HMI device or SoMove with the TeSys T DTM.
Parameters are grouped according to the TeSys T DTM parameter list tab. To help you find the link with
the variable tables in the Use chapter, each parameter has its corresponding register number attached.

WARNING
RISK OF UNINTENDED CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
When modifying parameter settings of the LTM R controller:

Be especially careful if you change parameter settings when the motor is running.
Disable network control of the LTM R controller to prevent unintended parameter configuration and
operation.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Main Settings

362

Control

363

Communication

365

Thermal

366

Current

367

Voltage

369

Power

371

HMI

372

361

Configurable Parameters

Main Settings
Phases
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Motor phases

3-phase motor
single-phase motor

3-phase motor

Operating Mode
Parameter

Setting Range

Motor operating mode

Motor star-delta

0 = disabled
1 = enabled

Overload 2-wire
Overload 3-wire
Independent 2-wire
Independent 3-wire
Reverser 2-wire
Reverser 3-wire
Two-step 2-wire
Two-step 3-wire
Two-speed 2-wire
Two-speed 3-wire
Custom

Factory Setting
Independent 3-wire

Contactor
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Contactor rating

1...1,000 A in increments of 0.1 A

810 A

Motor
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Motor nominal voltage

110690 V

400 V

Motor nominal power

0.134...1339.866 HP

10.05 HP

Motor nominal power

0.1...999.9 kW in increments of 0.1 kW

7.5 kW

Motor auxiliary fan cooled

Disable
Enable

Disable

Motor full load current ratio (FLC1)

5...100 % FLCmax in increments of 1 %

5 % FLCmax

Motor full load current

Motor high speed full load current ratio

(FLC2)

5...100 % FLCmax in increments of 1 %

5 % FLCmax

Motor high speed full load current (FLC2)

0...100 A in increments of 1 A

5A

Load Current Transformer

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Load CT primary

1...65,535 in increments of 1

Load CT secondary

1...500 in increments of 1

Load CT multiple passes

1...100 passes in increments of 1

Ground Current Transformer

362

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Ground current mode

Internal
External

Internal

Ground CT primary

1...65,535 in increments of 1

Ground CT secondary

1...65,535 in increments of 1

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Configurable Parameters

Control
Operating Mode
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Control direct transition

On / Off

Off

Motor transition timeout

0...999.9 s

1s

Motor Step 1 to 2 threshold

20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 %

150 % FLC

Motor Step 1 to 2 timeout

0.1...999.9 s

5s

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Controller AC logic inputs configuration

Logic input 3 external ready enable

Disable
Enable

Inputs/Outputs

Unknown
Lower than 170V 50Hz
Lower than 170V 60Hz
Greater than 170V 50Hz
Greater than 170V 60Hz

Unknown

Disable

Rapid Cycle
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Rapid cycle lockout timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

0s

Local/Remote Control
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Control remote channel setting

Network
Terminal strip
HMI

Network

Control local channel setting

Terminal strip
HMI

Terminal strip

Control transfer mode

Bump
Bumpless

Bump

Control remote local buttons enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Control remote local default mode

Remote
Local

Remote

Stop HMI disable

Enable
Disable

Disable

Stop terminal strip disable

Enable
Disable

Disable

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Diagnostic fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Diagnostic warning enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Wiring fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Motor phases sequence

ABC
ACB

ABC

Diagnostic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

363

Configurable Parameters

Fault and Warning

364

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Fault reset mode

Manual or HMI
Remote by network
Automatic

Manual or HMI

Auto-reset attempts group 1 setting

0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited
number of reset attempts

Auto-reset group 1 timeout

0...9,999 s in increments of 1 s

480 s

Auto-reset attempts group 2 setting

0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited
number of reset attempts

Auto-reset group 2 timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

1,200 s

Auto-reset attempts group 3 setting

0 = manual, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 = unlimited
number of reset attempts

Auto-reset group 3 timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

60 s

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Configurable Parameters

Communication
Network Port
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Network port address setting

1...127

Undefined value

Network port baud rate setting

Self detection

Autobaud

Network port endian setting

LSW first (little endian)

MSW first (big endian)

MSW first (big endian)

Network port fallback setting

Hold LO1 LO2

Run (2-step) or off
LO1, LO2 off
LO1, LO2 on (ovl, ind, cust) or
off
LO1 on or off (2-step)
LO2 on or off (2-step)

LO1, LO2 off

Network port fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Network port warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Config via network port enable

Forbidden
Allowed

Allowed

HMI Port
Parameter

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Setting Range

Factory Setting

HMI port address setting

1...247

HMI port baud rate setting

HMI port parity setting

None
Even

Even

HMI port endian setting

LSW first (little endian)

MSW first (big endian)

MSW first (big endian)

HMI port fallback setting

HMI port fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

HMI port warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Config via HMI engineering tool enable

Forbidden
Allowed

Allowed

Config via HMI keypad enable

Forbidden
Allowed

Allowed

4800
9600
19,200
Self detection

Hold LO1 LO2

Run (2-step) or off
LO1, LO2 off
LO1, LO2 on (ovl, ind, cust) or off
LO1 on or off (2-step)
LO2 on or off (2-step)

1
19,200 bits/s

LO1, LO2 off

365

Configurable Parameters

Thermal
Thermal Overload
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Thermal overload mode

Definite
Inverse thermal

Inverse thermal

Motor trip class

Thermal overload fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Thermal overload fault reset threshold

35...95 % in increments of 1 %

75 %

Thermal overload warning enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Motor class 5
Motor class 10
Motor class 15
Motor class 20
Motor class 25
Motor class 30

Motor class 5

Thermal overload warning threshold

10...100 % in increments of 1 %

85 %

Long start fault timeout

1...200 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Thermal overload fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Thermal overload fault definite timeout

1...300 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Thermal overload warning enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Motor Temperature
Parameters

Setting range

Motor temperature sensor type

Motor temperature sensor fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Motor temperature sensor fault threshold

20...6,500

20

None
PTC binary
PT100
PTC analog
NTC analog

Motor temperature sensor fault threshold degree 0...200 C

366

Factory setting
None

0 C

Motor temperature sensor warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Motor temperature sensor warning threshold

20...6,500

20

Motor temperature sensor warning threshold

degree

0...200 C

0 C

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Configurable Parameters

Current
Ground Current
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Ground current disable while motor starting

No
Yes

No

Ground current fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Internal ground current fault threshold

20...500 % FLCmin in increments of 1 %

30 % FLCmin

Internal ground current fault timeout

0.5...25 s in increments of 0.1 s

1s

External ground current fault threshold

0.01...20 A in increments of 0.01 A

1A

External ground current fault timeout

0.1...25 s in increments of 0.01 s

0.5 s

Ground Current warning enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Internal ground current warning threshold

50...500 % FLCmin in increments of 1 %

50 % FLCmin

External ground current warning threshold

0.01...20 A in increments of 0.01 A

1A

Phases
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Current phase imbalance fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Current phase imbalance fault threshold

10...70 % in increments of 1 %

10 %

Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting

0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s

0.7 s

Current phase imbalance fault timeout running

0.2...20 s in increments of 0.1 s

5s

Current phase imbalance warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Current phase imbalance warning threshold

10...70 % in increments of 1 %

10 %

Current phase loss fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Current phase loss timeout

0.1...30 s in increments of 0.1 s

3s

Current phase loss warning enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Current phase reversal fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Long Start
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Long start fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Long start fault threshold

100...800 % FLC in increments of 1 %

100 % FLC

Long start fault timeout

1...200 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Jam

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Jam fault enable

Disable
Enable

Enable

Jam fault threshold

100...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 200 % FLC

Jam fault timeout

1...30 s in increments of 1 s

5s

Jam warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Jam warning threshold

100...800 % FLC in increments of 1 % 200 % FLC

367

Configurable Parameters

Undercurrent
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Undercurrent Fault Enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Undercurrent Fault Threshold

30...100 % FLC in increments of 1 %

50 % FLC

Undercurrent Fault Timeout

1...200 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Undercurrent Warning Enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Undercurrent Warning Threshold

30...100 % FLC in increments of 1 %

50 % FLC

Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Overcurrent fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Overcurrent Fault Threshold

20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 %

200 % FLC

Overcurrent fault timeout

1...250 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Overcurrent warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Overcurrent warning threshold

20...800 % FLC in increments of 1 %

200 % FLC

Overcurrent

368

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Configurable Parameters

Voltage
Phases
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Voltage phase imbalance fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold

3...15 % of the calculated imbalance

in increments of 1 %

10 % imbalance

Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting

0.2...20 s in increments of 1 s

0.7 s

Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running

0.2...20 s in increments of 1 s

2s

Voltage phase imbalance warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold

3...15 % of the calculated imbalance

in increments of 1 %

10 % imbalance

Voltage phase loss fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Voltage phase loss fault timeout

0.1...30 s in increments of 0.1 s

3s

Voltage phase loss warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Voltage phase reversal fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Undervoltage
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Undervoltage fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Undervoltage fault threshold

70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage

in increments of 1 %

85 % of Motor nominal
voltage

Undervoltage fault timeout

0.2...25 s in increments of 0.1 s

3s

Undervoltage warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Undervoltage warning threshold

70...99 % of Motor nominal voltage

in increments of 1 %

85 % of Motor nominal
voltage

Overvoltage

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Overvoltage fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Overvoltage fault threshold

101...115 % of Motor nominal

voltage in increments of 1 %

110 % of Motor
nominal voltage

Overvoltage fault timeout

0.2...25 s in increments of 0.1 s

3s

Overvoltage warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Overvoltage warning threshold

101...115 % of Motor nominal

voltage in increments of 1 %

110 % of Motor
nominal voltage

369

Configurable Parameters

Voltage Dip

370

Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Voltage dip mode

None
Load shedding
Auto-restart

None

Voltage dip threshold

50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in

increments of 1 %

65 % of Motor nominal
voltage

Load shedding timeout

1...9999 s in increments of 1 s

10 s

Voltage dip restart threshold

65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in

increments of 1 %

90 % of Motor nominal
voltage

Voltage dip restart timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

2s

Voltage dip threshold

50...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in

increments of 1 %

65 % of Motor nominal
voltage

Voltage dip restart threshold

65...115 % of Motor nominal voltage in

increments of 1 %

90 % of Motor nominal
voltage

Voltage dip restart timeout

0...9999 s in increments of 1 s

2s

Auto restart immediate timeout

0...0.4 s in increments of 0.1 s

0.2 s

Auto restart delayed timeout

0...301 s in increments of 1 s

4s

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Configurable Parameters

Power
Underpower
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Underpower fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Underpower fault threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 20 % of Motor nominal

increments of 1 %
power

Underpower fault timeout

1...100 s in increments of 1 s

60 s

Underpower warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Underpower warning threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power in 30 % of Motor nominal

increments of 1 %
power

Overpower
Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Overpower fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Overpower fault threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power

in increments of 1 %

150 % of Motor
nominal power

Overpower fault timeout

1...100 s in increments of 1 s

60 s

Overpower warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Overpower warning threshold

20...800 % of Motor nominal power

in increments of 1 %

150 % of Motor
nominal power

Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Under power factor fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Under power factor fault threshold

0...1 in increments of 0.01

0.6

Under power factor fault timeout

1...25 s in increments of 0.1 s

10 s

Under power factor warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Under power factor warning threshold

0...1 in increments of 0.01

0.6

Under Power Factor

Over Power Factor

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameters

Setting range

Factory setting

Over power factor fault enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Over power factor fault threshold

0...1 in increments of 0.01

0.9

Under power factor fault timeout

1...25 s in increments of 0.1 s

10 s

Over power factor warning enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Over power factor warning threshold

0...1 in increments of 0.01

0.9

371

Configurable Parameters

HMI
HMI Display
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

HMI language setting

English

HMI display contrast setting

0...255

127

HMI display brightness setting

0...255

127

HMI motor status LED color

Red
Green

Red

HMI Keyboard
Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

Control remote local buttons enable

Disable
Enable

Disable

Stop HMI disable

Yes
No

No

HMI Display Scroll View

372

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

HMI display motor status enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display date enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display time enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display operating time enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display starts per hour enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display I/O status enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display control mode enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display thermal capacity level enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display time to trip enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI motor temperature sensor enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display temperature sensor degree CF

C
F

HMI display average current enable

Hidden
Displayed

Displayed

HMI display L1 current enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L2 current enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L3 current enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display average current ratio enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L1 current ratio enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Configurable Parameters

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Parameter

Setting Range

Factory Setting

LHMI display L2 current ratio enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L3 current ratio enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display current phase imbalance enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display ground current enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display start statistics enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display average voltage enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L1-L2 voltage enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L2-L3 voltage enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display L3-L1 voltage enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display frequency enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display power factor enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display active power enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display reactive power enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

HMI display power consumption enable

Hidden
Displayed

Hidden

373

Configurable Parameters

374

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Wiring Diagrams
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Appendix C
Wiring Diagrams

Wiring Diagrams

Overview
The LTM R operating mode wiring diagrams can be drawn according to IEC or NEMA standards.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH

Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it.
Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe electrical work practices.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
LOGIC INPUTS DESTRUCTION HAZARD

Connect the LTM R controllers inputs using the 3 Common (C) terminals connected to the A1 control
voltage via an internal filter.
Do not connect the Common (C) terminal to the A1 or A2 control voltage inputs.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

What Is in This Chapter?
This chapter contains the following sections:
Section

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Topic

Page

C.1

IEC Format Wiring Diagrams

376

C.2

NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams

395

375

Wiring Diagrams

Section C.1
IEC Format Wiring Diagrams

IEC Format Wiring Diagrams

Overview
This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre-configured operating modes:
Overload

Monitoring of the motor load where control (start/stop) of the motor load is
achieved by a mechanism other than the controller

Independent

Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting

applications

Reverser

Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting

applications

Two-Step

Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including:

Wye-Delta
Open Transition Primary Resistor
Open Transition Autotransformer

Two-Speed

Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including:

Dahlander (consequent pole)
Pole Changer

Each application is described individually, with:

1 complete application diagram
(including power and control)

3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control

3 partial diagrams
(control logic input wiring variants)

2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control

3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable
2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic

376

Page

Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

377

Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams

381

Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

383

Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

385

Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams

387

Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

389

Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams

391

Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams

393

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

377

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

378

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

N Network
TS Terminal strip

1639502EN-04 09/2014

379

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

N Network
TS Terminal strip

380

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

Stop Start

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

1639502EN-04 09/2014

381

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Start

Stop

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

382

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Start FW Start forward

Start RV Start reverse
1 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1
and O.2.

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

FW O RV

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

FW Forward
O Off
RV Reverse

1639502EN-04 09/2014

383

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Start
FW

Start
RV

Stop

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control
Start FW Start forward
Start RV Start reverse

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

FW

RV

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control
FW Forward
RV Reverse

384

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1
and O.2.

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

Stop Start

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

1639502EN-04 09/2014

385

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Stop

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

386

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

Stop Start

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

1639502EN-04 09/2014

387

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Stop

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

388

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1
and O.2.

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

Stop Start

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

1639502EN-04 09/2014

389

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Stop

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control

390

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The controller can also be placed
upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode, all the
wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size.
2 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O.1
and O.2.

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

LS O HS

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

LS Low speed
O Off
HS High speed

1639502EN-04 09/2014

391

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Start
LS

Start
HS

Stop

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L
O
N
LS
HS

Terminal strip control

Off
Network control
Low speed
High speed

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

LS HS

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L
O
N
LS
HS

392

Terminal strip control

Off
Network control
Low speed
High speed

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

LS Low speed
HS High speed
1 A pole-changing application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows. The controller can also be
placed upstream of the contactors. If this is the case, all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same
size.
2 The N.C. interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller firmware interlocks O.1 and
O.2.

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~

LS O HS

A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

LS Low speed
O Off
HS High speed

1639502EN-04 09/2014

393

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

Start
LS

Start
HS

Stop

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Terminal strip control

O Off
N Network control
Start LS Start Low speed
Start HS Start High speed

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

L ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

LS HS

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L
O
N
LS
HS

394

Terminal strip control

Off
Network control
Low speed
High speed

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Section C.2
NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams

NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams

Overview
This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre-configured operating modes:
Overload

Monitoring of the motor load where control (start/stop) of the motor load is
achieved by a mechanism other than the controller

Independent

Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage non-reversing motor starting

applications

Reverser

Direct-on-line (across-the-line) full-voltage reversing motor starting

applications

Two-Step

Reduced voltage starting motor applications, including:

Wye-Delta
Open Transition Primary Resistor
Open Transition Autotransformer

Two-Speed

Two-speed motor applications for motor types, including:

Dahlander (consequent pole)
Pole Changer

Each application is described individually, with:

1 complete application diagram
(including power and control)

3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control

3 partial diagrams
(control logic input wiring variants)

2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control

3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control selectable
2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control selectable

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Page

Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

396

Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams

400

Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

402

Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

404

Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams

406

Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

408

Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole)

410

Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding

412

395

Wiring Diagrams

Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

396

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

397

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

398

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

399

Wiring Diagrams

Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
OFF

ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

400

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

H O A
A1

Stop

A2
A3

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2

H O A
I
I

H O A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95 96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

401

Wiring Diagrams

Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

F
R

Forward
Reverse

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

A1
A2

F
I

O R
I

A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

F Forward
O Off
R Reverse

402

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

Stop

A2
A3

F
R

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

A
A1

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

F
R
H
O
A

Forward
Reverse
Hand (Terminal strip control)
Off
Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

A1
A2

H O A
I
I

A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

F
R
H
O
A

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Forward
Reverse
Hand (Terminal strip control)
Off
Automatic (Network control)

403

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Step Wye-Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
OFF

ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

404

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

H O A
A1

Stop

A2
A3

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2

H O A
I
I

H O A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

405

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
OFF

ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

406

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

H O A
A1

Stop

A2
A3

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2

H O A
I
I

H O A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

407

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:
OFF

ON

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

408

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

H O A
A1

Stop

A2
A3

Start
+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:
A1
A2

H O A
I
I

H O A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

H Hand (Terminal strip control)

O Off
A Automatic (Network control)

1639502EN-04 09/2014

409

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Single Winding (Consequent Pole)

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

L
H

Low
High

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

A1
A2

H
A1

L
I

O H
I

A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Low speed
O Off
H High speed

410

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

A
A1

STOP

A2

LS

A3

HS

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

LS
HS
H
O
A

Low speed
High speed
Hand (Terminal strip control)
Off
Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

LS

HS

A1
A2

H O A
I
I

A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

LS
HS
H
O
A

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Low speed
High speed
Hand (Terminal strip control)
Off
Automatic (Network control)

411

Wiring Diagrams

Two-Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams: Separate Winding

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

L
H

Low
High

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control

The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control wiring diagram:

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

A1
A2

H
A1

L
I

O H
I

A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

L Low speed
O Off
H High speed

412

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Wiring Diagrams

Application Diagram with 3-Wire (Impulse) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 3-wire (impulse) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

A1
A2
A3

H O A
I
I
I

STOP

A
A1
A2
A3

LS
HS

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

LS
HS
H
O
A

Low speed
High speed
Hand (Terminal strip control)
Off
Automatic (Network control)

Application Diagram with 2-Wire (Maintained) Terminal Strip Control with Network Control Selectable
The following application diagram features a 2-wire (maintained) terminal strip control with network control
selectable wiring diagram:

LS

HS

A1
A2

H O A
I
I

A
A1
A2

+/~ -/~
A1 A2

I.1

I.2

I.3

I.4

I.5

I.6

97

98

95

96

O.4

LS
HS
H
O
A

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Low speed
High speed
Hand (Terminal strip control)
Off
Automatic (Network control)

413

Wiring Diagrams

414

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Glossary
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Glossary
A
active power
Also known as real power, active power is the rate of producing, transferring or using electrical energy. It
is measured in watts (W) and often expressed in kilowatts (kW) or megawatts (MW).
analog
Describes inputs (e.g. temperature) or outputs (e.g. motor speed) that can be set to a range of values.
Contrast with discrete.
apparent power
The product of current and voltage, apparent power consists of both active power and reactive power. It is
measured in volt-amperes and often expressed in kilovolt-amperes (kVA) or megavolt-amperes (MVA).

C
CANopen
An open industry standard protocol used on the internal communication bus. The protocol allows the
connection of any standard CANopen device to the island bus.
CT
current transformer.

D
definite time
A variety of TCC or TVC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay remains a constant, and does
not vary in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity (e.g. current). Contrast with inverse
thermal.
device
In the broadest terms, any electronic unit that can be added to a network. More specifically, a
programmable electronic unit (e.g. PLC, numeric controller or robot) or I/O card.
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is a low-level, connection-based network protocol that is based on CAN, a serial bus system
without a defined application layer. DeviceNet, therefore, defines a layer for the industrial application of
CAN.
DIN
Deutsches Institut fr Normung. The European organization that organizes the creation and maintenance
of dimensional and engineering standards.
DIN rail
A steel mounting rail, made pursuant to DIN standards (typically 35 mm wide), that allows for easier "snapon" mounting of IEC electrical devices, including the LTM R controller and the expansion module. Contrast
with screw mounting of devices to a control panel by drilling and tapping holes.
discrete
Describes inputs (e.g. switches) or outputs (e.g. coils) that can be only On or Off. Contrast with analog.
DPST
double-pole/single-throw. A switch that connects or disconnects 2 circuit conductors in a single branch
circuit. A DPST switch has 4 terminals, and is the equivalent of 2 single-pole/single-throw switches
controlled by a single mechanism, as depicted below:

1639502EN-04 09/2014

415

Glossary

E
endian setting (big endian)
big endian means that the high-order byte/word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address,
and the low-order byte/word at the highest address (the big end comes first).
endian setting (little endian)
little endian means that the low-order byte/word of the number is stored in memory at the lowest address,
and the high-order byte/word at the highest address (the little end comes first).
EtherNet/IP
(Ethernet Industrial Protocol) is an industrial application protocol built on TCP/IP and CIP protocols. It is
mainly used on automated networks, it defines network devices as network objects as to allow the
communication between industrial control system and their components; (programmable automation
controller, programmable logic controller, I/O systems).

F
FLC
full load current. Also known as rated current. The current the motor will draw at the rated voltage and rated
load. The LTM R controller has 2 FLC settings: FLC1 (Motor Full Load Current Ratio) and FLC2 (Motor
High Speed Full Load Current Ratio), each set as a percentage of FLC max.
FLC1
Motor Full Load Current Ratio. FLC parameter setting for low or single speed motors.
FLC2
Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio. FLC parameter setting for high-speed motors.
FLCmax
Full Load Current Max. Peak current parameter.
FLCmin
Minimum Full Load Current. The smallest amount of motor current the LTM R controller will support. This
value is determined by the LTM R controller model.

H
hysteresis
A valueadded to lower limit threshold settings or subtracted from upper limit threshold settingsthat
retards the response of the LTM R controller before it stops measuring the duration of faults and warnings.

I
inverse thermal
A variety of TCC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay is generated by a thermal model of the
motor and varies in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity (e.g. current). Contrast with
definite time.

M
Modbus
Modbus is the name of the master-slave/client-server serial communications protocol developed by
Modicon (now Schneider Automation, Inc.) in 1979, which has since become a standard network protocol
for industrial automation.

416

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Glossary

N
nominal power
Motor Nominal Power. Parameter for the power a motor will produce at rated voltage and rated current.
nominal voltage
Motor Nominal Voltage. Parameter for rated voltage.
NTC
negative temperature coefficient. Characteristic of a thermistora thermally sensitive resistorwhose
resistance increases as its temperature falls, and whose resistance decreases as its temperature rises.
NTC analog
Type of RTD.

P
PLC
programmable logic controller.
power factor
Also called cosine phi (or ), power factor represents the absolute value of the ratio of active power to
apparent power in AC power systems.
PROFIBUS DP
An open bus system that uses an electrical network based on a shielded 2-wire line or an optical network
based on a fiber-optic cable.
PT100
Type of RTD.
PTC
positive temperature coefficient. Characteristic of a thermistora thermally sensitive resistorwhose
resistance increases as its temperature rises, and whose resistance decreases as its temperature falls.
PTC analog
Type of RTD.
PTC binary
Type of RTD.

R
reset time
Time between a sudden change in the monitored quantity (e.g. current) and the switching of the output
relay.
rms
root mean square. A method of calculating average AC current and average AC voltage. Because AC
current and AC voltage are bi-directional, the arithmetic average of AC current or voltage always equals 0.
RTD
resistance temperature detector. A thermistor (thermal resistor sensor) used to measure the temperature
of the motor. Required by the LTM R controllers Motor Temp Sensor motor protection function.

T
TCC
trip curve characteristic. The type of delay used to trip the flow of current in response to a fault condition.
As implemented in the LTM R controller, all motor protection function trip time delays are definite time,
except for the Thermal Overload function, which also offers inverse thermal trip time delays.
TVC
trip voltage characteristic. The type of delay used to trip the flow of voltage in response to a fault condition.
As implemented by the LTM R controller and the expansion module, all TVCs are definite time.

1639502EN-04 09/2014

417

Glossary

418

1639502EN-04 09/2014

TeSys T LTM R PROFIBUS DP

Index
1639502EN-04 09/2014

Index
A
active power, 37, 38, 53, 265, 325
consumption, 38
n-0, 274, 317
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
acyclic accesses DP V0
PKW encapsulated, 298
altitude derating
controller, 354
LTM E expansion module, 356
apparent power, 37
auto restart
delayed condition, 325
delayed count, 316
delayed restart timeout, 370
delayed timeout, 117, 328
immediate condition, 325
immediate count, 316
immediate restart timeout, 370
immediate timeout, 117, 328
manual condition, 325
manual count, 316
status register, 325
auto-reset
attempts group 1 setting, 170, 267, 331
attempts group 2 setting, 170, 267, 331
attempts group 3 setting, 170, 267, 331
count, 51
group 1 timeout, 170, 267, 331
group 2 timeout, 170, 267, 331
group 3 timeout, 170, 267, 331
automatic fault reset
attempts group1, 364
attempts group2, 364
attempts group3, 364
timeout group1, 364
timeout group2, 364
timeout group3, 364
automatic restart, 117
average current
n-0, 274, 319
n-1, 274, 319
n-2, 319
n-3, 320
n-4, 320
ratio, 265
average current ratio, 53, 263
n-0, 316
n-1, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318

1639502EN-04 09/2014

average voltage, 36, 53

n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319

B
baud rate, 286
bus cables
length, 218

C
command
clear all, 41, 176, 228, 334
clear controller settings, 176, 264, 334
clear network port settings, 177, 334
clear statistics, 51, 176, 264, 334
clear thermal capacity level, 66, 169, 176, 334
fault reset, 264, 334
logic outputs register, 334
motor low speed, 159, 334
motor run forward, 149, 151, 154, 159, 334
motor run reverse, 151, 154, 159, 334
self test, 334, 344, 344
statistics, 41
commissioning
first power-up, 228
introduction, 226
verify configuration, 237
verify wiring, 235
communication configuration
via engineering tool enable, 365
via HMI keyboard enable, 365
via network port enable, 365
communication loss, 46
config via
HMI engineering tool enable, 226, 329
HMI keypad enable, 226, 329
HMI network port enable, 226
network port enable, 329
configurable settings, 62
configuration checksum, 46
configuration file, 163
configuration via SyCon, 288
connecting the bus, 219
contactor rating, 330, 362
control
direct transition, 153, 159, 266, 333
principles, 143
register 1, 334
register 2, 334
setting register, 333
transfer mode, 333

419

Index

control channels, 132, 133

HMI, 133
network, 134
selecting, 133
terminal strip, 133
control circuit
2-wire, 144
3-wire, 144
control local
channel setting, 266, 333
control remote
channel setting, 333, 372
local buttons enable, 333
local default mode, 333
control transfer mode, 134, 266
control via HMI, 322
control voltage characteristics
LTM R controller, 353
control wiring, 144
controller
AC inputs configuration register, 327
AC logic inputs configuration, 327
altitude derating, 354
commercial reference, 275, 314
compatibility code, 314
config checksum, 325
firmware version, 314
ID code, 314
internal fault, 40
internal faults count, 53
internal temperature, 41, 325
internal temperature max, 41, 273, 315
internal temperature warning enable, 41
last power off duration, 325
port ID, 325
power, 322
serial number, 314
system config required, 228, 329
controller internal
faults count, 273
counters
communication loss, 53
internal faults, 53
current
average, 32, 325
ground, 325
L1, 325
L2, 325
L3, 325
phase imbalance, 265
range max, 314
scale ratio, 314
sensor max, 314
current highest imbalance
L1, 326
L2, 326
L3, 326

420

current phase imbalance, 33, 53, 84, 325

fault enable, 85, 268, 367
fault threshold, 85, 268, 329, 367
fault timeout running, 85, 268, 329, 367
fault timeout starting, 85, 268, 329, 367
faults count, 52, 273
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
warning enable, 85, 268, 367
warning threshold, 85, 268, 329, 367
current phase loss, 87
fault enable, 88, 268, 367
fault timeout, 367
faults count, 52
timeout, 88, 268, 327
warning enable, 88, 268, 367
current phase reversal, 89
fault enable, 89, 268, 367
faults count, 52
phase sequence, 89
current ratio
average, 32, 325
ground, 325
L1, 29, 325
L2, 29, 325
L3, 29, 325
custom logic
auxiliary 1 LED, 336
auxiliary 2 LED, 336
FLC selection, 336
LO1, 336
LO2, 336
LO3, 336
LO4, 336
memory space, 336
memory used, 336
network control, 336
non volatile space, 336
phase reverse, 336
reset, 336
run, 336
second step, 336
status register, 336
stop, 336
stop LED, 336
temporary space, 336
transition, 336
version, 336
custom logic command
external fault, 336
register 1, 336
custom logic monitoring
register 1, 336
system ready, 336
custom logic setting
register 1, 336
custom operating mode, 163
cyclic/acyclic services, 285

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Index

D
date and time, 53
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
setting, 332
definite time
long start fault timeout, 366
diagnostic
fault, 52
fault enable, 42, 271, 363
faults count, 52
warning enable, 271, 363
warning enables, 42
diagnostic faults
wiring faults, 44
diagnostic telegram, 303
display enable
active power, 373
average current, 372
average current ratio, 372
average voltage, 373
control mode, 372
current phase imbalance, 373
date, 372
frequency, 373
ground current, 373
inputs/outputs, 372
L1 current, 372
L1 current ratio, 372
L1L2 voltage, 373
L2 current, 372
L2 current ratio, 373
L2L3 voltage, 373
L3 current, 372
L3 current ratio, 373
L3L1 voltage, 373
last start, 373
motor status, 372
motor temperature, 372
operating time, 372
power consumption, 373
power factor, 373
reactive power, 373
remaining thermal capacity, 372
starts per hour, 372
temperature C or F, 372
thermal capacity level, 372
time, 372
time to trip, 372
voltage phase imbalance, 373
DP V1 services, 285

E
error codes
PKW, 299

1639502EN-04 09/2014

expansion
commercial reference, 275, 314
compatibility code, 314
firmware version, 314
ID code, 314
serial number, 314
expansion module
physical description, 24
external ground current, 101
fault threshold, 102, 269, 328, 367
fault timeout, 102, 269, 328, 367
warning threshold, 102, 269, 328, 367

F
failsafe option, 285
fallback
control transition, 135
fallback condition, 47
fault
controller internal, 321
current phase imbalance, 321
current phase loss, 321
current phase reversal, 321
diagnostic, 321
external system, 321
ground current, 321
HMI port, 321
internal port, 321
jam, 321
long start, 321
LTM E configuration, 322
LTM R configuration, 322
motor temperature sensor, 321
network port, 321
network port config, 321
over power factor, 321
overcurrent, 321
overpower, 321
overvoltage, 321
register 1, 321
register 2, 321
register 3, 322
reset timeout, 68
test, 321
thermal overload, 321
under power factor, 321
undercurrent, 321
underpower, 321
undervoltage, 321
voltage phase imbalance, 321
voltage phase loss, 321
voltage phase reversal, 321
wiring, 321
fault code, 53, 174, 175, 321
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318
fault counters
protection, 52

421

Index

fault enable
current phase imbalance, 330
current phase loss, 331
current phase reversal, 331
diagnostic, 331
ground current, 330
HMI port, 330
jam, 330
long start, 330
motor temperature sensor, 331
network port, 330
over power factor, 331
overcurrent, 331
overpower, 331
overvoltage, 331
register 1, 330
register 2, 331
test, 330
thermal overload, 330
under power factor, 331
undercurrent, 330
underpower, 331
undervoltage, 331
voltage phase imbalance, 331
voltage phase loss, 331
voltage phase reversal, 331
wiring, 331
fault management, 164
introduction, 165
fault power cycle requested, 322
fault reset
authorized, 322
auto-reset active, 322
fault reset mode, 264, 267, 329, 364
automatic, 169
manual, 167
remote, 172
fault statistics, 50
history, 53
faults count, 51, 273, 316
auto-resets, 315
controller internal, 315
current phase imbalance, 315
current phase loss, 316
diagnostic, 316
ground current, 315
HMI port, 315
internal port, 315
jam, 315
long start, 315
motor temperature sensor, 316
network port, 315
network port config, 315
over power factor, 316
overcurrent, 316
overpower, 316
overvoltage, 316
thermal overload, 315
under power factor, 316
undercurrent, 315
underpower, 316
undervoltage, 316
voltage phase imbalance, 316
voltage phase loss, 316
wiring, 316

422

features
PROFIBUS DP, 284
first power-up, 228
FLC, 139, 159
FLC settings, 231
FLC1, 159
FLC2, 159
FLCmax, 231
FLCmin, 231
frequency, 34, 53, 325
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
full load current max, 53, 314
n-0, 316
n-1, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
full load current settings, 231

G
general configuration
register 1, 329
register 2, 329
general purpose registers for logic functions, 336
ground CT
primary, 30, 101, 328
secondary, 30, 101, 328
ground current, 30, 98
disable while motor starting, 367
fault configuration, 327
fault enable, 98, 367
faults count, 52, 273
ground fault disabled, 98
mode, 30, 98, 99, 101, 269, 327, 362
n-0, 319
n-1, 319
n-2, 319
n-3, 320
n-4, 320
ratio, 30, 265
warning enable, 98, 269, 367
ground current ratio, 53
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
ground current transformer
primary, 362
secondary, 362
ground fault disabled
mode, 327
GS*-file
modules, 287

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Index

H
hardware configuration, 241
LTM R controller alone, 242
HMI
language setting, 332
language setting register, 332
HMI display
active power enable, 332
average current enable, 332
average current ratio enable, 332
average voltage enable, 332
brightness setting, 330, 372
contrast setting, 330, 372
control channel enable, 332
current phase imbalance enable, 332
date enable, 332
frequency enable, 332
ground current enable, 332
I/O status enable, 332
items register 1, 332
items register 2, 332
items register 3, 332
L1 current enable, 332
L1 current ratio enable, 332
L1-L2 voltage enable, 332
L2 current enable, 332
L2 current ratio enable, 332
L2-L3 voltage enable, 332
L3 current enable, 332
L3 current ratio enable, 332
L3-L1 voltage enable, 332
language setting, 372
motor status enable, 332
motor temperature sensor enable, 332
operating time enable, 332
power consumption enable, 332
power factor enable, 332
reactive power enable, 332
start statistics enable, 332
starts per hour enable, 332
temperature sensor degree CF, 332
thermal capacity level enable, 332
thermal capacity remaining enable, 332
time enable, 332
time to trip enable, 332
voltage phase imbalance enable, 332
HMI display temperature sensor degree CF, 34
HMI keys
independent operating mode, 150
overload operating mode, 148
reverser operating mode, 153
two-speed operating mode, 162
two-step operating mode, 158
HMI motor status LED color, 329, 372

1639502EN-04 09/2014

HMI port
address setting, 246, 329, 365
baud rate setting, 246, 264, 329, 365
comm loss, 322
comm loss timeout, 246
endian setting, 272, 329, 365
fallback action setting, 365
fallback setting, 246, 331
fault enable, 272, 365
faults count, 53, 273
parity setting, 246, 264, 329, 365
warning enable, 272, 365
hysteresis, 63

I
I/O status, 323
implementation via PROFIBUS DP
general information, 285
inputs/outputs
AC logic inputs configuration, 363
internal clock, 344
internal ground current, 99
fault threshold, 100, 269, 329, 367
fault timeout, 100, 269, 329, 367
warning threshold, 100, 269, 329, 367
internal port
faults count, 53, 273
introduction, 13

J
jam, 92
fault enable, 92, 268, 367
fault threshold, 92, 268, 329, 367
fault timeout, 92, 268, 329, 367
faults count, 52
warning enable, 92, 268, 367
warning threshold, 92, 268, 329, 367

L
L1 current
n-0, 319
n-1, 319
n-2, 319
n-3, 320
n-4, 320
L1 current highest imbalance, 84
L1 current ratio, 53, 265
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318
L1-L2 highest imbalance, 104
L1-L2 voltage, 53
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319

423

Index

L2 current
n-0, 319
n-1, 319
n-2, 319
n-3, 320
n-4, 320
L2 current highest imbalance, 84
L2 current ratio, 53, 265
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318
L2-L3 highest imbalance, 104
L2-L3 voltage, 53
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
L3 current
n-0, 319
n-1, 319
n-2, 319
n-3, 320
n-4, 320
L3 current highest imbalance, 84
L3 current ratio, 53, 265
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318
L3-L1 highest imbalance, 104
L3-L1 voltage, 53
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
line currents, 29
load CT
multiple passes, 330
primary, 330
ratio, 314
secondary, 330
load current transformer
multiple passes, 362
primary, 362
secondary, 362
load shedding, 115, 271, 322
timeout, 115, 271, 328, 370
load sheddings count, 55, 316
local control
channel setting, 363
local/remote control
default mode, 363
key enable, 363
stop key disable, 363
transfer mode, 363
logic file, 163
logic input
logic input 3 external ready, 363
logic input 3
external ready enable, 336

424

logic input behavior, 144

independent operating mode, 150
overload operating mode, 148
reverser operating mode, 152
two-speed operating mode, 161
two-step operating mode, 157
logic inputs characteristics
LTM R controller, 353
logic output behavior, 145
independent operating mode, 150
overload operating mode, 148
reverser operating mode, 152
two-speed operating mode, 162
two-step operating mode, 158
logic outputs characteristics
LTM R controller, 353
long start, 90
fault enable, 90, 268, 367
fault threshold, 90, 139, 268, 329, 367
fault timeout, 71, 90, 139, 268, 268, 329, 367
faults count, 52, 273
LTM E expansion module
technical specifications, 355
LTM R
physical description, 22
LTM R controller
technical specifications, 352

M
Magelis XBT L1000 programming software
file transfer, 250
install, 248
software application files, 249
Magelis XBTN410
programming, 247
Magelis XBTN410 (1-to-many), 251
command lines, 255
controller page, 265
controllers currents page, 263
controllers status page, 263
editing values, 257
fault management, 277
home page, 262
keypad, 252
LCD, 253
menu structure - level 2, 263
menu structure overview, 261
monitoring, 276
navigating the menu structure, 256
physical description, 252
product ID page, 275
remote reset page, 264
reset to defaults page, 264
service commands, 278
settings page, 266
statistics page, 273
value write command, 260
XBTN reference page, 264
maintenance, 339
detecting problems, 340
troubleshooting, 341
metering and monitoring functions, 27
minimum wait time, 321
modules in the GS*-file, 287

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Index

motor
auxiliary fan cooled, 65, 68, 266, 329
full load current, 362
full load current high speed, 362
full load current ratio, 53, 68, 71, 159, 268, 362
full load current ratio (FLC1), 332
full load current ratio high speed, 362
full load power, 122, 124
high speed full load current ratio, 68, 71, 159, 268
high speed full load current ratio (FLC2), 332
last start current, 273, 326
last start current ratio, 56
last start duration, 56, 273, 326
LO1 starts count, 55
LO2 starts count, 55
nominal power, 266, 328, 362, 362, 362
nominal voltage, 110, 112, 266, 328, 362
operating mode, 327, 362
phases, 44, 329
phases number, 362
phases sequence, 109, 329
predefined operating mode, 144
rapid cycle lockout timeout, 363
restart time undefined, 322
speed, 322
star-delta, 329, 362
starting, 322
starts count, 55
starts per hour count, 55, 326
step 1 to 2 threshold, 154, 266, 363
step 1 to 2 timeout, 154, 266, 363
temperature sensor, 265
temperature sensor type, 327
transition lockout, 322
transition mode, 363
transition timeout, 153, 154, 159, 266, 327, 363
trip class, 68, 268, 329
motor
average current ratio, 322
running, 322
motor control functions, 131
motor full load current max
n-0, 274
n-1, 274
motor full load current ratio
n-0, 274
n-1, 274
motor full load current ratio
n-0, 316
n-1, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318
motor history, 54
last start max current, 56
last start time, 56
motor operating time, 56
motor starts, 55
motor starts per hour, 55
motor operating mode
independent, 144
overload, 144
reverser, 144
two-speed, 144
two-step, 144

1639502EN-04 09/2014

motor phases sequence, 89

motor predefined operating mode
independent, 149
overload, 147
reverser, 151
two-speed, 159
two-step, 154
motor protection functions, 62
current phase imbalance, 84
current phase loss, 87
current phase reversal, 89
external ground current, 101
ground current, 98
internal ground current, 99
jam, 92
long start, 90
motor temperature sensor, 72
motor temperature sensor-NTC analog, 79
motor temperature sensor-PT100, 75
motor temperature sensor-PTC analog, 77
motor temperature sensor-PTC binary, 73
operation, 62
over power factor, 128
overcurrent, 96
overpower, 124
overvoltage, 112
thermal overload, 65
thermal overload - definite time, 70
thermal overload - inverse thermal, 66
under power factor, 126
undercurrent, 94
underpower, 122
undervoltage, 110
voltage phase imbalance, 104
voltage phase loss, 107
voltage phase reversal, 109
motor running, 58
motor starting, 58
motor starts count, 273, 315
motor step 1 to 2
threshold, 331
timeout, 331
motor temperature
fault enable, 366
fault threshold , 366
sensor threshold C, 366
sensor type, 366
warning enable, 366
warning threshold C, 366
warning threshold , 366
motor temperature sensor, 53, 72, 325
fault threshold, 327
display degree CF, 76
fault enable, 72, 266
fault threshold, 77, 79, 266
fault threshold degree, 76, 327
faults count, 52
n-0, 274
n-1, 274
PT100, 75
type, 44, 72, 73, 77, 79
warning, 72
warning enable, 266
warning threshold, 77, 79, 266, 327
warning threshold degree, 76, 327

425

Index

motor temperature sensor

n-0, 316
n-1, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
motor temperature sensor degree, 324
n-0, 319, 320
n-1, 319
n-2, 319
n-3, 320

N
network port
address setting, 333, 365
bad config, 325
bad rate setting, 365
baud rate, 325
baud rate setting, 333
comm loss timeout, 272, 333
communicating, 325
compatibility code, 314
config faults count, 53, 273
connected, 325
endian setting, 267, 272, 329, 365
fallback action setting, 365
fallback setting, 332
fault enable, 272, 365
faults count, 53, 273
firmware version, 275, 314
ID code, 275, 314
internal faults count, 53, 273
monitoring, 325
parity, 325
parity setting, 333
self-detecting, 325
self-testing, 325
warning enable, 272, 365
network port
comm loss, 322
node-ID, 286
NTC analog, 79

O
on level current, 139
operating modes, 142
custom, 163
independent, 149
introduction, 144
overload, 147
reverser, 151
two speed, 159
two-step, 154
operating states, 132, 136
chart, 137
not ready, 136
protection functions, 137
ready, 136
run, 136
start, 136
operating time, 56, 273, 315

426

over power factor, 128

fault enable, 128, 271, 371
fault threshold, 128, 271, 328
fault timeout, 128, 271, 328, 371
faults count, 52
warning enable, 128, 271, 371
warning threshold, 128, 271, 328, 371
overcurrent, 96
fault enable, 96, 269, 368
fault threshold, 96, 269, 327, 368
fault timeout, 96, 269, 327, 368
faults count, 52
warning enable, 96, 269, 368
warning threshold, 96, 269, 327, 368
overpower, 124
fault enable, 124, 271, 371
fault threshold, 124, 271, 328, 371
fault timeout, 124, 328, 371
fault timeout starting, 271
faults count, 52
warning enable, 124, 271, 371
warning threshold, 124, 271, 328, 371
overvoltage, 112
fault enable, 113, 270, 369
fault threshold, 113, 270, 328, 369
fault timeout, 113, 270, 328, 369
faults count, 52, 273
warning enable, 113, 270, 369
warning threshold, 113, 270, 328, 369

P
parameters
configurable, 361
phase imbalances register, 326
physical description
expansion module, 24
LTM R, 22
PKW data, 298
PKW error codes, 299
PKW feature, 285, 298
power consumption
active, 316
reactive, 316
power factor, 37, 53, 265, 325
n-0, 274, 317
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
predefined operating modes
control wiring and fault management, 146
preventive maintenance, 343
configuration settings, 343
environment, 343
statistics, 343
PROFIBUS DP, 221
baud rate, 286
features, 284
general information on implementation, 285
node address, 286
protocol principle, 284

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Index

protection functions, 61
communication, 166
configuration, 137, 166
current, 83, 138, 166
customized, 61
diagnostic, 137, 165
faults, 61
internal, 137, 166
motor temperature sensor, 138, 166
operating states, 137
power, 121, 138, 166
thermal , 64
thermal overload, 138, 166
voltage, 103, 138, 166
warnings, 61
wiring, 137, 166
PT100, 75
PTC analog, 77
PTC binary, 73

R
rapid cycle
lockout, 81, 322
lockout timeout, 81, 271, 327
reactive power, 38, 265, 325
consumption, 38
remote control
channel setting, 363
replacement
expansion module, 345
LTM R controller, 345

S
self test, 343, 344
enable, 343
services
cyclic/acyclic, 285
DP V1, 285
start cycle, 139
starts count
motor LO1, 316
motor LO2, 316
stop
key disable, 372
stop HMI
disable, 333
stop terminal strip
disable, 333
SyCon configuration tool, 288
system
fault, 263, 322
on, 263, 322
ready, 322
tripped, 322
warning, 322
system and device monitoring
faults, 39
system and device monitoring faults
control command diagnostic errors, 42
system operating status, 57
minimum wait time, 58
motor state, 58
system ready, 58

1639502EN-04 09/2014

system selection guide, 19

system status
logic inputs, 323
logic outputs, 323
register 1, 322
register 2, 322

T
technical specifications
LTM E expansion module, 355
LTM R controller, 352
terminal strip
terminal strip for stop disable, 363
TeSys T
motor management system, 14
thermal capacity level, 33, 53, 66, 68, 265, 325
n-0, 274, 316
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 317
n-3, 318
n-4, 318
thermal overload, 65
configuration, 327
definite time, 70
fault, 68
fault definite timeout, 71, 268, 327
fault enable, 65, 268, 366, 366
fault reset mode, 165
fault reset threshold, 68, 165, 268, 329, 366
fault reset timeout, 165
fault timeout, 366
faults count, 52, 68, 70, 273
inverse thermal, 66
mode, 65, 327, 366
motor class, 366
time to trip, 48
warning, 68
warning enable, 65, 268, 366, 366
warning threshold, 68, 71, 268, 329, 366
warnings count, 52, 68, 70, 273
time stamp, 344
time to trip, 48, 265, 325

U
under power factor, 126
fault enable, 126, 271, 371
fault threshold, 126, 271, 328, 371, 371
fault timeout, 126, 271, 328, 371
faults count, 52
warning enable, 126, 271, 371
warning threshold, 126, 271, 328, 371
undercurrent, 94
fault enable, 94, 269, 368
fault threshold, 94, 269, 329, 368
fault timeout, 94, 269, 329, 368
faults count, 52, 273
warning enable, 94, 269, 368
warning threshold, 94, 269, 329, 368

427

Index

underpower, 122
fault enable, 122, 271, 371
fault threshold, 122, 271, 328, 371
fault timeout, 122, 271, 328, 371
faults count, 52
warning enable, 122, 271, 371
warning threshold, 122, 271, 328, 371
undervoltage, 110
fault enable, 111, 270, 369
fault threshold, 111, 270, 328, 369
fault timeout, 111, 270, 328, 369
faults count, 52, 273
warning enable, 111, 270, 369
warning threshold, 111, 270, 328, 369
use, 239
LTM R controller alone, 240
programming the Magelis XBTN410, 247
user map
addresses, 305
addresses setting, 335
values, 305, 335

V
voltage
average, 36, 265, 325
L1-L2, 35, 265, 325
L2-L3, 35, 265, 325
L3-L1, 35, 265, 325
phase imbalance, 265, 325
voltage dip
configuration, 328
detection, 325
mode, 328, 370
occurred, 325
restart threshold, 115, 117, 271, 328, 370, 370
restart timeout, 115, 117, 271, 328, 370, 370
threshold, 115, 117, 271, 328, 370, 370
voltage dip mode, 117
voltage highest imbalance
L1-L2, 326
L2-L3, 326
L3-L1, 326
voltage imbalance, 35
voltage mode, 115
voltage phase imbalance, 35, 53, 104
fault enable, 105, 270, 369
fault threshold, 105, 270, 328, 369
fault timeout running, 105, 270, 328, 369
fault timeout starting, 105, 270, 328, 369
faults count, 52, 273
n-0, 274, 317
n-1, 274, 317
n-2, 318
n-3, 318
n-4, 319
warning enable, 105, 270, 369
warning threshold, 105, 270, 328, 369
voltage phase loss, 107
fault enable, 108, 270, 369
fault timeout, 108, 270, 328, 369
faults count, 52
warning enable, 108, 270, 369

428

voltage phase reversal, 109

fault enable, 109, 270, 369
faults count, 52, 89, 109

W
warning
controller internal temperature, 324
current phase imbalance, 324
current phase loss, 324
current phase reversal, 324
diagnostic, 324
ground current, 324
HMI port, 324
jam, 324
LTM E configuration, 324
motor temperature sensor, 324
network port, 324
over power factor, 324
overcurrent, 324
overpower, 324
overvoltage, 324
register 1, 324
register 2, 324
register 3, 324
thermal overload, 324
under power factor, 324
undercurrent, 324
underpower, 324
undervoltage, 324
voltage phase imbalance, 324
voltage phase loss, 324
warning code, 324
warning counters
protection, 52
warning enable
controller internal temperature, 330
current phase balance, 330
current phase loss, 331
diagnostic, 331
ground current, 330
HMI port, 330
jam, 330
motor temperature sensor, 331
network port, 330
over power factor, 331
overcurrent, 331
overpower, 331
overvoltage, 331
register 1, 330
register 2, 331
thermal overload, 330
under power factor, 331
undercurrent, 330
underpower, 331
undervoltage, 331
voltage phase imbalance, 331
voltage phase loss, 331
warnings count, 51, 52, 316
thermal overload, 315

1639502EN-04 09/2014

Index

wiring
fault, 44
fault enable, 44, 271, 363
faults count, 52
motor phase sequence, 363
Wiring of the PROFIBUS DP Network, 221

1639502EN-04 09/2014

429

1639502EN-04
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS30323
F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
www.schneider-electric.com

As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
of the information given in this publication.

09/2014